JP2020062304A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that increases interest of a predetermined performance accompanied by a predetermined operation.SOLUTION: The rates controlled to be in a big winning game state are different between a count-down performance to be executed in response to a pseudo-continuous performance executed in a main liquid crystal display device 35TM200 in which the displayed numerical value is subtracted and updated from an initial value (3) to a final value (0) and a count-up performance to be executed in response to an expectation notice performance executed in the main liquid crystal display device 35TM200 in which the displayed numerical value is added and updated from an initial value (50 to 90) to a final value (60 to 100).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13-7

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine that executes an effect that counts down the remaining time until the reach effect is started is disclosed.

JP, 2016-10508, A (Drawing 38).

  In the gaming machine that performs the predetermined operation such as the countdown described in Patent Document 1, there is room to enhance the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the effect of performing a predetermined operation.

The gaming machine of means S1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice announcement effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation of subtracting a numerical value, countup operation of adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the suggestive effect. And an executable predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
further,
A specific suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notification unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the specific suggestion effect,
The title notifying unit can notify the title corresponding to the specific suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the specific suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area. Moreover, since the notification of the title according to the specific suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means S2 is
A gaming machine of means S1,
The suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect (pseudo continuous effect) and a second suggestive effect (expectation degree notice effect),
The predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The first predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the first suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5), the countdown effect is executed in response to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect). ),
The second predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the second suggestion effect (as shown in (14) to (17) in FIG. 13-11, a count-up effect is generated in response to the execution of the expectation notice effect). Run)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect correspond to different types of suggestive effects, it is possible to clarify the correspondence relationship between the predetermined effect and the suggestive effect.

The game machine of means S3 is
A gaming machine of means S1 or means S2,
The predetermined operation includes a first predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) and a second predetermined operation (addition, countup operation) having different operation modes,
When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined operation is performed in a predetermined display area (when the countdown effect is executed, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 subtracts a numerical value), and the second predetermined effect Is executed in the predetermined display area (when the count-up effect is executed, a numerical value is added in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined motion and the second predetermined motion can be clarified, so that the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of means S4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means S1 to the means S3,
The display mode of the predetermined display area is different when the first predetermined effect is being executed and when the second predetermined effect is being executed (shown in (2) to (5) of FIG. 13-9). As described above, when the countdown effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed in white, and as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), when the countup effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed. (Displayed in blue or red mode)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The game machine of means S5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means S1 to the means S4,
An effect corresponding to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed in a special display area (main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17)). ), The initial value, the change pattern, and the final value of the numerical value bar 35TM610 shown in the expectation notice production on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are the initial value, the change pattern, and the numerical value shown in the count-up production. , Which matches the final value)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since effects related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed in the special display area, the effect of the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be enhanced. .

  The mode for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following means S6. Conventionally, in some gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-101428, at the start of the reach effect, there is a title display for notifying the type of the reach effect. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is desired to enhance the effect of presentation, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of presentation.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the means S6,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A specific suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notification unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the specific suggestion effect,
The title notifying unit can notify the title corresponding to the specific suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the specific suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the specific suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of means S7 is
A gaming machine of means S6,
The specific suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the specific suggestion effect,
In a plurality of types of the specific suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period can be executed in a common mode (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which specific suggestion effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means S8 is
A gaming machine of means S6 or means S7,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the specific suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, development effect or notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A game machine characterized in that the execution timing of the specific effect is not provided during the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even after the notification of the title.

The game machine of means S9 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means S6 to means S8,
The specific suggestion effect execution means includes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the specific suggestion effect. Is feasible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the specific suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means S10 is
A gaming machine of means S9,
A gaming machine characterized in that a ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means S11 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means S6 to the means S10,
The game machine characterized in that the specific suggestion effect executing means is capable of executing the specific suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means S12 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means S6 to means S11,
Detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player,
A specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that performs a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) are displayed. Is possible,
In the ineffective period of the detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I). )),
In the effective period of the detection by the detection means, the action effect using the changed second specific display is executed (for example, FIG. 8-11 (J), (K)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means S13 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means S6 to the means S12,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (a)) Display, etc.) and a second suggestion display in which the display size is the second size (such as the second size reach title image 31AK062 displayed during the reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)). Means (for example, image display device 5, CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means is
Multiple types of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) configured to include
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. 8-12 (a) and (d) in which shutter elements 31AK061 and reach title image 31AK062 all include elements E1 to E5, etc. are displayed. A gaming machine to do.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify that the specific image is displayed.

  As disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), a gaming machine that executes an effect that counts down the remaining time until the reach effect is started is disclosed. In a gaming machine that performs a predetermined operation such as countdown described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), there is room to enhance the effect. The inventions relating to the means R1 to means R7 have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the performance of performing a predetermined operation.

The game machine of means R1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice announcement effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation of subtracting a numerical value, countup operation of adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the suggestive effect. And an executable predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform subtraction of numerical values).
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, by displaying "70" as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a count-up operation is performed to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value), and
It is possible to execute a predetermined operation in a predetermined display area common to the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect (Figs. 13-9 (2) to (5) and 13-11 (14) to. As shown in (17), it is possible to perform numerical subtraction or numerical addition in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 that is common to the countdown effect and the countup effect.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect executed in the predetermined display area and improve the interest of the effect executed in the predetermined display area.

The game machine of means R2 is
A gaming machine of means R1,
The suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect (pseudo continuous effect) and a second suggestive effect (expectation degree notice effect),
The predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The first predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the first suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5), the countdown effect is executed in response to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect). ),
The second predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the second suggestion effect (as shown in (14) to (17) in FIG. 13-11, a count-up effect is generated in response to the execution of the expectation notice effect). Run)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect correspond to different types of suggestive effects, it is possible to clarify the correspondence relationship between the predetermined effect and the suggestive effect.

The gaming machine of means R3 is
A gaming machine of means R1 or means R2,
The predetermined operation includes a first predetermined operation (countdown operation for performing subtraction) and a second predetermined operation (countup operation for performing addition) having different operation modes,
When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the countdown effect is executed, a numerical value is subtracted from the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300), and the second predetermined operation is performed. When the effect is executed, the second predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the count-up effect is executed, a numerical value is added in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined motion and the second predetermined motion can be clarified, so that the player can clearly distinguish the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect.

The gaming machine of means R4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means R1 to means R3,
The display mode of the predetermined display area is different when the first predetermined effect is being executed and when the second predetermined effect is being executed (shown in (2) to (5) of FIG. 13-9). As described above, when the countdown effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed in white, and as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), when the countup effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed. (Displayed in blue or red mode)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The game machine of means R5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means R1 to means R4,
A display mode of the predetermined display area when the first predetermined effect is executed and a display mode of the predetermined display area when the second predetermined effect is executed are different (Fig. 13-9 (2) and As shown in FIG. 13-11 (14), "3" as an initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the countdown effect is executed and the sub liquid crystal display when the count up effect is executed. Different from "70" as the initial value of the count-up display displayed on the container 35TM300)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means R6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means R1 to means R5,
For at least one of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, there are a plurality of display modes of the predetermined display area when the predetermined effect is executed (the initial value of the count-up effect is the expectation notice effect) 13-6 (F) and (G), the initial values of the count-up effect are "50", "60", "70", "80", and Either "90" can be decided),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the display mode of the predetermined display area when the predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G), the same final value In such a case, when the initial value of the count-up effect is small, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the initial value of the count-up effect is large.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the display mode of the predetermined display area when the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect is executed.

The game machine of means R7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means R1 to means R6,
An effect corresponding to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed in a special display area (main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17)). ), The initial value, the change pattern, and the final value of the numerical value bar 35TM610 shown in the expectation notice production of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are the initial values of the numerical values shown in the count-up production of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It agrees with the value, change pattern, and final value)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since effects related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed in the special display area, the effect of the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be enhanced. .

  As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), when the timer effect is started in parallel with the progress of the battle effect (super reach effect), and the timer effect display reaches 0, the battle effect ( A gaming machine in which a result of (super reach effect) is derived is disclosed. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), the related effect (timer effect) related to the execution status of the suggestive effect (battle effect) suggesting that the game machine is controlled in the advantageous state. There is room to improve the interest. The inventions relating to the means T1 to the means T6 have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of related production.

The game machine of means T1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion production (music reach production, cut-in notice production) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
A related production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a related production (count display production) related to the execution state of the suggestive production,
As the execution status of the suggestive effect, the first step (a period of 1 second to 15 seconds in the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-15 (3)) and the second step after the first step (FIG. 13). As shown in -15 (4), there is a period of 16 seconds to 30 seconds in the music reach effect),
When the suggestive effect of the second stage is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestive effect of the first stage is executed and the suggestive effect of the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). As shown in -13 (A) to (D), the jackpot expectation is higher when the music reach effect is executed up to the second stage than when the music reach effect is ended at the first stage). ,
It is easier to recognize the related effect when the suggestive effect is at the second stage than when the suggestive effect is at the first stage (as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) and (4), music reach). When the presentation is in the first stage, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced, and the count display presentation in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced. While the visibility is reduced, when the music reach production is in the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the production position, so the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. However, the visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is in the first stage, it is more difficult to recognize the related effect as compared with when the suggestive effect is in the second stage, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

The game machine of means T2 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion production (music reach production, cut-in notice production) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
A related production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a related production (count display production) related to the execution state of the suggestive production,
As the execution status of the suggestive effect, the first step (a period of 1 second to 15 seconds in the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (3)) and the second step after the first step (FIG. 13). -19 (4), the period of 16 seconds to 30 seconds in the music reach production)
When the suggestive effect of the second stage is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestive effect of the first stage is executed and the suggestive effect of the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). As shown in -13 (C) and (D), the jackpot expectation is higher when the music reach production is executed up to the second stage than when the music reach production is completed in the first stage). ,
The rate at which the related effect is executed is higher when the suggestive effect is in the second stage than when the suggestive effect is in the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), music reach effect). Is higher when the music reach effect is at the second stage than when it is at the first stage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is at the first stage, the execution rate of the related effect is lower than when the suggestive effect is at the second stage.

The gaming machine of means T3 is
A gaming machine of means T1,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
It is possible to change the visibility of the related effect by changing the visibility of the predetermined display area (as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) and (4), the music reach effect is in the first stage). In this case, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced, and the visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced. On the other hand, when the music reach effect is in the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the effect position, so that the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. (The visibility of the count display effect in is improved.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to change the visibility of the related effect while sharing the effect information displayed in the predetermined display area.

The game machine of means T4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means T1 to means T3,
The related effect is an effect for updating the display corresponding to the execution period of the suggestive effect (as shown in FIG. 13-14, the execution period of the count display effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is music. (This is the same as the execution period (the period from T3 to T7B) from the start of the reach effect to the end of the music reach effect)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period during which the suggestive effect is being executed.

The game machine of means T5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means T1 to means T4,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
As a different effect from the related effect, a predetermined effect executing unit (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (timer effect) that performs a specific operation (timer subtraction) different from the predetermined operation,
When the related effect is executed, the proportion of the predetermined effect executed is lower than when the related effect is not executed (when the count display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 13-13 (E)). Indicates that the execution rate of the cut-in preview effect is lower than that when the count display effect is not executed, and the execution rate of the cut-in preview effect and the execution rate of the timer effect match, so the count display effect is executed. If it is done, the execution rate of the timer effect is lower than that when the count display effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effects such as a related effect and a predetermined effect as effects for performing an operation, and it is possible to suppress complication of effects while diversifying effects.

The game machine of means T6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means T1 to means T5,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
As an effect different from the suggestion effect (music reach effect), a special effect (pseudo) in an area different from the predetermined display area (the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200). Continuous production) can be executed,
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of the suggestive effect in the second stage is higher than when the special effect is not executed (when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed). The percentage of music reach production in the second stage is higher than in the case)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), when the timer effect is started in parallel with the progress of the battle effect (super reach effect), and the timer effect display reaches 0, the battle effect ( A gaming machine in which a result of (super reach effect) is derived is disclosed. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), the related effect (timer effect) related to the execution status of the suggestive effect (battle effect) suggesting that the game machine is controlled in the advantageous state. There is room to improve the interest. The inventions relating to the means U1 to the means U6 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of related production.

The game machine of means U1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion production (music reach production, cut-in notice production) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
Related production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a related production (count display production) related to the execution state of the suggestive production;
A predetermined effect execution means (for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (timer effect) that performs a specific operation (subtraction operation) corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect (cut-in notice effect) as an effect different from the related effect. CPU 120),
The rate at which the related effect is executed varies depending on the execution status of the suggestive effect (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the music reach effect is more effective than in the case where the music reach effect is in the first stage. In the case of the second stage, the ratio of executing the count display effect is higher),
The rate at which the predetermined effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the related effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (H), when the count display effect is executed, the count display is performed). The execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect is higher than that when the effect is not executed, and the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect and the execution ratio of the timer effect match, so the count display effect is executed. If it is, the execution rate of the timer effect is higher than when the count display effect is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by making the related effect and the predetermined effect related to each other.

The game machine of means U2 is
A gaming machine of means U1,
As the execution status of the suggestive effect (music reach effect), the first stage (1 second to 15 seconds of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (3)) and the first stage after the first stage There are two stages (as shown in Fig. 13-19 (4), a period of 16 seconds to 30 seconds of the music reach effect),
When the suggestive effect of the second stage is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestive effect of the first stage is executed and the suggestive effect of the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). As shown in -13 (A) to (D), the jackpot expectation is higher when the music reach production is executed up to the second stage than when the music reach production is finished in the first stage).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on whether or not the second stage suggestive effect is executed, and it is possible to improve interest.

The game machine of means U3 is
A gaming machine of means U2,
The rate at which the related effect is executed is higher when the suggestive effect is in the second stage than when the suggestive effect is in the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), music reach effect). Is higher in the case where the music reach effect is in the second stage than in the case where is the first stage).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is in the first stage, the execution rate of the related effect is lower than in the case where the suggestive effect is in the second stage, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

The game machine of means U4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means U1 to means U3,
The related effect is an effect for updating the display corresponding to the execution period of the suggestive effect (as shown in FIG. 13-18, the execution period of the count display effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is music. (It corresponds to the execution period (the period from T3 to T14B) from the start of the reach effect to the end of the music reach effect)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period during which the suggestive effect is being executed.

The game machine of means U5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means U1 to means U4,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
The predetermined effect (timer effect) is an effect of performing an operation different from the predetermined operation as the specific operation (the timer effect is an effect of performing a timer subtraction different from the update of the effect execution period).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect and improve the interest.

The game machine of means U6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means U1 to means U5,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
As an effect different from the suggestion effect (music reach effect), a special effect (pseudo) in an area different from the predetermined display area (the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200). Continuous production) can be executed,
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of the suggestive effect in the second stage is higher than when the special effect is not executed (when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed). The percentage of music reach production in the second stage is higher than in the case)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control relating to the addition of the game medium. The invention relating to means A1 to means A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to application of a game medium.

The game machine of means A1 is
A game device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holdings, accumulated balls, etc.) (processing relating to ball lending that consumes prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes balls, ball lending that consumes accumulated balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
An imparting means (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the dispensing motor 21TM289) for imparting a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device,
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
Equipped with
When controlled in the setting change mode, the addition of the game medium based on the signal output from the gaming device is restricted (1. When controlling in the setting change mode, the game control microcomputer 100). Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037), 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command while being controlled in the setting change mode, the payout control microcomputer The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the gaming machine frame open sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No 4. When playing in the setting change mode Even if the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is ON because the black computer 100 does not send the connection check command (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection check command), the EXS signal is output. Do not turn it on.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the setting change mode is controlled, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the gaming control microcomputer 100 causes the lock switch 21TM051 to be in the ON state. And the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting value is controlled to the changeable setting mode. During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, since the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Do not lend a ball.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine,
The game control means has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can give a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is inputted from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 for outputting a connection confirmation signal is a setting change). Executed after the mode ends and after the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A3,
A gaming machine of means A1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and the gaming device is based on the input of the first predetermined signal. The game medium can be added based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
When the control is in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first predetermined signal is not output (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input, 2. Connection confirmation When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4,
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine,
At least one of the game control means and the giving means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detecting means for detecting an open state in which a game machine frame or a door frame corresponding to the game machine is opened ( A gaming machine frame provided with a gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a). Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is open),
It is characterized by
According to this, when the game machine frame or the door frame is opened to control the setting change mode, the addition of the game medium can be restricted.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The grant means outputs a grant preparation signal (turns the EXS signal on) in response to the grant request signal being input from the gaming device (the BRQ signal being turned on), and the grant preparation signal When a grant command signal output from the gaming device in response to an input is input (when the card unit 21TM050 that detects the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), the game medium is granted.
When being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the grant preparation signal is not output even if the grant request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected to be turned on). do not do),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting switch) ) 21TM052 is on), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting switch) ) When 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A6,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
After executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after making the display monitor 21TM029 blink the set value), the game state is initialized. That the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029,
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like in the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means A8,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A7,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process);
And a production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like of the game hall to know that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A8,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the game state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming device. The invention relating to means B1 to means B7 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The game machine of means B1 is
A game device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holdings, accumulated balls, etc.) (processing relating to ball lending that consumes prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes balls, ball lending that consumes accumulated balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
A predetermined control means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing a predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
A setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the set value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200);
Regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode, it is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device (the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal can be turned on, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command can be transmitted, and the payout control for which the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are received while the connection confirmation signal is on The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute the ball lending regardless of whether or not the period is controlled in the setting change mode),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid the control load when the predetermined control is not executed while being controlled in the setting change mode. .

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The predetermined control is interrupted on the basis of occurrence of a predetermined event (power cut, etc.) while executing the predetermined control, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is subsequently controlled, the setting is changed. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is restarted (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the ball lending when the power is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, and restarts the power supply. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is restarted after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without immediately restarting the ball lending),
It is characterized by
According to this, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the occurrence of the predetermined event.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting control mode is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is ended (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is powered off during execution of the ball lending). When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (stopped), and when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, the ball lending is not restarted and the setting is changed. The ball lending will not be resumed after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of means B4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state). In case), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). In the case), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in accordance with the condition established when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means B5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B4,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game information is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after notifying the change of the set value (after making the display monitor 21TM029 blink the set value), it is notified that the game state is initialized (display Display the character "C" on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like in the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means B6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B5,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process);
And a production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like of the game hall to know that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the game state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control when the game medium passes through the specific area. The invention relating to means C1 to means C6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The gaming machine of means C1
Based on that the game medium has passed through the specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), specific control according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges for jackpot determination random numbers) (special Specific control means (gaming control microcomputer 100 for executing processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing jackpot determination processing in symbol process processing),
A setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the set value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200);
When the setting change mode is controlled, the specific control is not executed even when the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Thus, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value may be changed.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state). In case), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). In the case), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in accordance with the condition established when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game state is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
After executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after making the display monitor 21TM029 blink the set value), the game state is initialized. That the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029,
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like in the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C3,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process);
And a production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like of the game hall to know that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to C4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting confirmation mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Thus, during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed while the set value is being confirmed.

The game machine of means C6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the game state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute appropriate processing when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention according to means D1 to means D5 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that executes appropriate processing when power supply is stopped.

The game machine of means D1 is
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
Setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode for informing the setting value in a confirmable manner,
A setting value storage means for storing the setting value (a setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting value);
The setting change mode control means satisfies the first condition (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear switch ( The setting change switch 21TM052 is in the ON state), and the setting change mode is controlled.
The setting confirmation mode control means satisfies the first condition (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and does not satisfy the second condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear). The setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state,
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The set value storage means stores a set value before being controlled in the setting change mode while being controlled in the setting change mode (stored in a set value storage area of the RAM 102 before shifting to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously stored without changing with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on). If so, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the shift to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped while being controlled in the setting change mode.

The game machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051) and an initialization operation (turns on the clear switch 21TM052 to the ON state when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control) to control the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization operation is not performed,
It is characterized by
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control.

The game machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
On the basis of the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value is displayed blinking on display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can recognize that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The game machine of means D4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D3,
Game control means having the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine (a game control micro that executes a game control timer interrupt process) Computer 100),
And a production control means (production control CPU 120) for executing production control,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes a notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when the setting confirmation mode command is received. "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like of the game hall to know that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means D5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D4,
Timing after power supply to the gaming machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 becomes able to execute the game control timer interrupt process after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) Then, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control is a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting change switch). ) When the setting change switch operation command indicating that 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch is detected.", "The operation of the setting change switch is detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the timing after the power supply is started.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. Further, as shown in JP-A-2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the status of the processing related to the change of the setting value. Even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention according to means E1 to E8 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of the processing related to the change of the set value on the external device side. is there.

The gaming machine of the means E1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a specific control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The set value can be changed (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode),
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) from the first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing (change to setting change mode, change to setting confirmation mode) related to the change of the set value. ,
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means E2 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
It is possible to output the specific signal in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when the RAM clear is executed),
A setting change mode control means (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling the setting value to change the setting value when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting change mode may have been controlled by the specific signal, so even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting change can be performed by the specific signal. It is possible to understand that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E3 is
A gaming machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on being controlled in the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting correspondence change signal Security signal is continuously output for 30 seconds after the end of),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, even if the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal is set by the specific signal. It is possible to understand that the change mode may be controlled.

The game machine of means E4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The special signal can be output based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the setting correspondence change signal is output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means E5 is
A gaming machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the game machine is started, the setting confirmation mode can be controlled (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on. Based on that, it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are output simultaneously),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled by the specific signal, the setting confirmation can be performed by the specific signal even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal. It is possible to understand that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
A setting change mode control means (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling the setting value to change the setting value when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting change mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (When the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside while simplifying the signal output process when the setting change mode is controlled.

The game machine of means E7 is
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling in the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (When the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E7,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the lock switch 21TM051).
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control operates the lock switch 21TM051). When the lock switch operation command indicating that, the setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch has been detected. , A warning "The operation of the setting changeover switch was detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like in the game arcade can understand that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. Further, as shown in JP-A-2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the information related to the set value, but JP 2014-200506 A. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Publication (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention relating to the means F1 to F11 is made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a set value on the external device side.

The gaming machine of means F1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a specific control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (it can be changed based on an operation in the setting change mode),
It is possible to output a special signal (a signal corresponding to the setting change) corresponding to the processing related to the change of the set value (the change to the setting change mode, the change to the setting confirmation mode),
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F2 is
A gaming machine of means F1,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the set value is provided.
Outputs the special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode ends, outputs a number of pulses corresponding to the confirmed set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to output from the common terminal a signal notifying whether the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means F3 is
A gaming machine of means F2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, a non-special mode special signal (a setting change corresponding signal that is in an ON state during the period when the setting change mode is controlled) is output. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after setting the setting change corresponding signal to the OFF state at the end of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the confirmed set value) Change corresponding signal) is output,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside by the special signal whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
Outputting a special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting confirmation mode (when the setting confirmation mode ends, outputs a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to output from the common terminal a signal notifying whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means F5 is
A gaming machine of means F4,
When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a non-special mode special signal (a setting change corresponding signal which is in an ON state during the period when the setting confirmation mode is controlled) is output. After the output of the special signal is temporarily stopped (the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off at the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the displayed set value is changed). Output the setting change correspondence signal),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside of whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses (the set value can be specified by an external device by setting the number of output times of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value. is there),
It is characterized by
According to this, the setting value can be easily specified in the external device.

The game machine of means F7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F6,
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F8 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from a tenth terminal),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside with a simple configuration.

The gaming machine of means F9 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal).
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a clearly distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means F10 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F9,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the set value is provided.
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052),
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, the special signal of the special mode is output with the end of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, Regardless of whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated previously, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal) ,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output processing by executing the common signal output processing regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is actually performed.

The gaming machine of means F11 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F10,
The special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the processing related to the change of the set value (the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 upon completion of the setting change mode). Output the setting change corresponding signal of, and output the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 upon completion of the setting confirmation mode), After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) at a predetermined trigger (for example, the end of the big hit game state) different from the process related to the change of the set value. The number of pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value that is being output),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it becomes possible to notify the setting value to the outside with a predetermined trigger, it is possible to increase the chances that the setting value can be specified in the external device.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control relating to the addition of the game medium. The invention according to means G1 to means G10 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to application of a game medium.

The gaming machine of means G1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including a granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling a payout motor 21TM289) capable of granting a gaming value (pachinko ball),
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
At least one of the gaming machine frame (gaming machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) (for example, gaming machine frame 3) corresponding to the gaming machine is capable of detecting an open state that is open. Means (game provided with a gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state) A payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300),
Regardless of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or not, when the open state is detected, the giving of the game value is limited (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout of the game medium in the ball lending process and the prize ball process by not driving the payout motor 21TM289),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game value while being controlled to the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means G2 is
A gaming machine of means G1,
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3600) is the open state detection means (a game machine capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a gaming machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided with a frame open sensor and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state. When it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the setting change mode can be controlled (if YES in step S21TM3520, the processing in step S21TM3530 and subsequent steps is executed),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game machine frame or the door frame from being controlled to the setting change mode when the open state is not detected.

The gaming machine of means G3 is
A gaming machine of means G1 or means G2,
It has a specific information storage unit (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) for storing specific information (value of setting change flag) capable of specifying that the control has been performed in the setting change mode,
The specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
The setting change mode control means can bring the game to a stopped state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after power supply to the gaming machine is restarted (game). In the control microcomputer 100, when the setting change flag is set after the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state. , If the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the condition does not shift to the normal game process and loops until the power is turned off),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is restarted, the game can be stopped when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means.

The gaming machine of means G4 is
A gaming machine of means G3,
In response to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (value of the setting change flag) is erased (YES in step S21TM3530 based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051), and the setting change mode is set. Ends and the setting change flag is cleared in step S21TM3710),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game processing after the setting change mode ends.

The gaming machine of means G5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to G4,
The game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the game control timer interrupt process) is provided,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether to give a game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is not paid out, When neither opening of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the payout of the game medium is executed),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the giving means for controlling the giving of the game value has the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether to give the game value or not, and the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means G6 is
A gaming machine of means G5,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) is
Based on the information (payout number) relating to the award of the game value received from the game control means (the game control microcomputer 100 for executing the game control timer interruption process), the game value award is executed,
It has a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the added information (unpaid amount) regarding the game value to be given,
The storage means is capable of storing the additional information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
After the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the granting means executes the granting of the game value according to the granting information stored in the storage means (the power is cut off while the payout of the game medium is being executed. When it occurs, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the payout that has been interrupted after the power is turned on is restarted, and the number of game media not paid out is paid out),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to store the additional information regarding the gaming value to be provided after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the information is stored after the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. Since it is possible to add a game value corresponding to the additional information, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

The gaming machine of means G7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means G1 to means G6,
Can be connected to a game device (card unit 21TM050),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) gives a game value based on a signal (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from the gaming device,
When the open state is detected, the granting of the game value based on the signal output from the gaming device is limited (the gaming machine frame door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the gaming machine). When the opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not send the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the game medium is paid out. Not),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the granting of the game value while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened is restricted, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a defect associated with the granting operation while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened, It is possible to smoothly proceed with maintenance work and the like while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is open.

The gaming machine of means G8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means G1 to means G7,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value is provided,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized,
The game state of the gaming machine is not initialized due to the control in the setting confirmation mode (when the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state when controlled in the setting change mode, in step S21TM3040). If YES is determined, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050, or if YES is determined in step S21TM3140, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3150. When the setting confirmation mode is executed Based on that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, it is determined to be NO in step S21TM3040, and the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050, or it is determined to be NO in step S21TM3140. Do not want to migrate to step S21TM3150),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

The gaming machine of means G9 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
A storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the added information (data of the unpaid amount) to be given,
The added information is initialized as the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). Along with this, the RAM clear of step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed. The number of data is initialized),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the granting information regarding the gaming value to be granted, so that management at the gaming shop can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of means G10 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
A storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the added information (data of the unpaid amount) to be given,
The added information is not initialized regardless of whether the gaming state of the gaming machine has been initialized (the RAM clear of step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 of initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. Also, since the RAM clear in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number of unpaid number storage buffers formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Data is not initialized),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the imparted information is not initialized, so that the information regarding the gaming value to be imparted can be appropriately protected.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. Further, as shown in JP-A-2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. With regard to the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), the occurrence status of the predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the process related to the change of the set value are displayed on the external device side. Although it may be necessary to distinguish and recognize, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, both are recognized on the external device side. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize. The inventions relating to the means H1 to H5 are made in view of the above situation, and the external device side divides the occurrence status of the predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the process related to the change of the setting value. It is to provide a game machine that can be recognized separately.

The gaming machine of means H1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing or the like in special symbol process processing) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, gaming machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine, and processing related to changing the set value (setting change) It is possible to output a specific signal according to the
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value (the security signal is not controlled in the setting change mode by executing the RAM clear). Output for 30 seconds, and when RAM clear is executed and the setting change mode is controlled, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled by the setting change mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means H2 is
A gaming machine of means H1,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
A setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a setting value (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The output period of the specific signal is different when controlled in the setting change mode and in the setting confirmation mode (the security signal is controlled in the setting change mode when controlled in the setting change mode). Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means H3 is
A gaming machine of the means H1 or the means H2,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
A setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a setting value (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When neither the setting operation mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed, predetermined notification is performed (the CPU 120 for effect control, When the lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and the setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch Is detected. "," The operation of the setting switch is detected. "Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can recognize that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means H4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means H1 to means H3,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the processing (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to changing the set value,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of the predetermined event and the process related to the change of the set value, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means H5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means H1 to means H4,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the processing (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to changing the set value,
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. Further, as shown in JP-A-2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The inventions according to the means I1 to I6 have been made in view of the above situation, and provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution status of the processing related to the set value on the external device side. .

The gaming machine of means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing or the like in special symbol process processing) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The setting value can be changed,
Output of a specific signal (security signal) is started in response to the start of control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
Stops the output of the specific signal (security signal) in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than the predetermined period (when the setting change mode is controlled, the security signal output period is 30 seconds or more, and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the means I2,
A gaming machine of means I1,
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, gaming machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value (the security signal indicates that RAM clear is performed. If it is not controlled in the setting change mode, it is output for 30 seconds, and if RAM clear is executed and it is controlled in the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled in the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means I3 is
A gaming machine of means I1 or means I2,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
A setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a setting value (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The output period of the specific signal is different when controlled in the setting change mode and in the setting confirmation mode (the security signal is controlled in the setting change mode when controlled in the setting change mode). Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the control in the setting change mode and the control in the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means I4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I3,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
A setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a setting value (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When neither the setting operation mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed, predetermined notification is performed (the CPU 120 for effect control, When the lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and the setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch Is detected. "," The operation of the setting switch is detected. "Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can recognize that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The game machine of means I5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I4,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of the predetermined event and the process related to the change of the set value, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means I6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I5,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title for informing the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect (for example, see JP-A-2016-101428). In the gaming machine as described in JP-A-2016-101428, it is desired to enhance the effect. The inventions relating to the means J1 to the means J8 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with an enhanced effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the means J1
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notification unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notifying unit can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

The gaming machine of the means J2, in the gaming machine of the means J1,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the suggestive effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J3 is the gaming machine of the means J1 or the means J2,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, development effect or notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even after the notification of the title.

The gaming machine of means J4 is one of the gaming machines of means J1 to J3,
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J5 is the gaming machine of the means J4,
The rate of control to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means J6 is the gaming machine of any of means J1 to J5,
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means J7 is the gaming machine of any of means J1 to J6,
Detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player,
A specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that performs a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) are displayed. Is possible,
In the ineffective period of the detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I). )),
During the effective period of the detection by the detection means, the action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means J8 is the gaming machine of any of means J1 to J7,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (a)) Display, etc.) and a second suggestion display in which the display size is the second size (such as the second size reach title image 31AK062 displayed during the reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)). Means (for example, image display device 5, CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means is
Multiple types of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) configured to include
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. 8-12 (a) and (d), the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 may include the elements E1 to E5.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify that the specific image is displayed.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a game machine that can display a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display has been proposed. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions relating to the means K1 to the means K7 have been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means K1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Equipped with display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for executing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (the sub-holding display area 30TM104, the sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. Display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
The rate at which the aspect of the first information changes is different from the rate at which the aspect of the second information changes (as shown in FIG. 11-3, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display mode rather than the active display 30TM003. The proportion of selection of a mode different from the mode is low, and the display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than the first hold display 30TM001).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first information and the second information, as the information corresponding to the common variable display, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the information corresponding to the variable display. In addition to being able to perform, it is possible to make the aspect of the first information and the second information interested.

The game machine of means K2 is
A gaming machine of means K1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display). , The blue mode sub-holding display 30TM004b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information and the second information have different states after being changed, so that the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of means K3 is
A gaming machine of means K1 or means K2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time),
Depending on the aspect of the changed first information and the aspect of the changed second information, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode and the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 is more than the normal display mode of the display 30TM003 and the normal display mode of the sub active display 30TM005. The higher the jackpot expectation, the higher is the red mode)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The game machine of means K4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first hold display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the same display color is displayed. Shape display) is displayed),
A second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as second information is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) and a second corresponding to the variable display being executed. A corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable hold in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode sub-holding display 30TM004c (red star display) is shifted to the sub active display area 30TM105, the red mode sub active display 30TM005c (red color) having the same display color is displayed. (Star display) is displayed)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, since it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information, as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed, there is an interest in the information corresponding to the variable display. In addition to being able to improve, it is possible to make the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information interested.

The game machine of means K5
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K4,
The player is provided with an information effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an information effect (reach effect) for informing whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player.
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can hide the first information along with the execution of the notification production, while the second information is displayed when the notification production is executed. The information is made visible (as shown in Fig. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the word "REACH !!" is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active information are displayed. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information is not displayed to increase the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed, so that the information for the variable display is confirmed even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The game machine of means K6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K5,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first information display area (first reserved display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). A second corresponding display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The first action effect executed when the aspect of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the aspect of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active aspect). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and performs the action of throwing a ball, and the sub active action effect that changes the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 causes the character a to appear. Then, it is the mode to execute the action to fly the balloon.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the aspects of the first action effect and the second action effect are different, the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and second information. A second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as the above is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different when the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed (active as shown in FIG. 11-3. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed. When the display mode changes, the jackpot expectation is higher)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a game machine that can display a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display has been proposed. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention relating to means L1 to means L7 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means L1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Equipped with display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for executing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (the sub-holding display area 30TM104, the sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. Display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
When the mode of the first information is changed, at least a part of the notice effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIG. 11-11, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is When changed, the sub-holding display area 30TM104 does not display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display area 30TM105 does not display the sub-active display 30TM005).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information, the first information and the second information, as the information corresponding to the common variable display, the complication of the effect is suppressed and the interest is improved. be able to.

The game machine of means L2 is
A gaming machine of means L1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display). , The blue mode sub-holding display 30TM004b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information and the second information have different states after being changed, so that the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means L3 is
A gaming machine of means L1 or means L2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time),
Depending on the aspect of the changed first information and the aspect of the changed second information, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode and the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 is more than the normal display mode of the display 30TM003 and the normal display mode of the sub active display 30TM005. The higher the jackpot expectation, the higher is the red mode)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means L4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first hold display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the same display color is displayed. Shape display) is displayed),
A second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as second information is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) and a second corresponding to the variable display being executed. A corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable hold in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode sub-holding display 30TM004c (red star display) is shifted to the sub active display area 30TM105, the red mode sub active display 30TM005c (red color) having the same display color is displayed. (Star display) is displayed)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, since it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information, as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed, there is an interest in the information corresponding to the variable display. In addition to being able to improve, it is possible to make the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information interested.

The gaming machine of means L5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means L1 to means L4,
The player is provided with an information effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an information effect (reach effect) for informing whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player.
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can hide the first information along with the execution of the notification production, while the second information is displayed when the notification production is executed. The information is made visible (as shown in Fig. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the word "REACH !!" is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active information are displayed. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information is not displayed to increase the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed, so that the information for the variable display is confirmed even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The gaming machine of means L6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means L1 to means L5,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first information display area (first reserved display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). A second corresponding display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The first action effect executed when the aspect of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the aspect of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active aspect). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and performs the action of throwing a ball, and the sub active action effect that changes the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 causes the character a to appear. Then, it is the mode to execute the action to fly the balloon.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the aspects of the first action effect and the second action effect are different, the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means L7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means L1 to means L6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and second information. A second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as the above is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different when the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed (active as shown in FIG. 11-3. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed. When the display mode changes, the jackpot expectation is higher)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a game machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed every time a pseudo-continuous variation is executed. Has been done. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention relating to the means M1 to M6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of the means M1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the correspondence display changes,
The change suggestion effect executing means displays the change suggestion effect as a change suggestion effect in a successful manner (the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 30TM003 as shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 11-18). Effects that change the mode) and effects that suggest changes in the failure mode (as shown in (10) and (20) in FIG. 11-19, an effect in which the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed. ) Is possible,
Depending on the number of times the success mode change suggesting effect is executed, within a predetermined period (for example, within a period from the start of fluctuation until the reach state is established, a decorative pattern from the start of fluctuation (re-fluctuation (quasi-link) after temporary stop is performed). Within the period until the combination of different decorative patterns or the pseudo-relational pattern) is temporarily stopped, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of one of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns) The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful, the third change rate is 100%. If the suggestive effect is executed and once is the success mode and once is the failure mode, the change suggestive effect for the third time may not be executed).
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed, and improve the interest.

The game machine of means M2 is
A gaming machine of the means M1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the final display of the active display). (The expectation of jackpots varies depending on the mode),
Depending on the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous, the ratio of which mode the correspondence display is is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous. The larger the number is, the higher the jackpot expectation is, and even if the active display is the same display color, the larger the number of times the success suggestion change suggestion is continuous, the higher the jackpot expectation is.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the number of times the success suggestion change suggestion production continues, and to improve the interest.

The game machine of means M3 is
A gaming machine of means M1 or means M2,
It is possible to execute variable display of decorative designs,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change (as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative pattern. (Fluctuation direction does not change)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means M4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to M3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears),
After executing the change suggestion effect of one type, it is possible to execute the change suggestion effect of a different type (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1)). , A change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4)).
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means M5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to M4,
The change suggestion effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which the character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate of execution of the change suggestion effect of the success mode is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect and a higher rate of changing the display mode of the active display).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make one interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The game machine of means M6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to M5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, and a character D). Change suggestion production) in which
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 11-17, the character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than the character D does. Ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make one interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  As disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a game machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed every time a pseudo-continuous variation is executed. Has been done. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to means N1 to N6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means N1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the correspondence display changes,
As the change suggesting effect, the change suggesting effect executing means hits the active display 30TM003 with the ball thrown by the character A as shown in (1) and (2) in FIG. The effect of changing the display mode) and the change suggesting effect of the failure mode (as shown in (10) and (20) of FIG. 11-19, the ball thrown by the character D is flipped by the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode. Can be performed)
A predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state, a decorative pattern from the start of fluctuation (a combination of decorative patterns or a pseudo continuous pattern in which re-fluctuation (pseudo continuous) will be performed after temporary stop) is temporary Within the period until the stop, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the time when any one of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns first stops) to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect Accordingly, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), [the number of times of execution of change suggestion effect] to [the number of times of execution of change suggestion effect]. The higher the ratio of, the more likely the display mode is to have a high jackpot expectation. For example, the display mode in the case where [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is 2/3 is the blue mode. Next to Display mode when it is 4/5 is more jackpot expected high degree of red aspect.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed, and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N2 is
A gaming machine of means N1,
Depending on the mode of the correspondence display (active display 30TM003), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is different (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the jackpot expectation level depends on the final display mode of the active display. Different),
Depending on the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous, the ratio of which mode the correspondence display is is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous. The larger the number is, the higher the jackpot expectation is, and even if the active display is the same display color, the larger the number of times the success suggestion change suggestion is continuous, the higher the jackpot expectation is.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the number of times the success suggestion change suggestion production continues, and to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N3 is
A gaming machine of means N1 or means N2,
It is possible to execute variable display of decorative designs,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change (as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative pattern. (Fluctuation direction does not change)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means N1 to means N3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears),
After executing the change suggestion effect of one type, it is possible to execute the change suggestion effect of a different type (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1)). , A change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4)).
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means N1 to means N4,
The change suggestion effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which the character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate of execution of the change suggestion effect of the success mode is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect and a higher rate of changing the display mode of the active display).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make one interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means N6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means N1 to means N5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, and a character D). Change suggestion production) in which
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 11-17, the character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than the character D does. Ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make one interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. Further, as shown in JP-A-2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting by the external device side when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. is there. The invention according to means O1 to O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a control state related to setting to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 having different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650),
Specific signal output means for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the game control microcomputer 100 for outputting a security signal in step S21TM4560), ,
And a setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (value of the security signal timer) relating to a period during which the specific signal is output,
The setting means can set a common predetermined value when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (step S21TM4710 sets 1 second as the value of the security signal timer). ),
The specific signal output means outputs the specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). The security signal is continuously output until 1 second has passed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode. Do)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
An initialization means for initializing the game state (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050, step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting change mode),
The setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value after setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as a value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). (When the RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value regardless of whether the control in the setting change mode is ended or the control in the setting confirmation mode is ended. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting processing by the setting unit is made common and different output is made in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The game machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing a specific operation (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) for ending the setting change mode In the specific information storage means (a backup area of the RAM 102) for storing the specific information (setting change flag), the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 is provided,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case, the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode not being satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means O1 to means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process),
And a production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620),
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and also to send an error command to the effect control means (step S21TM4190 transmits a set value abnormality error command, and a display monitor on the error display of step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control unit gives a notification prompting an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to "return power on after power off to enter setting change mode". Please display the message "Please transfer")
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately inform the store clerk of the game arcade about the state of the gaming machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means P1 to means P4 is made in view of the above situation, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To provide.

The game machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 having different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on that, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case), it is further provided with an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied). .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of the means P1,
The setting change mode control means is such that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 being in an ON state),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case, it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification on the basis of the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (at the time of power-on, in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, step S21TM4140). Based on the determination of YES, shift to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by
According to this, when the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. Can prompt change.

The game machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case, it is possible to carry out the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is turned on (one of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). If NO is determined in step), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without transitioning to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, the progress of the game in the state where the set value is unstable can be restricted, and the appropriate game control can be realized.

The game machine of means P4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means P1 to means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process),
And a production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620),
And the specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification on the display means and also to send an error command to the effect control means (a setting value abnormality error command is sent at step S21TM4190, and displayed in the error display at step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control unit gives a notification prompting an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to "return power on after power off to enter setting change mode". Please display the message "Please transfer")
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately inform the store clerk of the game arcade about the state of the gaming machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention relating to the means Q1 to the means Q5 is made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 having different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on that, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). When it is determined that it is set), control to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting switch) Automatically controls the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that the 21TM052 is ON is satisfied.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150). The game control microcomputer 100 for executing clear (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is not set at power-on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Yes, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). When the condition is satisfied, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. If it is remembered, control is performed to the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030). ), It automatically controls the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are met).
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting information is stored in the setting change mode even when the setting change condition is not satisfied, because the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the game machine is started, a transition operation (when the setting change flag is not set at power-on (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), and the condition for transitioning to the setting change mode is satisfied), it is possible to control to the setting change mode, and when the setting change mode is controlled. Specific operation (In step S21TM4680, it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the)
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when controlled to the setting change mode (sets a setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. Based on the above, the specific information is erased when the setting change mode ends (the setting change flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends),
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the shift operation is performed, When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the condition for changing to the setting change mode is satisfied, The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Let)
It is characterized by
According to this, the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The game machine of means Q4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting values) for storing the setting values (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute a control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) according to a set value stored in the set value storage means,
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). Based on the setting change mode),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when being controlled in the setting change mode. The set value after the setting is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored. The set value stored in will be changed, so the set value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off in the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power outage is stored in the set value storage means, and according to the set value. Since the control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting values) for storing the setting values (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute a control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) according to a set value stored in the set value storage means,
The setting change mode control means stores the change operation under the control of the setting change mode and the setting value storage area when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. Change only the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the set value stored), and change the set value stored in the set value storage means based on the specific operation after the changing operation. The setting change mode is terminated (the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and end the setting change mode),
The set value storage means performs the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when being controlled to the setting change mode. The setting value before being stored is stored (even if the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area itself Is not changed, so if the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the set value before being controlled in the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the unstable state where the setting change mode is not finished, the change of the set value can be limited.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure showing a decision rate in notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | operation effect of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | operation effect of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | operation effect of a modification. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a part of memory area in RAM of a main board. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in the main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It is a figure. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of setting suggestion production, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production mode of setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output from a game control board to the payout control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control board and a payout control board. It is a block diagram showing a signal line etc. used for transmitting and receiving a control signal and a control command. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing which a payout control CPU performs. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing which a payout control CPU performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the ball lending limiting method in this embodiment. It is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the card unit and the pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st ball lending limitation method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 4th ball loan limitation method. It is a timing diagram which shows the example which does not restrict | limit a ball loan during a setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing an example of restarting the payout after the end of the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing an example in which the payout is forcibly terminated with the transition to the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during the period when the gaming machine frame or the glass door frame is opened. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power failure occurs before the setting value is determined, and (2) is a control when a power failure occurs after the setting value is determined. It is a figure showing a warning screen when a setting change operation is performed during a game. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the output aspect of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output aspect and output period of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, and (2) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value. .. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restricting the ball lending based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a ball lending after the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a ball lending without shifting to a setting change mode after a power failure. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode and forcibly ending the ball lending after power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode and restarting a ball lending after power-off. It is a timing diagram showing a method of limiting prize ball payout based on detection of an open state of a gaming machine frame. It is a timing diagram showing a method of restarting the prize ball payout after the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a prize ball payout, without shifting to a setting change mode after a power failure. It is a timing chart which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and forcibly ending the prize ball payout. It is a timing chart which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off and restarting prize ball payout. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a hold display and an active display. It is a flow chart which shows change production decision processing. (A) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pending | holding change pattern in a 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pending | holding change pattern in a 1st change production. It is an explanatory view showing a pending change pattern in the second change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production in the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect in the first change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern of active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the kind of change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production aspect of change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production aspect of change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production aspect of change suggestion production. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of alerting | reporting when the setting change flag is set at the time of power activation. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power failure occurs before the setting value is determined, and (2) is a control when a power failure occurs after the setting value is determined. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. The logo panel drive mechanism of this embodiment is shown, (a) is a front view of a logo panel drive mechanism, (b) is a P arrow view of FIG. 13-2 (a). It is a Q arrow line view of FIG. 13-2 (a). It is a front view which shows the state which moved both the 1st logo panel and the 2nd logo panel to the position which overlaps with the main liquid crystal display in front and back in a front view. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production determination processing at the time of change start. (A), (B) is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table, (C), (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the execution rate determination table of an expectation notice announcement production, (E) is an expectation notice It is an explanatory view showing a final display mode decision table of production, and (F) and (G) are explanatory views showing a display mode change pattern determination table of expectation notice production. (H) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a count-up effect, and (I) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a count-down effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a countdown effect and a countup effect. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect regarding the countdown production and the countup production. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect regarding the countdown production and the countup production. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect regarding the countdown production and the countup production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production determination processing at the time of change start. (A), (B) is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table, (C), (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the final stage determination table of music reach production, (E) is cut-in notice production. It is an explanatory view showing an execution ratio decision table of, and (F) is an explanatory view showing an effect mode decision table of a cut-in notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a count display effect. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect regarding the count display production. It is a flow chart which shows a modification of production determination processing at the time of change start. (G) is an explanatory view showing an execution start stage determination table of the count display effect, and (H) is an explanatory view showing an execution ratio determination table of the cut-in notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a count display effect and a timer effect. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect regarding the count display production and the timer production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the form of the production aspect regarding a count display production and a timer production. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial result determination table. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestive effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the game suggestion production decision processing. It is an explanatory view showing a game suggested effect determination table. It is a flowchart showing an example of a puzzle effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a puzzle effect setting process. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a puzzle effect determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a puzzle effect mode determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production decision processing during the big hit. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit mid-course suggestion effect determination table, a role effect effect determination table, and a light guide plate effect determination table. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of puzzle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of puzzle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of puzzle effect. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing opening and closing of a gaming machine frame in Modification 1; It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol and the normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and a special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Direction scroll display or update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are being held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. To display the first reserved storage number, and the second reserved display unit 25B displays the second reserved storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is located. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is also closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening will be open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when entering one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (eg, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When the game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as a "winning prize". In particular, winning at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening and starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal figure game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of regular figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls or the game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied (stored) to the ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that the player can press. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general-purpose game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, but the general-purpose game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "general symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) while the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state which will be described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) Is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, it is a “small hit”. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

  After the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will be continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  The type of big hit is set in "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big-hit game state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) are prepared. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the big hit type.

  In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by reducing the average figure change time (the period during which the figure changes) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (shortening of times of times cut, probability change of times of cut etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset. The state is controlled in the same way as when the processing is not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and / or excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on / off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” provided on the image display device 5, as the effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative pattern which is not still stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect in which

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also called a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation degree) in which the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is “big hit” according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probability variation big hit" which is controlled to the probability variation state after the end of the big jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the end of the big jackpot game state, the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation big hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). In addition, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss"). (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before the execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display is simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the mode which is similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following gaming state high accuracy state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state by executing a common effect after the small hit game state and after the large hit game state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of ordinary figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the universal figure hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By the transmission of the detection signal, the passage or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening big winning opening, occurrence of winnings, number of held storages, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, Various functions such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery are included).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described functions of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of)). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies a lamp on / off state) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interruption prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Then, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, and therefore the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being recovered from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). CPU103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41) execution and hold management, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold display device 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure patterns.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the starting winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the holding information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning prize thus set to be transmitted is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In addition, in the special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special drawing game (special drawing change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not reach etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol fluctuation processing, the processing which does the setting in order to change the special design in the 1st special design display 4A and the 2nd special design display 4B and the elapsed time after that special design starts fluctuation It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed) It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is updated when the time cut state or the probability variation state is controlled and the cut-out is completed. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on the fact that the display result is "big hit". Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is terminated.

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing is ended.

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on that the display result is "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small hitting open process ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

  After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the production operation using various production devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the production control command transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified by the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative design in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various types The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voices or sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the sound control board 13, and sending commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative design is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main board 11. Then, when the production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In this small hitting production effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small hitting game state from the main board 11. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit mid-hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid-game production process, the CPU 120 for production control sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the contents of the production in the big hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit medium production process, for example, the value of the production control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending production process in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives points based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are mounted.

  The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a detachable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in the. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  It should be noted that in the present specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-1, PA1 of the non-reach loss without the variable display mode of the decorative design being the reach mode and the display result being “miss”. -2, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "miss". The fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B), the reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach. Reach B becomes higher in the order of super reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where the development effect of developing (promoting) to reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like illustrated in FIG. 8-1A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, a variation pattern in which the reliability develops more than two stages is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the super-reach other than that is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. Note that the title notification mode may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title characters (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of performance operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process processing based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative pattern showing the number 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped, and the reach mode is reached. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the reach part of the super reach effect (also referred to as super reach effect) is completed, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters “SP Reach A”) is displayed on the entire screen, and the voice corresponding to the title name of Reach (here “Super Reach A”) is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed. The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach A that is confronted with is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

  Note that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the speaker 8 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (Here, the characters “SP reach B”) are displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8 so that the title of super reach B is displayed. Be informed. After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, the character 31AK006 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach B, which is to be confronted with, is executed.

  In this way, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect, etc., so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  In addition, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and super reach B (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in the common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach will be performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title will be notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to completely commoning the presentation mode until the title is informed, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You may By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (“defeat the enemy” in this case), so that the title of the super reach D is notified. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H). Here, the expectation is the expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to be exactly the same as the reach's big hit reliability.

  It should be noted that the notification by the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), but the super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. May be.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. To be executed.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the characters "SP Reach E") is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In Super Reach E, the title is not informed by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 that is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other. To be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations by notifying the title without stopping the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach effects is stopped to notify the title (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, in the super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the reach effect of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, the title is announced after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach that have a low jackpot reliability are announced. In E, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is announced in a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is used as a background for title notification and the title is displayed there. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area in which the title notification is performed according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of the present embodiment, and the display area in which the title notification is performed according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be changed as in this embodiment, or the display place may be changed.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B having a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D having a jackpot reliability lower than that of super-reach A and super-reach B is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level indication is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his / her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. It should be noted that the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  As shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. You may make it display the numerical value corresponding to. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, half the number (half) of black stars can be displayed, and the number of stages of expectation may be increased. .

(Timing display end timing)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determination effect described below is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. Further, by the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing because the effect can be improved at any timing.

  Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each reach effect is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharp effect.

  In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach production of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced and the variable display is executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5. The display of the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  When displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, and a display related to mobile device interlocking on the image display device 5, during the reach effect of super reach, it is not displayed as appropriate in order to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At that time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the reach effect with low reliability, and to focus on the reach effect in the reach effect with high reliability.

(Development production)
Next, an example of a production operation when the development production is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of the super reach D is being executed (the title notification of the super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Then, in the case of developing into the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of the super reach A is notified, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. When developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8D, the title of super reach B is announced and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach that performs the title notification by the display and the sound, the title notification by the display and the sound is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating that a failure has occurred). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development of gasse, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expected degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display black stars indicating the expected degree from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, It is also possible to execute the expectation suggesting effect in which the expectation is suggested by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in (D) and (E) of FIG. 8-5, the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F), the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation degree suggestive effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and it fits in the white star of the degree of expectation indication, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases. You may make it perform the effect which does.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the voice output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the operation of the player.

  FIGS. 8-5 (G) to (L) are examples of effect operation of title notification and expectation suggestion effect in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of super reach D is the reach effect of super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, a sound corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from the normal mode (for example, a sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "Pong" indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and 8 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, such as shining, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., the title notification mode is made different, and the effect is diversified. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the performance operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, but other reach performances (title notification, expectation level) depending on the performance mode (state when the reach performance is executed). (Including suggestive effects) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the title of the reach and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, the effect according to the preference of the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an anticipation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the anticipation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggesting effect in which the display showing the expectation of the expectation suggesting display is increased stepwise, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display showing the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the black star is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), the image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters "SP reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary notice)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. After the notification, the title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

  In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output after the display mode of the title is changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or a development effect in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to a big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and the manner of effect. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice production determination process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super-reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Figure 8-9 (A), the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. There are those that change, and those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies depending on the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

  Note that the "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold type and the characters themselves are the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be the "fruit pattern". . There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings when the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super-reach (for example, super-reach D or super-reach E) having a long title display period, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined. Then, in the case of a super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of a super-reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. Determine the display color of the title at a rate different from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of the display color) of the title notice depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the dialogue) of the character in the reach production of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. 8-9C, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from "white", "red", and "white" to "red". ), The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue and the effect is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings when the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the performance modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the effect modes are the same. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timings of changing the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that instead of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of change timings of the production mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that it is not the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super-reach, but the title notice in the case of a specific super-reach (for example, except super-reach with low reliability) is possible. Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 8-9, but the determination rate is arbitrary and, for example, the determination rate may be changed according to the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialog notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice production with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode changes (the ratio of which effect) may be different from that of the serif notice, or the number of colors (how many stages) to change may be different. . By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue acts when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of effect effects and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

  As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided in the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the degree-of-expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the title is notified on the image display device 5. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to the notification of the title related to other effects (informing mainly displaying characters). May be. For example, in the case of executing a pre-reading zone effect in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are shifted to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) as the notice effect (for example, the look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Use a stick controller to destroy all enemies”, etc.) and perform a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to notification of a mission title.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( FIGS. 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win or loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

  FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of an operation operation of super reach in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), a character 31AK041 which is a teammate character and a character which is an enemy character. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 face each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to the pleased character 31AK046 and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

  Then, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is displayed in the central portion as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. After that, at the timing when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a fixed decorative pattern that is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modified example, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and when the operation effects using these images are executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect effect is improved and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In addition, in the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, although the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted, the reach production shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Alternatively, it may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation production. The determination related to the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. A specific image may be included and displayed when displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification of outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG. 8-12 (c).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters “battle reach” indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

  Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot" indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may be partially overlapped.

  Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" Is displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen based on the original numerical design. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence or absence of the shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the shutter effect may be determined based on the result of determining the title display color in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when it is determined that the title display color is a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed together with the determination regarding the shutter effect in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, a production control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, on the main board 11, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 21TM201, and the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advanced. Various circuits for controlling are installed. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 or the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) that constitutes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / lighting / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided. , It also has a function to display various winning information about winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed over by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for game ball detection, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 transmitting to 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the game board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each winning opening (big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry area" (Also referred to as) the total number of game balls entering the game ball, and various prize information such as continuous ratio and winning combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information are displayed. This allows you to check various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the game hall. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming balls enter the general winning opening (pass the test) at a predetermined frequency. Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and set values such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit, which will be described later, are changed on the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 that functions as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. A clerk at the game hall operates the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037 and the like are predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and initialization processing (RAM clear) described later is performed. To be executed. The power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are arranged close to each other on the same power board to facilitate the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a clerk of the game shop who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but can perform the switching operation and also perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation). It may be a switch that is possible.

  The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk at the game hall. The lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the amusement hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so the clerk at the amusement hall leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It is possible to prevent it.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the lower portion on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for discharging the gaming balls winning each winning opening and the gaming balls entering the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (exhaust port) is provided, and an outlet switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a game ball that has been launched) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 described above, as shown in FIG.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

  FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a RAM built therein. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  Further, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and the front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 including a door frame opening sensor that detects opening of the glass door frame 3a that is covered with is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer The 21TM370 is capable of distinguishing between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. . In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187 indicates the out-of-ball state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launching device. Output full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094) is supplied. Which is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals to / from the game control microcomputer 100 by serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. For confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (the prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the award ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is received, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal, at the timing of transmitting / receiving the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the award ball request signal, and the prize having the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the prize ball payout operation ends, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and sets the received ACK signal to the game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as lending a ball, full tank, running out of ball, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Note that specific signal exchanges by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-22 and 9-34 to 36.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives, through the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lent balls on a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). Output (including and) to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-sphere LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending possible LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

  From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendability display signal to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

  When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point in time, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of lent balls. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage not lower than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball-out rate) is changed. . The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases in stages.

  FIGS. 9-4A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", it will win the jackpot with a lower probability (1/300). ing. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". There is a higher probability (1/280) of winning the big hit than in some cases. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The chances of winning the jackpot are higher than the case of "2" (1/280). Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9D, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of “2”, “3”, and “4”. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot winning is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). Provided separately, the determination of the big hit is performed using a common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good.

  In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of six setting values 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The settable values that can be set to 2, may be 3, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Here, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described.

  On the main board 11, information about game prizes, for example, the number of prize balls due to winning at the first starting prize hole (belt), the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), and the large prize hole. The number of prize balls due to winning the (Attacker), the total number of prize balls are input, and the number of shot balls is totaled. The percentage of consecutive balls (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second start prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls from the prize hole (attacker) to the total number of prize balls A certain winning ratio (%) and a base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched, are displayed. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls for continuous character acquisition below) due to winning the large winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the number of prize balls due to winning at the 2nd starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls due to winning at the big prize hole (attacker) (the number of prize balls below) Is the proportion occupied by. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls obtained below) is the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening (attacker), the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), and the great winning opening. (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls obtained by winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the second starting winning opening (Den Chu). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are variable winning objects, and the expected winning rate of the gaming ball changes as the passable width of the playing ball changes. is there. Also, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are fixed winning objects, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected percentage of winning game balls is a fixed character.

  As for the method of totaling and calculating the information on the winning of the game, the consecutive ratio and the winning ratio are the winning balls to the first starting winning hole (navel) and the general winning hole (sode) in the number of prize balls of 6000 pieces. Number (general prize balls), number of regular electric prize balls (den Chu balls), which is the number of prize balls in the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), depending on the winning prize (attacker) The number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. It should be noted that the number of prize balls (general prize balls) due to winning the first start prize hole (navel) and general prize hole (sode) to be totaled, the number of normal electric prize balls (the number of electric Chu prize balls), and the special electricity The number of winning prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, 6000 11 sets of memory are stored in a considerable quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and role ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 has a base calculated based on 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), cumulative total ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and the last 60,000 prize balls. It is possible to switch and display the base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the last 60000 award balls every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, one display means switches and displays six displays. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning in the first starting prize hole (navel) and the second starting prize hole (den Chu) that are totaled as the game progresses The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the consecutive ratio (%) of 6000 is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 that is displayed thereafter, the number of winning balls is 6000. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning a prize hole (belt), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), the number of prize balls by winning the major prize opening (attacker), the prize ball Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting and totaling the total number at a predetermined timing in switching display (for example, display timing of 6000 consecutive ratios (%)).

  In addition, the storage area for storing the information on the winning of the game in the present embodiment is provided for each set value, and the general winning award ball, the first starting winning award mouth ball, the ordinary electric role award ball, the special electric role The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. Therefore, the continuous ratio, winning combination ratio, and base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

  As an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60000, and the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large prize hole (attacker) A method of calculating the role ratio (role ratio (%)) in the case where the total number of role acquisition balls is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of winning feature balls refers to the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker and the electric chu. In addition, the number of consecutive winnings balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker. The total number of hits refers to the total number of game media hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the continuous ratio can be calculated by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be calculated by the following equation (3).

  Consecutive ratio = [number of balls obtained in succession / total number of acquisitions] x 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive winning roles + Number of winning roles) / Total number of winnings] x 100

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total shots] x 100 (3)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of balls obtained is 42000, the character ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three decimal places are truncated) by dividing 42,000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculation below the decimal point, calculation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result of up to 3 digits after the decimal point, it is sufficient to divide by 1000.

  Although the total number of prize balls is 60000 in the above example, a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the character ratio for a long period. In other words, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning accessory balls.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h. 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down from the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, and the character acquisition ball number is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if both the total number of prize balls and the number of winning accessory balls are 10 times, the error is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and the error is approximated to the original value.

The substrate case 21TM201 is made of a translucent material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 are visible. The board case 21TM201 is provided with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for radiating heat of the electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the heat radiation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029. Here, the “direct front” means the front directly from the viewpoint of the main board 11, and means between the employee who is going to see the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h. 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down from the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, and the character acquisition ball number is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area for storing information on game winnings (ring buffer, 10 set total buffer (total of information on game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters each having a maximum of 2 bytes), award ball The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be further described later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the number of acquired balls is larger than the stored value of the total number of prize balls, Initialization of the memory area that stores information about game winnings when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of balls that have been acquired consecutively is greater than the value of the number of balls obtained Processing may be performed. Further, the error display or the warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed while or after the error display or the warning display. The error display and warning display will be further described later.

  For example, when the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired character balls is 19876, the ratio (%) is calculated by dividing 34977 as a divisor for 19876 to calculate the ratio. It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing the arithmetic operation in the game control microcomputer 100, it is necessary to avoid the calculation with the decimal point, so the following calculation formula is substituted. In the division of 198776/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down, resulting in 1987/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the winning combination ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, there is an error in the display from the value calculated by accurate calculation. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation in the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed by rounding off the decimal point, for example, when the exact value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% → 70% is displayed on the display 1 Although it is considered that the error of% is displayed, the role ratio (%) (or the continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error even on the display of the error of 1%.

  Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, and therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, calculation cannot be performed. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1%, which may result in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. For this reason, until the counter counts the total number of acquired balls above a specific number (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits), the combination ratio (%) and continuous ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. The fact that the error may be large even if it is displayed may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the winning combination (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is being displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs that a game medium is newly won in the electric Chu or attacker, and the calculated value is 5 seconds later and If it is displayed as the value of (%), the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

  Also, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when 7 segments are provided two), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), numerical values can be displayed in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper 2 digits under a specific condition.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, it is exemplified that the game medium is detected by the sensor provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew, and the number of each prize ball is individually tabulated based on the detection result. The present invention is not limited to this, and uses a sensor provided after the discharge passages through which the game media won in the attacker and the game media won in the electric Chu are discharged, and the detection result is used. Based on the number of balls acquired and the number of continuous character acquisition balls may be totaled.

  Hereinafter, the display of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 9-3). On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 12 is also provided.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 has a gate passage counter, a first starting prize number counter, a second starting prize number counter, a first general prize number counter, a second general prize number counter, a third general prize number counter, and a fourth. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, the form in which the number of winnings of the special winning opening (attacker) is totaled by the special winning number counter is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first big winnings The first big prize number counter that counts the number of winnings to the mouth and the second big prize number counter that counts the number of winnings to the second big winning port are individually provided, and the number of winnings to the first big winning port is provided. Alternatively, the number of winnings to the second big winning opening may be individually counted, and the number of winnings may be summed to be the number of winnings to the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second start prize number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The first general prize number counter to the fourth general prize number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general prize opening switch to the fourth general prize opening switch. The special winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 9C. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the continuous ratio and the combination ratio stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is 21TM052, which is operated when the calculation of the ratio and the winning combination is obstructed and the calculation of the ratio and the winning combination is forced to be redone. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated during the collection of the data for calculating the normal ratio and the ratio. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

  The RTC 106 is provided on the main board 11 as described above, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in a board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A). A caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. By providing the caulking pins 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 21TM201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The board case 21TM201 is a crimped board case (hereinafter, also referred to as a "crimped board case").

  The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. In addition, a sealing seal 21TM011S for certifying that the main substrate 11 is enclosed is attached to the substrate case 21TM201. The seal sticker 21TM011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing sticker 21TM011S is arranged at a position distant from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal sticker 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E is composed of 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw the letter "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display portion 21TM029A to the fifth display portion 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

  Each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-5 (B) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The 1st digit first display unit 21TM029A displays the aggregated set values (1 to 6) and the RAM clear notification that notifies the completion of the RAM clear executed by the CPU 103 after the processing of the setting change mode (“C”). ) Is displayed, the counting period is displayed on the second display portion 21TM029B in the second digit and the third display portion 21TM029C in the third digit, and the fourth display portion 21TM029D in the fourth digit and the fifth display portion in the fifth digit. Numerical values are displayed in percentage on 21TM029E. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second starting prize hole in the high base state and the number of prize balls from the prize hole in the big winning game state to the total number of prize balls. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term ratio of display No2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. Moreover, when the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed in percentage on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term ratio of display No2 is displayed. In that case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative proportion of display No3 is displayed, the total cumulative proportion is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display section 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E, and the total cumulative proportion of display No4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit "B6." Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display section 21TM029C. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  The main board 11 enters a large winning a prize mouth (attacker), a first starting winning a prize mouth, a second starting winning a prize mouth, and a first general winning a prize mouth to a fourth general winning a prize mouth in calculating a ratio, a winning combination and a base. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main process, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first starting opening switch 22A and a second starting opening switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning opening switch to a fourth general winning opening switch, and an outlet opening switch 21TM070. Switch processing is performed to confirm the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal).

  In this switch processing, based on the detection signal output from each switch, it is specified in which entry area the game ball has entered. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signals are output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The values of the first starting prize number counter and the second starting prize number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the big winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signal is output from the second general winning opening switch, the third general winning opening switch, and the fourth general winning opening switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the third general winning number counter If the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070 by adding the values of the counter and the fourth general winning number counter, the values of the driving number counter are added to each entry area. Aggregate of entering the number of game balls (the winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. By including it in the switch process), it is possible to total the number of game balls entering each entry area without running a separate totaling program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in execution programs. Has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning the prize in each prize hole based on the total number of winning game balls in each prize hole, and stores the calculated number of prize balls in the RAM 102 for each prize hole. Let The number of prize balls by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one prize in the prize hole by the number of winnings in the prize hole. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each prize hole.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6, the number of prize balls for each prize hole classified here is a general prize hole prize ball (a prize ball obtained by winning the first general prize hole to the fourth general prize hole (sode)). ), 1st starting prize hole award ball (award ball due to winning at the 1st starting award prize hole (navel)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball due to award winning at Den Chu), special electric role award ball (to attacker) Is the number of prize balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. It should be noted that the CPU 103 individually counts the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning game balls to the first starting winning opening, but the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the first start. The number of winning game balls to the winning openings may be collectively tabulated. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning award balls and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning award balls are individually calculated. The number of prize balls may be collectively calculated.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls by winning in each prize hole for every 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer has a 0th storage area including a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. In the 0th memory area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and can store up to 6000 data with a margin.

  In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the total number of prize balls (10 sets) and the total number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area for each winning opening, and a total cumulative total. There is. The storage area for the total sum and total sum for 10 sets is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 pieces of data can be reserved. I can remember.

  Further, the RAM 102 stores a ratio combination ratio storage area for storing the ratios and ratios of 10 sets and the total cumulative total, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the last 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area for storing. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. And a cumulative ratio ratio storage area that stores the cumulative ratio and the cumulative ratio. Each of the combination ratio storage areas for storing the combination ratios and the total ratios for 10 sets and the total sum is composed of a maximum 1-byte counter. For example, in the case of storing an integer, the combination ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total sum can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  In addition, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base for 10 sets by the number of hits of the game balls to the respective winning openings for 10 sets and calculates the base for the 10 sets (base 2). The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits of the game balls to the respective winning openings of 10 sets and the number of hits is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 9-7, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H represents a hexadecimal number. 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 103 designates this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the internal register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the internal register and transfers the data to the register via this register area. Write the data of.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies the RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  A RAM area (16K byte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is, as shown in FIG. 9-8, a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area and other areas. It is composed of. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Reference data referred to by the above control program is temporarily stored in the data for the configured control program (may be simply referred to as control program data), and is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

  Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data used for displaying the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the cumulative proportion ratio of the total sum. Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a 1st storage area to a 10th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening (10 sets). Minutes) total storage area and 10 sets of proportion ratio storage areas. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different start addresses of the subroutines are stored.

  In this embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes) exceeding 1 byte, the data is divided into 1-byte units and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. is doing.

  Further, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 9-9 (A) is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term serial ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-2), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E display the short-term combination ratio. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No3, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and "A" is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. Character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and “A” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A, and the “b” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, in the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E,
Base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term serial ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18B, the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 is a display changeover switch 21TM030. Based on the operation of, when the set value is "1", short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, display of base 1, base 2, Short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1, base 2 display, short-term ratio when setting value is 3, short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative It is possible to sequentially change the display of the winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2. In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the setting value is “1”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "2", and the short-term ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative running ratio, and total cumulative running role displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “2”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "3", and the short-term ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative winning ratio displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “3”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the setting value is “3”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “4”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are being displayed when the setting value is "4", 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "5", and the short-term ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative winning combination displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “5”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “5”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to “6”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio, and the total cumulative winning role are displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The ratio, base 1 and base 2 numerical values switch to the value of the set value “6”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are being displayed when the setting value is "6", The numerical value displayed on the 1 display part 21TM029A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative running ratio displayed on the fourth display part 21TM029D and the fifth display part 21TM029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value "1".

  Note that the display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the continuous ratio, winning combination, and base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 is not limited thereto. In the above, only one numerical value or only two numerical values may be displayed among these continuous ratios, winning combinations, and bases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded prize balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. .

  In the present embodiment, the display monitor 21TM029 displays only the short-term combination ratio in red, and displays the short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1, and base 2 in green. The present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color as the combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

  Further, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the storage of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storages of the total ratio and total cumulative storage areas for 10 sets, and the storage of the ratio ratio combination ratio storage area for storing the ratios and ratios of 10 sets and total accumulations are respectively updated.

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening award balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas is “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, and “87”, respectively. It is assumed that the values are “66”, “117”, “45”, and “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 10th storage area to the 10th storage area is respectively "27", "81", and "." Update to "120" "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th to 10th storage regions, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, and then, the game control main process after step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main processing, the CPU 103 first makes necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, wait is performed until the effect control board 12 starts its operation (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050), and then the RAM 102. The accessible state is set (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). When the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input through the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the fact that

  With the shift to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal from the information output circuit 112 (step S21TM1130). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the game information of each gaming machine, based on the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal being input, the setting of the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals is changed. It is possible to specify that the control is performed in the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, it becomes possible to notify the gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode on the display device included in the external device in a identifiable manner.

  Moreover, CPU103 transmits the setting change mode command which designates having been controlled by the setting change mode as an effect control command with respect to the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has transitioned to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the image display device 5 that the game machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, it waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, the display control that increases the displayed set value by 1 each time the setting change operation is received and returns to 1 after reaching 6 is executed.

  Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 while waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the CPU 103 changes the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 to The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is overwritten with the displayed set value, so that the set value is confirmed. Then, the confirmed set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without being determined as YES in step S21TM1160), the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). If it is determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 match, so that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is stored. The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

  When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 described later.

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM1120 described above, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 can confirm the set value. Move to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not meet the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  With the shift to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal from the information output circuit 112 (step S21TM1210). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the game information of each gaming machine, based on the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal being input, the setting of the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals is changed. It is possible to specify that the mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, it becomes possible to notify the gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode on the display device included in the external device in a identifiable manner.

  Moreover, CPU103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command which designates having been controlled by the setting confirmation mode as an effect control command with respect to the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the image display device 5 that the game machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 while waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 causes the CPU 103 to perform the operation shown in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM1320 shown in 13 to determine whether or not the power-off detection process has been executed.

  When it is determined in step S21TM1110 described above that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch input via the input port as shown in FIG. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the (setting switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, when it is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes the power failure detection process (see FIG. 9-14). It is determined whether or not the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, as a case in which the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. When the process of step S21TM1320 is immediately executed without shifting to either the mode or the setting confirmation mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the process moves to the setting confirmation mode on the basis of the existence, and the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  When the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power failure detection process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, the initialization process which is executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is restored from the stop, is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs the game state recovery process (steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply was stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set to the pointer (step S21TM1340), the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 102), and the step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialized data is set in the backup setting table for areas that may be initialized in the work area. As a result of the processing of steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the stored contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain unchanged. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output An area in which the output state of the port is saved (output port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. The set value storage area (the area in which the confirmed set value is stored) is also included in the portion that should not be initialized. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base for each set value is stored is also included in the portion that should not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoration of power supply (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the production control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like performs recovery from power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  Incidentally, in step S21TM1310, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES), or if backup data is not stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), in step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), initialization processing is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In this example, as a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is immediately executed without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 On the basis of the fact that it is also OFF, on the condition that it is determined to be NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, immediately in step S21TM1410 without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the synchronization process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode. Based on the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the setting change mode and (4) the lock switch 21TM051 was ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was OFF when the power was turned on. , There is a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that it is determined to be NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after shifting to the setting confirmation mode and ending the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.), is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. Further, the head address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set to the pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S21TM1440).

  Further, by the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc., for selectively performing processing according to the control state. An initial value is set in the flag.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state), It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

  After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process is performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control devices 120 such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 may notify that the game state or the like has been initialized. It is possible. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  The CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state ends different according to the specified setting value.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21). Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103, for example, executes a process in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to make settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 2 ms.

  Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number updating process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not a big hit and a random number for determining whether to reach when not a big hit, for display The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value is the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating the random number for determining whether or not to win the normal symbol. It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process to do, or the process of sending a command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (ordinary random number for per symbol determination) When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then the power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Further, when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220) and then transmits a backup command at power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460) and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the production device such as the lamp 9. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L, 8R. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the production device such as the game effect lamp 9.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9-14. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes power-off detection processing (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), and on the condition that the game stop error has not occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, when the game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process of step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

  For example, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the open state of the glass door frame 3a, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) indicates abnormality. The level of magnetism that is determined is detected, the level of vibration that is determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency band that is determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown) It is determined that the game stop error has occurred based on the detection of the radio wave.

  Then, when the game ball wins any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. , When the detection signal is input from the second starting opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is detected. The prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays winning information such as winning ratio information, consecutive ratio, base, etc., and winning information such as winning ratio information, consecutive ratio, base, etc. calculated by the winning information processing. The winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) displayed on 21TM029 is performed. After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (step S21TM1660), the abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and the warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in step S1615. If an abnormality is detected, the abnormality detection flag is set and the step in the next timer interrupt is performed. The game may be stopped in S21TM1615 (switch processing is not executed). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, and payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 and the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and the opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the ordinary symbol display device 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process process, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable wing in the variable winning ball device 6B. Allows for tilting motion setting of one side.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, the effect After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the control board 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. Then, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.

  In the command control processing of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display has ended It is possible to periodically notify the effect control board 12 of the set value by transmitting information including the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an existing command such as the above command and transmitting the command. Furthermore, the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11 to execute productions suggesting the set values at various timings such as during variable display and big hit game. May be.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is controlled. This is because, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the range of random numbers determined as a big hit differs depending on the set value. For example, the big hit determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning before the setting change is a big hit in the relation with the setting value before the change, but it is judged as a big hit in the relation with the setting value after the change. On the contrary, there may occur an event in which it is determined as a big hit in relation to the set value before the change, but it is determined as a big hit in relation to the set value after the change. In such a case, based on the big hit determination random number extracted at the time of winning the start before the setting change, continue the game after the setting change (execute the game control timer interrupt process including special symbol process process) Since that is inappropriate, clear the pending storage (special symbol pending storage, normal symbol pending storage) by initializing the game state, and set the number of pending memories to the initial value (0). There is.

  Further, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of not permitting the interrupt in step S21TM1540, the switch process (step S21TM1620) in the game control timer interrupt process is not performed, and the start winning or Passage through the gate is invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like have not yet been executed and the random numbers have not been updated while the setting change mode is being controlled. If the random number is extracted based on the start winning during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the same random number will be obtained regardless of the timing of the starting winning, and the game will be played based on such a random value. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, starting prizes and passing through the gate are invalidated.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main processing) and RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main processing) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. The display on the 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), the store clerk or the like in the amusement hall clears the switch (setting switch). ) When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 to set values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the setting value "1") is displayed Step S21TM1150).

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A in this way, as shown in FIG. 9-15C, the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by the clerk at the amusement hall. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display section 21TM029A is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → It is updated and displayed like 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → .... Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed, the set value (in this example, the set value “1”) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A. (In this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is changed (overwritten).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (D), the CPU 103 detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off by a clerk or the like in the amusement hall (YES in step S21TM1180), and then stores the set value in the RAM 102. The stored setting value (setting value “1” in this example) is the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area in this example). ) Is changed (overwritten), and the setting value (setting value “2” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display portion 21TM029A to notify the clerk of the game hall that the new setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and the control of the setting change mode is completed. (Setting completion notification) (step S21TM1200).

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off once, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area is displayed). The stored setting value "2") and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (setting value "2" in this example) are not changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is fixed, there is a possibility that the set value can be changed even if the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed after the lock switch 21TM051 is once turned off.

  Then, the setting change mode (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) is ended, and the CPU 103 executes the RAM clearing process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, which indicates the game state at the time of power failure, is cleared, and the initial value is set. By setting, the game state is initialized, but the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. After the RAM clearing process is completed, the CPU 103 displays "C" on the first display unit 21TM029A to notify the clerk of the game hall that the RAM clearing process has been executed (RAM clearing notice). (Step S21TM1420). As a result, the store clerk or the like at the game hall recognizes that the initialization process has been executed after the setting change mode has ended (the setting value has been confirmed). Then, by executing the processing of step S21TM1430 and thereafter, a state in which the game can be played, that is, a variation display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be performed.

  In addition, in the setting change mode of the present embodiment, the mode in which the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited, but the setting value most advantageous to the player (“6” in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

  In addition, after the RAM clear notification, the CPU 103, after the notification of the RAM clear, displays the display ratio of the set ratio (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) on the display monitor 21TM029. You may make it display each total value, such as a ratio and a base. Further, for each set value, the aggregated values such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value).

  Note that when the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off during the control of the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the process of the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. The display on the 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF. When the power is turned on (in the case of N in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the CPU 103 executes the processes of step S21TM1210 and step S21TM1220, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the set value “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the set value (in this example, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A)). The set value "1" is displayed (step S 1TM1230).

  Note that unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk or the like in the game hall, the first display unit The numerical value displayed on 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like in the game hall while the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A (this example Then, if the setting value “1”) stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the control in the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The set value "1") stored in the temporary information storage area is not updated and displayed.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the store clerk or the like in the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing of step S21TM1320 and thereafter, the game becomes possible, that is, the variation display result, the big hit type, the variation pattern determination lottery, the prize ball payout, and the like become executable. That is, when the process of the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the process related to the RAM clear, except when it is determined to be NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information Neither the setting value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the setting value (setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

  As described above, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. That is, when the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting change switch). ) When the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode that the 21TM052 is in the OFF state is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  In order to change or display the set value (in order to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the clerk at the amusement arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on. At this time, the setting change mode is set. In order to shift to (1), the operation for further executing the initialization processing (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization processing is executed. Do not perform the operation. In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the game machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (or not to control either) when the power is turned on, and the initialization process can be performed. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the initialization processing is not required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clearing is not executed unless NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if the clerk at the game hall wants to confirm the set value while the player is playing the game, even if the player turns off the power once and then switches to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, It will not be initialized and will not be a disadvantage to the player. On the side of the game arcade, the setting confirmation mode allows confirmation of the set value without any trouble.

  Further, the CPU 103, in association with the end of the setting confirmation mode, displays the set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) on the display monitor 21TM029, such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Each aggregated value may be displayed. Further, for each set value, the aggregated values such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value).

  9-17 is a setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which the notification of the shift to the setting confirmation mode is performed. 9-17 (1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode is controlled, and FIG. 9-17 (2) is an image display when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (1), when the power is turned on (especially before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is in a state of not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (1), based on the fact that the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1140 in the main process, effect control is performed. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has transitioned to the setting change mode, and can notify that effect. For example, the characters "settings are being changed" are displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice (for example, a voice "settings are being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to inform that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, white blinking manner) to notify that the setting change mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode, so the setting change It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (1), other display information (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right hit display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, if the video signal is not ready to be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 is not controllable), until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, but the audio notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a voice (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") for notifying the shift to the setting change mode is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it is notified that the setting change mode has been entered. After that, when it becomes possible to supply the video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the characters "setting being changed" are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (1), based on the fact that the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or, in step S21TM1460, the CPU 103 is executed). Based on receiving the power-on initialization command transmitted to the production control board 12 from), the production control CPU 120 specifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has finished the setting change mode, It is possible to inform that effect. For example, the image display device 5 displays the character "setting change completed" and notifies the user of the transition to the setting change mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice "setting is being changed"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), the end of the setting change mode is notified. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended. It will be possible to clearly understand the end.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM1480 and subsequent steps of the main processing, and the game is ready (the game control timer interrupt processing is Along with the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demo screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received this command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (2), when the power is turned on (especially before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is in a state of not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the fact that the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1220 in the main processing, the effect control is performed. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify that effect. For example, the character "setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice (for example, a voice "setting confirmation") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to inform that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode) to notify that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has been entered, so that the setting confirmation It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), other display information (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right hit display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, if a video signal cannot be supplied to the image display device 5 by VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 is not controllable), until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, but the audio notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a voice (for example, a voice "setting is being changed") that notifies that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. After that, when it becomes possible to supply the video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the characters “setting confirmation”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the fact that the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). Based on the fact that the backup command at power-off recovery or the initialization command at power-on that was transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in S21TM1460 is received), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the effect control CPU 120. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended and notify that effect. For example, a voice of "setting confirmation completed" is displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice (for example, a voice "setting confirmation is in progress") indicating that the mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R is notified. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), the end of the setting confirmation mode is notified. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended, so that the setting confirmation mode is changed. It will be possible to clearly understand the end.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM1480 and subsequent steps of the main processing, and the game is ready (the game control timer interrupt processing is Along with the execution), the effect control command for displaying the demo screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received this command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state ends different according to the specified setting value. 9-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestive effects. 9-18 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the big hit ending screen, and in FIG. 9-18 (2), the ending screen in the "cloudy" form is selected on the big hit ending screen. For example, FIG. 9-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. FIG. 9-18 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the table for determining the mode of the setting suggestive effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main processing, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot gaming state is over, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command for executing an ending production in the image display device 5 to the production control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting value by storing the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot gaming state is finished, the image display device 5 is stored with a character (character of "BONUS end") informing that the jackpot gaming state is finished. It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value.

  In the table shown in FIG. 9-18 (4), the setting values designated by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , When the mode of the setting suggestive effect is determined to be the "clear" mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (1), when it is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (2), and FIG. When the “rain” mode shown in 18 (3) is determined, the determination value of is assigned.

  When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests a "fine" mode setting shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It was decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and it was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3) at a rate of 40% (for example, 40%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 has a low rate (for example, 20%) of the “clear” mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and the medium degree. It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high rate (for example, 50%) of the "clear" mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by varying the determination rate of each mode of the setting suggestion effect depending on the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect to be done.

  Next, the prize ball process (step S21TM1630) in the main process will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

  9-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various kinds of control relating to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 9-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 rises (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control processing), and the main board 11 is sent to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that the has started. The connection confirmation signal indicates that the prize balls can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output through the I / O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the payout control is performed through the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is input to the microcomputer 21TM370 for use. Each connection confirmation signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted by one signal line. The connection confirmation signal becomes ready for output by setting an initial value to the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the processing of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380, like the game control microcomputer 100. Further, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 9-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of control commands transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various kinds of control relating to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and output as a control command indicating a predetermined content according to the set content of the 8-bit data. To be done.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is a control command to be transmitted. The data content of the connection confirmation command is "A0 (H)", that is, "1010000".

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a connection confirmation command. Is a control command transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of the. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when a prize ball error (an abnormal state in which a prize ball payout operation based on a prize or a ball loan operation based on a ball lending request cannot be normally performed) occurs, the first bit "x" Is set to "1". When a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in the second bit "x". Further, when the out-of-ball error occurs, "1" is set to the third bit "x". When a door open error occurs, "1" is set in the 4th bit "x". In this way, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being confirmed, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detected by the game control microcomputer. 100 can be notified.

  The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number of game balls (0 to 14) for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a prize. . The data content of the prize ball number command is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxxx”. In this embodiment, when the game balls are detected by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game balls are switched by the winning port switch corresponding to the general winning port 10. When it is detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, a prize ball number command "01010011" for notifying the three prize balls is transmitted to the general winning opening 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, a prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying the number of 10 prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls is detected. A prize ball number command “0101110” for notifying 14 is transmitted. Either the connection confirmation command or the prize ball number command is transmitted as a prize ball request signal. It should be noted that the prize ball number command is transmitted in place of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted based on the condition for paying out the prize balls (occurrence of winning or the like) being established. In this embodiment, as described above, the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but the upper 4 bits are made common and the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the lower 4 bits. You may do it.

  The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The data content of the prize ball end command is "50 (H)", that is, "01010000". The prize ball end command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the completion of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, data indicating error information is not set in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is transmitted only once when the prize ball operation is completed, so that data indicating error information is set and sent to the next connection OK command without sending error information at that timing. It is possible to do so. Data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

  The award ball preparing command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the award ball operation has not ended, and a predetermined error occurs while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executing the award ball operation. This is a control command to be transmitted based on what is done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when a prize ball error occurs, "1" is set to "x" of the first bit. When a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in the second bit "x". Further, when the out-of-ball error occurs, "1" is set to the third bit "x". When a door open error occurs, "1" is set in the 4th bit "x". In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the prize ball operation has not ended because a predetermined error has occurred during execution of the prize ball operation to the game control microcomputer 100. The content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. Similar to the connection OK command, the prize ball preparing command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits (the predetermined bits are different) according to the error state. Further, one of the connection OK command, the award ball preparing command, and the award ball end command is configured to be transmitted as a received ACK signal. The award ball preparing command is a command (signal) that is output not only when an error occurs and the award ball operation cannot be executed, but also when the award ball operation is being executed.

  Note that the prize ball preparing command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted, based on the state where the prize ball operation cannot be performed due to an error. is there.

  9-21 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving the control signal shown in FIG. 9-19 and the control command shown in FIG. 9-20. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067 and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. In addition, the connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command of the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparing command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit included in the game control microcomputer 100. 21TM505 is input. In FIG. 9-21, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a reception ACK signal) are shown as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, in reality, one signal line transmits / receives the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal.

  Next, transmission / reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command, and the received ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparing command.

  FIG. 9-22 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-22, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the signal line connection with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is disconnected through the serial communication circuit 21TM505. , And sends a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, it sends a connection OK command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, it transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initial setting. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM in the accessible state (step S21TM1860). Further, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the setting process of the built-in device register of step S21TM1840 and the process of step S21TM1850, the register setting for setting the channel to be used in the timer mode, the register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and the interrupt vector are set. Register setting is performed. Then, the interrupt by that channel is used as a timer interrupt. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  The interrupt vector set in the channel set to the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interrupt process includes a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least a process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal related to prize ball payout from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request). May be included.) Is executed.

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, the interrupt processing based on the count-up of the built-in CTC can be used. Further, it is possible to set the interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up interrupt is an interrupt that occurs when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes "0", and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clearing process (step S21TM1880). In addition, initial values are set in flags and counters in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the initial value of the unpaid prize ball number counter to the unpaid prize ball number counter.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Settings for.

  When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt processing according to the same processing as the priority order initialization processing performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the register of the CTC provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt generation interval is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initialization process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). After that, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is started.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate the timer interrupt. When the timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the payout control process. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in a predetermined 1 byte of RAM (called an input state flag). is there. In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not checked, but the state of the input port is checked. Check flag status.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process for controlling the payout of a loan ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and for controlling a payout of the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

  Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). Further, the information output processing for outputting the prize ball information and the ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and display control processing for turning on the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full tank error, a ball out error, a prepaid card unit non-connection error) are detected in the error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on the fact that the error bit is set. In the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for turning on the prize ball LED 21TM053 when the prize ball payout is being performed. When the prize ball payout is completed, control is performed to turn off the prize ball LED 21TM053.

  Further, in this embodiment, the RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM371 outputs The contents of the port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer have a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020), a prepaid card control process (step S21TM2030), a main control communication process (step S21TM2035), and an information output process (step S21TM2060). And the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035, an operation in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits and receives various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 9-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 by using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. Further, when the prize ball number command is received, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to transmit the prize ball ACK command “D2” as a reception confirmation signal.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371, like the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, if there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while in the interrupt enable state, the serial communication circuit 21TM380 makes an interrupt request. Perform interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interrupt process when it is specified that the interrupt cause is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the reception data. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the reception data. The payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt process. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether the read reception data is a prize ball number command in the reception interrupt process. When the received data is the prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the prize ball number is determined. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 9-25 is for ball lending executed between the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370), the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. 3 is a block diagram for explaining the communication process of FIG. Here, as will be described later, as a method of limiting the ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289, there are a first ball lending limiting method to a fourth ball lending limiting method shown below.

  First, (1) the first ball lending limitation method, during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). In addition, (2) the second ball lending restriction method is a PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. This is a method of stopping signal output. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During the period, the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) stops the output of a signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 to the payout motor 21TM289. Further, (4) the fourth ball lending restriction method, the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. This is a method of stopping signal output.

  The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involves turning off the power supply (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and then turning on the power supply, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that the proper amount of game media corresponding to the lending request cannot be paid out. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiments, the ball lending in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is restricted. The first to fourth ball lending restriction methods will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 9-26 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. Based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is on, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13 (see FIG. 9-19). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on a VL signal as a connection signal.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state. When the trailing edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lent balls are paid out to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of limiting the ball lending in the period controlled by the setting change mode, there are the above-mentioned first ball lending limiting method to the fourth ball lending limiting method. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-27.

  FIG. 9-27 is a main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), a payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the process of the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controls the game medium payout. You can prevent it from running. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to inform that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to send a BRDY signal based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), it is possible to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the output of the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state also during the period in the setting confirmation mode. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned ON while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received). The state is turned off, not the state.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (paying of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side which has not received the connection confirmation command because the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game medium payout control by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from being executed. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to inform that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on restarting the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to send a BRDY signal based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), it is possible to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. To the OFF state. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. As long as it is inoperable, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, it is normal for the gaming machine frame 3 to be open during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  FIG. 9-29 is a main board when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 9-29, it is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). The PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when it is electrically connected to 100), while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is turned off without being turned on.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ. Since both the signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Since the open state of is detected, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game medium payout control by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from being executed. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to inform that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  Then, when the store clerk or the like in the game arcade operates the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state, the CPU 103 ends the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade closes the gaming machine frame 3 in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state, whereby the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to send a BRDY signal based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), it is possible to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Even in such a case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

  In this embodiment, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game controlling microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-30. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-30 is a main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), a payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal based on the connection confirmation signal being on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is kept in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer). When it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned on regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  If the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, but the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. 100 is in a state of being electrically connected), the PRDY signal is in an ON state (that is, the payout control board 21TM037 allows a payout operation), and the BRDY signal is in an ON state (that is, a ball lending switch 21TM062). Is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the BRQ signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which the predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned on), the CPU 103 sets While executing change mode or setting confirmation mode processing (while the connection confirmation command is not received) It is without EXS signal ON state to the OFF state. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command because the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game medium payout control by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from being executed. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to inform that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

  Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRQ signal when the EXS signal remains in the OFF state for a predetermined time after the BRQ signal is turned on (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out). To do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal when the BRQ signal is turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to send a BRDY signal based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 restarts receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. The EXS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned on, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), it is possible to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

  Further, in FIG. 9-30, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is in the ON state (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the EXS signal remains in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned on. The BRQ signal may be kept in the ON state and the BRDY signal may be kept in the ON state even after a predetermined time has elapsed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 restarts the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. The EXS signal may be turned on based on the fact that both are on. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, the BRQ signal is turned off, and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, the ball lending process according to the ball lending operation received within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed). When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and the ball lending may be executed.

(The method of not executing the ball lending restriction in the setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction in the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-31. In the example shown in FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal based on that the connection confirmation signal is on and that the connection confirmation command is received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is kept in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer 100 and When the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected) and receiving the connection confirmation command, the PRDY signal is output regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is turned on.

  If the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 determines that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and that the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is received. When the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media is paid out to the player.

  In this way, even during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, so that the connection confirmation command is continuously received. On the side of the control microcomputer 21TM370, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, it is possible to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting check mode is controlled, and the setting change mode or the setting check mode is set. It is possible to reduce the control load for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period. In addition, during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked and the workability can be improved. it can.

  The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on continuing to receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  In addition, when the payout of the predetermined number of game media is completed and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly. Further, when the payout of the predetermined number of game media ends and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 stops after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. As described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly.

(How to restart ball lending after the setting change mode ends)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the withdrawal is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the ball lending is being executed, and then the processing is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, refer to FIG. 9-32. It will be specifically described by using. In the example shown in FIG. 9-32, based on the fact that the power is cut off during execution of the payout of the game medium, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and after the power is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the setting is performed. After the termination of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the discontinued payout is restarted.

  FIG. 9-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch based on a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the payout number specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the process of the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Then, the power supply is restarted, and the payout control is performed based on that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled when the power is turned on is ended (the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and the PRDY signal is in the ON state). Microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the number of unpaid amount data becomes 0 one by one. The payout operation is performed. As a result, the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the power-off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored thereafter, the setting concerned After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the payout process is interrupted because the power is cut off during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. The example in which the suspended payout process is restarted after the end of is shown. This power off is caused by the fact that the store clerk at the game hall turns the power switch 21TM055 to the OFF state in order to change or confirm the set value. The power cut may be generated or may be the power cut caused by turning off the power switch 21TM055 along with the end of business at the game arcade. Not only when the power is cut off, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 during the payout process, or the glass door frame 3a is opened. In response to the detection of the state, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and then the process is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It may be restarted.

(How to forcibly terminate ball lending due to power interruption)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power is cut off while the ball lending is being executed, and the payout is not restarted after the power is restored, specifically, referring to FIG. 9-33. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power is cut off while executing the payout of the game medium, the payout under execution is stopped, and when the power is restored and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  FIG. 9-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is not stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the process of the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  After that, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. Since the data of the unpaid amount is not backed up, the predetermined amount to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power failure occurred (before the power supply was restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Out of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid amounts not paid out due to the suspension (forced termination) of the payout is paid out. Not done In this way, if the power is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and then, when the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting change mode or the setting change mode is controlled. By not executing the payout for the unpaid number after the confirmation mode is finished, the control for backing up the data of the unpaid number and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power is cut off during payout, the payout in progress is forcibly terminated (stopped) by not backing up the unpaid number of data. Not limited to such a form, as in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, when the power is cut off, the unpaid number of data is backed up and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are restored after the power is restored. On condition that it is not controlled by any of them, the payout of the game media equivalent to the unpaid number is executed based on the backed up data of the unpaid number (restarting the payout based on the backup data), while the power is restored. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting change is made. After mode or setting confirmation mode end also not perform the payout of unpaid coin number corresponding to the game medium may be so.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), it is possible to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Even in the case, the forced termination method of ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the forced termination method of the ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

(Prize ball payout control)
FIG. 9-34 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal is received and the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted), a game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, and the prize balls are paid out (the prize ball payout operation). When finished, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the prize ball end command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception.

  Although not shown, there is a winning during the execution of the communication process for connection confirmation (from the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls in the award ball request signal, and the award ball number command as the set award ball request signal is sent from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection OK command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, and the prize balls are paid out (the prize ball payout operation). When finished, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the payout of prize balls (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparing command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Invalid winning during setting change mode or setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 9-35 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing.

  As described above, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. The general winning opening switch, and the switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIG. 9-14 shown in FIG. 9-14) for confirming the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the count switch 23 is not executed, and a special symbol process including a big hit determination process and the like. Neither the process (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 9-14) or the like is executed. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it does not detect the detection signal output from each switch and does not execute the big hit determination process or the like. That is, during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Furthermore, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game balls by the discharge port switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the base total is not executed. In other words, until the interrupt permission is executed, it is not necessary to add up each item such as ratio, role ratio, and base. Therefore, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, each item is controlled. The processing load of the CPU 103 can be reduced because the processing is out of the aggregation period.

  While controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the fact that the game medium passes through each winning opening. And That is, the prize ball number command is not transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the big hit determination process and the like are not executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 on the basis of not receiving the prize ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the game medium passes through each of the winning openings, the payout control of the prize balls is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, and the count switch 23. Switch processing to check the status of each switch (presence or absence of detection signal) can be executed, it can be detected that the game medium has passed each winning opening, and it is possible to send the prize ball number command (and connection confirmation command) Become. Further, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol process process including a big hit determination process.

  The gaming control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has received the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal receives ACK. A connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. At this time, when the game medium passes through one of the winning openings (when a winning occurs), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing a switch process, and the gaming controlling microcomputer 100 outputs a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and has received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal drives the payout motor 21TM289 and outputs a predetermined number (for example, three). Pay out the game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  If a setting change mode period in which the set value may be changed, a switch process is executed to extract a big hit determination random number, and a big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number. When the set value before the change is a big hit, but the set value after the change (the set value after the confirmation) is not a big hit, the big hit judgment is executed based on the big hit judgment random number, or conversely before the change. However, there may be a case where the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number, which does not result in a big hit with the set value of (1) but becomes a big hit with the changed set value (set value after confirmation). That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the big hit determination and the set value becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the player or the game hall is disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, the winning balls are not paid out based on the fact that the gaming balls have passed through the respective winning openings, and the jackpot determination process is not executed, so that the jackpot determination is performed. The relationship between the execution timing and the set value is prevented from becoming complicated, and the disadvantage of the player or the game hall is prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is displayed but cannot be changed, the winning is similarly invalidated and the jackpot determination process is not executed. I have to. As for the setting confirmation mode, unlike the setting change mode, it is possible to control when the game control timer interrupt processing is being executed, not when the power is turned on, and the switch processing is performed during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. And, if the special symbol process process can be executed, a control that is completely different from the setting change mode is required, which causes a problem that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, similarly to the setting change mode, it is possible to perform control only when the power is turned on, and the prize balls are not paid out based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the respective winning openings, and the jackpot determination is made. By not executing the processing, the processing is shared and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the timer interrupt is set after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). . Therefore, because the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The prize in is invalidated. On the other hand, if the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, etc., is a game stop error occurring during the period during which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game? Whether or not it is determined (step S21TM1615), when it is determined that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step) in the same interrupt processing Since S21TM1690) is not executed, the winning is invalidated. In this way, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) is different depending on whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the case where the game stop error occurs.

  By the way, by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the connection OK command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100, as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, on the basis of not receiving the connection OK command during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium by not transmitting the prize ball number command. In this way, based on the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, It is possible to invalidate the winning.

  It should be noted that during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be operated so that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be controlled. . Even if such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIG. 9-35 can be applied, and the game control microcomputer 100 can be set based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is better not to execute the switch process and the special symbol process process.

  In addition, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration itself capable of detecting that the game medium has passed through each winning opening). Also good. In the case of adopting such a configuration, as described above, by stopping the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout control is not executed by the microcomputer 21TM370, the winning is invalidated, and the special symbol process process is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is restarted in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payout restriction method during gaming machine frame / door frame open detection)
FIG. 9-36 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the gaming machine frame / door frame opening detection. As described above, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, during normal operation, a reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Receive a connection OK command as a signal. At this time, when a clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is opened), the prize balls to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls flow down is not physically connected to the upper plate that stores the flowing down prize balls, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It will fall without doing. Here, in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the big winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any of the winning openings, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the award ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is sent to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to. This award ball preparing command is until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

  As described above, while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the gaming medium passes through each winning opening and a winning is detected, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the payout motor 21TM289. The payout control of prize balls is not executed without driving. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number designated by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has paid out a predetermined number of game media, transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  When the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected during the payout of prize balls, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the payout of the prize balls, and the prize balls are paid. Data of the unpaid number out of the number designated by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute the payout control of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  In the meantime, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), it is possible to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Even in this case, the payout limiting method during the gaming machine frame / door frame opening detection shown in FIG. 9-36 can be applied. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and the game is controlled during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The machine frame 3 is normally open. While the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of prize balls is not executed. As a result, the payout of prize balls during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode is restricted.

  Next, the control when the power is cut off in the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2).

  FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power interruption in separate charts based on the difference in the situation when the power interruption occurs. The pattern related to the power failure shown in Fig. 9-37 (1) shows the control in the case where the power failure occurs in the situation where "the set value is not confirmed" in "during change of the set value", and the power is restored. The set value at the time is the set value when the power was last turned on. In addition, the pattern related to power-off shown in FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control in the case where the power-off occurs in the situation where the “set value determination” is performed during “changing the set value”. The set value at power failure recovery is the set value when the power is cut off.

  That is, FIG. 9-37 (1) shows the setting when the power is cut off in the state where the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state and the “set value determination” is not performed (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control relating to the value, and FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control relating to the set value when the power is cut off after the “set value determination” operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state. Shows.

  Further, FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from top to bottom according to the order of occurrence (see “Order” column and “Status” column). ). Further, in FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2), the “lock switch” column shows the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (order 1 to 8). In the “setting value” column, setting value data (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. Further, in the "setting value display" column in the drawing, the display contents (setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. There is.

  When the setting change work is performed, as shown in the top row of the "status" column in Fig. 9-37 (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (sequence 1), and the right side of the figure is displayed. As shown in the "lock switch" column, the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. Further, in FIG. 9-37 (1), the "set value" at the time of "power-on" of the order 1 is that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is "1" at this time. , "1".

  In addition, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the “Set value display” column is blank (blank) at this stage because the power has just been turned on and the RAM 102 This indicates that the display of the set value has not been started because the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150) has not yet been performed.

  After the “power on” status, the “setting change mode start” status (order 2) is entered. Then, in this "setting change mode start", as shown in Fig. 9-37 (1), the "lock switch" column is "ON", and the "set value" column is the RAM 102. The setting value is "1" based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not changed. It is “1” based on the fact that the setting value read out from and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A).

  Subsequently, when the status of "changing set values" (order 3) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “setting value” field remains “1”, but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the setting value stored in the area from “1” to “2”, the “setting value display” column (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) The selected value changes to "2".

  Furthermore, when the status of "changing set values" (sequence 4) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “setting value” field remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage area The setting value stored in is changed from "2" to "3" so that the "setting value display" column (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. The new value is changed to "3".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the power is cut off during “changing the set value” (sequence 5), the operation for fixing the set value is not performed, and the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is Since the process of overwriting the set value stored in (the process of step S21TM1190 for confirming the set value) has not been executed, the "set value" column remains "1". That is, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of "1" when the power is turned on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the power failure.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state and the power is turned on (sequential 6), In the “setting change mode start” situation (sequence 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Since it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the “setting value” column remains “1” and the “setting value display” column also becomes “1”. It should be noted that the same is true in the case of controlling in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode in the order 7.

  In this way, when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state), and when the power is cut off, the setting value of the RAM 102 is set. Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The setting value is the value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time (before the power failure occurred). In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, the control in the case where the power failure occurs after the setting value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 9-37 (2). The description of the processing part common to the case where the power is cut off before the setting value is determined will be omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is determined, the “set value determination” shown in order 5 is performed after the “setting value changing” shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for confirming the setting value is performed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the setting value ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, in the setting change mode, the "lock switch" column is "OFF" based on turning off the lock switch 21TM051.

  That is, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value “1” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored set value (the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten by "3", whereby the set value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, “3” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  When the power is cut off in this state (sequence 6), the process of overwriting the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for fixing the setting value) is executed, The “set value” column is “3”. That is, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to "3", which is different from that when the power is turned on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the power failure.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (sequential 7), the situation of the “setting change mode start” ( In the order 8), the set value (“3” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is read. ), The “setting value” column becomes “3” and the “setting value display” column also becomes “3”. It should be noted that the same is true in the case of controlling in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode in the order 8.

  As described above, when the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off during the control of the setting change mode, it means that the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted. Therefore, if the store clerk of the game hall accidentally shifts the game machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further performs the setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by turning off the power switch 21TM055 after that, the change of the set value can be stopped and the state before shifting to the setting change mode can be restored.

  The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involves turning off the power supply (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and then turning on the power supply, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, as shown in Fig. 9-37 (1), the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the power supply is turned off. When a disconnection occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed after the power is turned on, so that the set value can be properly determined and the control related to the set value is unstable. Can be avoided, and appropriate control regarding the set value can be executed.

  FIG. 9-38 is a rendering device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example in which (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) is used to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed is shown.

  FIG. 9-38 (1) shows a state in which the decorative design is variably displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing a game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol) (game control) Timer interrupt processing for step S21TM1660), a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (step S21TM1710 for game control timer interrupt processing). ), When it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt process), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated Command, production control board 12 And transmits to the effect control CPU 120) (step a game control timer interruption process S21TM1710). That is, the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted to notify that the operation for changing the set value has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and the setting change mode and It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed, even if the operation is not controlled by any of the setting confirmation modes, and notify that effect. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed.

  In the present example, the effect control CPU 120 receives "both a lock switch operation command and a setting changeover switch operation command" as an abnormal operation warning notification based on the reception of both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the abnormal operation warning notification has a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), Even during the variable display of the symbols, the clerk at the amusement arcade, etc. confirms that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly understand and check whether fraud has occurred. It should be noted that the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice notifying that an operation for changing the set value has been detected (for example, a voice "operation of a lock switch or a setting change switch has been detected"), and the game effect lamp 9 May be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red blinking mode) to notify that the operation for changing the set value is detected.

  In the present embodiment, only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt process is executed), the configuration can be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. The operation to operate (operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within a period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is executed, or within the period when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the setting value is being changed illegally.

  In this embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at a timing other than when the power is turned on or during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Informs that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed on the image display device 5, which is the largest display device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, to check the illegality. I try to suppress it.

  Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally opened, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is notified. Further, as described above, the ball lending is suspended or stopped, and the prize ball payout is also suspended or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island becomes open. By this, from the position facing the predetermined position, it is possible to see the back side surface of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (on the back side thereof) It is possible to operate the setting changeover switch) 21TM052. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is irrespective of whether or not the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. When an operation is performed, notification that the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is performed is performed to strengthen the illegal suppression.

(Signal for setting change)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 9-39, the information output circuit 112 according to the present embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and outputs a signal corresponding to each information output terminal. To be done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-shaped signal that is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and has a pulse width of 0.1 seconds. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned on when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It will be in the ON state even when there is.

  From the third terminal, the all symbol determination frequency signal is output. The all symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when confirmed), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulsed signal that is output when it is displayed (when it is confirmed), and the pulse width is 0.5 seconds. The all-start signal is output from the fourth terminal. The all-starting-port signal is a pulse-like signal that is output when a game ball is won at the first starting winning opening and is also output when a gaming ball is winning at the second starting winning opening. And the pulse width is 0.1 second.

  One signal for the big hit is output from the fifth terminal. The big hit 1 signal becomes an ON state when being controlled to the big hit game state. Two jackpot signals are output from the sixth terminal. The big hit 2 signal is in the ON state when being controlled in the big hit game state, and is also in the ON state when being controlled in the high base state. That is, a period in which one jackpot signal is in the OFF state and two jackpot signals are in the ON state can be identified as the high base state.

  A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and is also in the ON state during the period in the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the set value can be specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal that is output each time 10 out balls (game balls that have been launched into the game area and led to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and have a pulse width of 0. It is 1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. The winning signal is generated each time a gaming ball wins in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening It is a pulse-shaped signal that is output each time a prize is detected by the switch) and is output each time 10 prize balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Also, when a fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When the fraudulent activity is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and each prize hole has an abnormal frequency (for example, the first start prize hole has a game ball at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). It is determined as an abnormal prize based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, a case where a switch abnormality is detected is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, 10 times or more consecutive in the game control timer interrupt process). 1 When the starting port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch abnormality has been detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it remains ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and is also in the ON state during the control in the setting confirmation mode. .

  As described above, since the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that the misconduct has been performed, It is possible to notify the outside that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the processing related to the setting change is executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is once turned off, and then stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since a number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current set value are output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), when the setting change mode is entered at power-on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear, the security signal is kept in the ON state for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is in the OFF state with the end of the setting change mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is entered at the time of power-on, the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned off at the same time with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 9-40 (1) Similarly, even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off due to the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  If the RAM clear is executed without switching to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal remains ON for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Does not turn on.

  In this way, the security signal remains in the ON state even during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. It is thus possible to recognize that the control may have been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal is set to the parity in the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. Even if the check result is not normal), it remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the setting control mode or the setting change mode may have been controlled, and the security signal input period reaches 30 seconds. If not, it can be recognized that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the device can recognize and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting confirmation mode may have been temporarily controlled, and the security signal input When the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what control the game machine has executed on the outside by the output period of the security signal of the game machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear has been executed and the possibility that the RAM has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 9-40 (3), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. In this configuration, the security signal is output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, but the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the period during which the security signal is controlled in the setting change mode. Does not output the security signal, and does not output the security signal even during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, if the setting confirmation mode is entered at power-on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, when the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is kept off because the RAM clear is not executed. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (5), the RAM clear is executed after the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. If (YES in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (4), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. That is, when the setting change mode is entered at power-on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed at the end of the setting change mode, even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds. In addition, in the configuration where the security signal is not output during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, when the RAM clear is executed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  In this manner, while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is set to the ON state while the security signal is set to the OFF state, and when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting change mode is set. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off), so that when one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. Become a relationship. Due to such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. It is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIG. 9-40 (6), when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the game is played from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame opening signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the completion of detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a Even after the machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal and the security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Since there is a restriction on the allocation of the signal, it may be difficult to allocate the output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal. The example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal to which the security signal is output.

  In pattern 2, the first terminal to the sixth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal allocation in pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is in the ON state when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Also, when a fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When the fraudulent activity is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and each prize hole has an abnormal frequency (for example, the first start prize hole has a game ball at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). It is determined as an abnormal prize based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, a case where a switch abnormality is detected is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, 10 times or more consecutive in the game control timer interrupt process). 1 When the starting port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch abnormality has been detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it remains ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 9-39 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and is also in the ON state during the period in the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the set value can be specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, since the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that an illegal act has been performed, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. Without that, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (that there is a possibility that processing related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the completion of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned off (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is changed). After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the tenth terminal is turned off.) After that, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed. Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (unit number) via the relay device provided in the gaming machine island, the setting value based on the unit number and the setting change correspondence signal is set in the management device. By correlating and displaying the set value determined in advance with each other, it is possible to perform a process of displaying in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of a plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the administrator of the game shop via the management device, and the setting values that the administrator has decided in advance and the settings changed in the setting change work The administrator can understand the inconsistency with the value. When such inconsistency has occurred, it is possible to optimize the management of the settings in a plurality of gaming machines at the gaming store by confirming the settings of the gaming machine or performing the setting change work again. it can.

  As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but thereafter, it corresponds to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. It is output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-41, as the special mode setting change corresponding signal, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output. In this example, the same number of pulses as the set value is output. The pulse width is, for example, 0.1 seconds, and when the set value is 3, for example, pulses having a width of 0.1 seconds are output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode is completed without changing the set value. Although the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode, the special mode setting change corresponding signal is set based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. 1 pulse is output.

  In this way, it is possible to notify the outside of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the set value at the end of the setting change mode (when the set value is changed, The changed setting value) can be notified to the outside, and the signal notifying whether the setting change mode is controlled and the signal notifying the setting value are output from the common information output terminal. Is possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal at a predetermined predetermined timing, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are finished. It Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of paid prize balls by 1000. At the time point (predetermined event is detected, an event related to the game machine error, such as detection of opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detection of opening of the glass door frame 3a, detection of magnetic abnormality, etc. When it occurs), a special mode setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), one pulse is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal when the big hit occurs.

  As a result, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the external device to grasp the set value of each gaming machine. For example, the external device is not properly input with the setting change corresponding signal at the end of the setting change mode. Even when the setting value cannot be specified on the side, it becomes possible to specify the setting value at a predetermined timing thereafter, and it is possible to strengthen the prevention of fraud in which the setting value is changed by an inappropriate method.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3 as a result of the setting value being changed in the setting change mode. In this case, when the setting change mode ends, the setting change correspondence signal is once turned off, and the setting change stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes 3 and the setting change correspondence is made. Three pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), three pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (1), the operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the set value was not changed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (2), the operation of changing the setting value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the setting value was changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are output. There is. As described above, when the setting change mode is controlled, the common signal output process is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the set value is actually changed. The signal output processing can be simplified.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains unchanged at 1. In this case, the setting change corresponding signal is once turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change corresponding signal is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1 based on the setting change corresponding signal. 1 pulse is output. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), one pulse is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  As described above, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the set value notified in the setting confirmation mode (the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is stored when the power is turned on). The setting value stored in the area, which is the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled or not and the setting value It is possible to output the signal for notifying the signal from the common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2), when the RAM clear is executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is After 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the state becomes the OFF state, and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulse-shaped signals (special mode) corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 ) Setting change corresponding signal will be output.

(Modification of game control main processing)
Next, another mode relating to the game control main processing of FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44. 9-11 to 9-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 9-44, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the initialization processing (RAM clear) is executed.

  In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 in the accessible state (step S21TM1060), moves to step S21TM2110 in FIG. 9-43, and clears input through the input port. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

  When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to turn on when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and initialization processing is executed (step S21TM2220). The series of processes (the processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) accompanying the initialization process are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIG. 9-13, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the OFF state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110 (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM2120 and thereafter. To do. The processing shown in steps S21TM2120 to S2170 is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1320 to S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off recovery in step S21TM2170 or after transmitting the power-on initialization command in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 of FIG. 9-44). When the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. It is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

  When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 sets the setting value changeable mode. (Step S21TM2330 to step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the fact that The processing shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. After executing the process of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  When the RAM clear flag is not set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value. The mode is shifted to (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not meet the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. When it is confirmed in step S21TM2540 that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined to be NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 of FIG. 9-43, and the initialization processing (step S21TM2220 and later) is performed. The RAM clear flag is not set even when the processing (1) is executed. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. In this way, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by RAM clear) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Are not controlled by the setting change mode.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the series of processes relating to step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 is the step S21TM1470 to step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, description thereof will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the initialization command at power-on (step S21TM2270) and then the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) Is transmitted, and a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). Further, when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command after transmitting the backup command at power-off recovery or the initialization command at power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270). S21TM2520) and a setting command (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by a production device such as 9. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode on the basis of receiving the setting command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by a production device such as 9. According to such a configuration, by receiving the setting command without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for designating the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode Since the effect control CPU 120 side can specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other modified examples of the characteristic part 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the switch for changing the set value is common with the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the set value is not limited to this. The switch for changing the number is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation), and is different from the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear). May be With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the setting value and the position of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A), as compared with the case where the switch for switching the setting value is provided on the power supply board. Therefore, when changing the set value, it becomes easy to confirm the set value and the switching operation according to the confirmation of the set value, and the workability can be improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in the partial display area (first display portion 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 in which the game information such as the aggregated bases is displayed has been shown. The display device is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 for displaying the totalized game state, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying the set value, and is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be individually and more clearly grasped, so that the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information is facilitated. Therefore, the workability can be improved.

  Further, a configuration may be employed in which a clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) is provided, but a switch for changing the set value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in order while being controlled in the setting change mode (for example, It is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when the lock switch 21TM051 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6). Stored setting values (setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) are stored in the setting value storage area (setting values stored in the setting value storage area are stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The set value may be confirmed by overwriting the set value. The clerk at the game arcade displayed the setting value to be confirmed by switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing at which the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) is displayed. The set value can be confirmed as the set value of the game machine.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize has been shown, but the invention is not limited to such a form. It may be an enclosed game machine in which a game medium is enclosed in a game machine and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. In this enclosed game machine, the information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be included in the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037, For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting change mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the set value It may include information indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit these pieces of information to a management device such as a hall computer, and the hall computer may be able to specify that each gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12 is in the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, being in the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, or the like. However, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, but the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device are controlled based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the like may notify that the setting change mode is controlled (for example, the 7-segment display emits light in the first notification mode), and the setting confirmation mode. On the basis of being controlled to, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, etc. are controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an indicator (round number indicator) for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game, and for instructing the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). If a display device (right-handed display device) or the like is provided to indicate that the display device is in the process of setting change mode, it indicates that the process of setting confirmation mode is being executed. Alternatively, the light may be emitted in any of the modes.

  In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the security is set. The example has been shown in which the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended without the signal being turned off. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when controlled in the setting confirmation mode and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Accordingly, the security signal is temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. With such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period in which the external computer such as a hall computer is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and it is clear that the RAM clear is executed. Can be specified.

  Regarding the expectation suggestive effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) is set according to the set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) of the gaming machine and the jackpot expectation. The number of selections) may be changed. For example, even if the jackpot expectation is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, (1 or 2), the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate. With such an effect configuration, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high even if the display result is lost, because the expectation suggesting effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more is executed. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation suggestion effect is executed. Further, even if the reach has a low jackpot expectation degree, the expectation suggestion effect having a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more) is accordingly performed, so that the player can play the pachinko game machine 1 concerned. Since the set value can be expected to be high, the interest can be improved even when the jackpot expectation is low.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the game is played. When a symbol is stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, big The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus). In such slot machines, the percentage of winning bonuses varies depending on the set value, and it is possible to change the set value by controlling the slot machine in the setting change mode, and by setting it in the setting confirmation mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and Other Forms of Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, details and other forms of the above-mentioned characteristic portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). Further, the gaming machine frame is provided with a hinge mechanism portion (not shown) on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player), and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are fulcrum points on the hinge mechanism portion, respectively. The other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door using the hinge mechanism as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. A lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a to the outer frame is provided on the other end side (for example, the right side when viewed from the player).

  In addition, the outer frame is a frame body that is made of metal and serves as an outer portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body made of synthetic resin to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape with the center penetrating as viewed from the front. The game board 2 is attached to the game machine frame 3 from the front. The gaming board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to come off from the gaming machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body in which speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a transparent window that protects the game board surface and allows the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 to be viewed.

  When a store clerk at the game arcade performs maintenance of the game board surface (for example, ball clogging elimination measures, etc.), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating the mechanism part (one end side) as a fulcrum toward the front side like a door. In order to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, etc. arranged on the back surface side of the game board 2 in order to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame to the front side like a door with the hinge mechanism section (one end side) as a fulcrum, It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can specify that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the opened state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal capable of specifying that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Process at power-on)
10-1 and 10-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 and This is processing corresponding to the processing shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-43 to 9-44. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, some of the processes (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11) are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 10-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This process is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 9-43, and a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting change flag is set when the process proceeds to the setting change / confirmation process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 causes the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 to match a regular value, for example, one of 1 to 6. It is confirmed whether or not (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before being installed in the game hall), a value different from the regular value (for example, 0) is stored in the set value storage area. There is a case. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

  If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 clears the area excluding the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clearing process in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped is cleared. Although the initial value is set, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized. The notification that the gaming state has been initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process is performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control devices 120 such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 may notify that the game state or the like has been initialized. It is possible.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoration of power supply (step S21TM3045), The process moves to step S21TM3060. Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the production control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like performs recovery from power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified on the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 informs the gaming control microcomputer 100 of a detection signal indicating that the gaming machine frame 3 has been opened, and that the glass door frame 3a has been opened. When the detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it is confirmed whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to step S21TM3510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 10-2. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the set value can be confirmed.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM3020). S21TM3030 YES), the game machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM3060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3070), the setting value is changed and / or Confirmation becomes possible, and the game machine frame 3 is closed (NO in step S21TM3060), or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO in step S21TM3070), and then shifts to the normal game processing. .

  In the present embodiment, although the setting value is not allowed to be changed, in order to enter the state where the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, 2) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are both satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM3060 and S21TM3070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), further, (3) under the condition that it is determined in step S21TM3040 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES), As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is abnormal, or some illegal operation. There is a possibility that the means is about to confirm or change the set value. In such a state, it is inappropriate to permit the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. Also, the control is not performed in any of the setting change modes.

  In the present embodiment, as condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode. It may not be controlled by any of the above.

  On the other hand, in step S21TM3060, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a When it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to the normal game process. If it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the normal game process. With the shift to the normal game process, the process corresponding to step S21TM1470 to step S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 9-13 or step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 9-44 becomes executable, and as shown in FIG. 9-14. The game control timer interrupt processing shown can be executed (special symbol process processing can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 determines that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if a regular value (1 to 6) is stored in the setting value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, step S21TM3110 is executed, The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the setting value storage area may be inappropriate.

  In addition, in step S21TM3020, when it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

  Further, in step S21TM3030, when the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), CPU 103 stores 0 in the setting value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), And transmits a set value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010) (YES in step S21TM3010), if the normal value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area, , 0 is set as the set value, and the set value abnormality error command is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, a message "setting value is abnormal" is displayed. To). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the set value should be changed (for example, displays a message "Please change the set value."). It should be noted that the speakers 8L and 8R may notify that the set value may be abnormal (for example, output a voice "The set value is abnormal."), And change the set value. You may make it notify that it is in the proper state (for example, output the voice "Please change the setting value.").

  When the CPU 103 transmits the set value abnormality error command, it confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). .

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

  If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), the CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clear processing in step S21TM3150, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped is cleared. The initial value is set, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and 0 is stored in the setting value storage area. On the other hand, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as continuous ratio, winning combination, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each set value is set. The total value is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), then transmits the initialization command (step S21TM3160), and the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 10-2. Move to. It should be noted that the backup command when power is restored (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command when power is turned on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) are commands that are transmitted only once when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits these power-on commands, it can specify that the power-on commands have been transmitted and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is off. The command transmission flag may be cleared at the time of shifting to the normal game processing (step S21TM1470-). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, the backup command when power is restored (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command when power is turned on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, In the case where any one of the case where the determination is YES in step S21TM3020) and the setting value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be played in this state, Before proceeding to the normal game processing, it is necessary to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the area including the setting value storage area is cleared by clearing the RAM (step S21TM3150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state in order to bring the setting value into a changeable state (setting change mode). (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination process of steps S21TM3120, S21TM3130, and S21TM3140, the setting value can be changed ( It is possible to switch to the setting change mode).

  If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be set to a regular value. Without, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is once shut off and the next power-on (1) to (3). All of the conditions are satisfied and the mode is changed to the setting change mode to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value.

  When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sends a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. It may be done. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, the characters “Please turn off the power”) on the image display device 5 to prompt the power to be turned off. . Further, the CPU 103, when one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 10-2. In the processing of FIG. 10B, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the set value stored in the set value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

  Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, the CPU 103 specifies the setting confirmation mode. The command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed, the CPU 103 sets the setting change mode. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has transitioned to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

  If the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM3520. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

  Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM3600) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040, the RAM clear flag). Remains 0).

  Further, the security signal can be output (step S21TM3540) and the current setting value can be displayed (step S3550), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM3585) and the setting value can be updated (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, The RAM clear flag is set to 1).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command, it can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and set a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM3530 (YES in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set (NO) in the process of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game process. Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating the setting value stored in the setting value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value designated by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state ends different according to the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730), and confirms whether the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

  Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and power failure occurs during setting change. It is determined that there is not (NO in step S21TM3020), the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). No), RAM clear (step S21TM3050) is not executed, so it is only necessary to execute the normal processing when the power is restored, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Things (Step S21TM3060 When the NO) has been confirmed, it may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740), it means that the RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. Before (YES in step S21TM3530), the regular set values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (for example, in the setting change mode while the set value remains 0). If the operation for changing the set value is not performed), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular set values (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on process again and executes the processes of step S21TM3010 and thereafter.

  As described above, the clerk or the like in the game hall puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Also, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and at the same time, the gaming state, etc. Can be not initialized (NO in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140 and the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. There is.

  In the control shown in FIG. 10-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (NO in step S21TM3530) in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (NO in step S21TM3530), and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all the glass door frames 3a are closed, it is determined as NO in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in a state of waiting for the open state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 operates the lock switch 21TM051 to change the setting or confirm the setting, by instructing the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a to be opened. A command instructing to notify that the mode should be ended may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, in the effect control CPU 120 that receives these commands, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like notify that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is operated to notify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be ended. For example, a message “Please open the gaming machine frame 3 and turn off the lock switch 21TM051 to end the setting change mode.” May be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process is shifted to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) lock switch 21TM051 In response to the fact that is operated (turned from OFF state to ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch ( In response to the operation of the clear switch) 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

  And as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) sets based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, even though the operation is not controlled by either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and notify that effect. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk at the amusement hall clearly understands that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed even though the operation is not controlled in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the illegal It is possible to check whether or not

  Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process moves to the normal game process, and The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the setting change mode is controlled, in step S21TM3550, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed. At this time, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1). Is displayed with the letter "E". Therefore, the clerk of the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs the setting change operation), knowing that at least the regular value is not stored in the setting value storage area.

  Every time the clerk at the game arcade operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). For the sake of explanation, this example shows an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. It is updated in the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

  In this way, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a normal value, as the information corresponding to this, information different from the numeral (the letter E in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that a value different from the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, and prompt the setting change operation. If a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is stored in the set value storage area, if that value (0 in this example) is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the manager of the game hall May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to any of the normal values, and may turn off the lock switch 21TM051 without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, information (numerical letter E in this example) different from the numeral is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. By preventing such misunderstanding, the setting change operation is surely performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), when a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled. , The character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029, but if the setting change operation is performed even once and the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, In addition, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed, the set value is updated within the range of the regular set value during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). The setting value storage area does not store a value different from the normal value (0 in this example), and the display monitor 21TM029 also stores information different from the normal value (character E in this example). ) Is never displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when the setting change mode is controlled, step S21TM3550 Then, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. For the sake of description, this example shows an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

  That is, when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is initially a normal value when the setting changing mode is controlled, no matter how many times the setting changing operation is performed thereafter. During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state), the set value is updated within the range of the set value, and the set value storage area does not show the set value. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (character E in this example) different from the normal value is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  For example, when a game machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is set in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Therefore, if the set value is not changed to a regular value through the setting change mode at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the game hall side, then the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played. become unable. Thus, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be set to the regular value.

  In addition, the gaming machine manufacturer sets the setting change flag in advance when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped (before installation in the gaming hall), and then the gaming hall goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is ended, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Thus, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be set to the regular value.

(Restriction on ball lending based on detection of open state of game machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a ball lending restriction method when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-4. FIG. 10-4 is a main board 11, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between a payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) and a card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 10-4, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Do not turn on the PRDY signal. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when it is electrically connected to 100), the CPU 103 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off while the gaming machine frame 3 is open.

  As a result, while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, Since the EXS signal is OFF and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending (game medium payout) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this manner, the PRDY signal is turned on while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is supposed not to. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game medium payout control by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from being executed.

  Then, a clerk or the like in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The provided gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in a state in which neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. With the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a both closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to send a BRDY signal based on that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be operated unless it is opened, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, it is normal for the gaming machine frame 3 to be open during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Here, since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode are accompanied by power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, the state of the gaming machine If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. May not be. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side to know the control status of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, a command and determination processing therefor are required, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it will become.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected while the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period. As a result, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode or whether it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period checked in the setting confirmation mode are restricted without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side. It With such a configuration, appropriate payout control is realized for the ball lending process and the prize ball process.

  As described above, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 while the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected. During the period, by limiting the payout control, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of troubles due to the payout control, such as not being able to pay out an appropriate number of game media corresponding to the payout request, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the maintenance work of the gaming machine when is opened.

(Resuming ball lending after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball lending is being executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of being set will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-5. In the example shown in FIG. 10-5, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the gaming medium is being paid out. The payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is restarted on the basis that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in the open state (becomes in the closed state).

  FIG. 10-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the computer microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the game medium payout, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. However, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch based on a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the payout number specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  While the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, during the period in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, any of the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal is detected. Is also in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Then, based on the fact that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the PRDY signal is in the ON state), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid amount becomes zero. As a result, the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

  Therefore, of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power cutoff (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout With respect to the unpaid number that has not been paid, the payout is executed, so that the disadvantage of the player can be avoided.

(Ball lending process when power is cut off (without changing to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-6, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, To explain. In the example shown in FIG. 10-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on that the power is cut off while the payout of the game medium is being executed, and after the power is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Instead, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the suspended payout is restarted.

  FIG. 10-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade sets the game machine frame 3 to the open state and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10-1 is executed without being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is off. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state ( While the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state without turning it on, the ball lending process is not executed. In this way, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  In addition, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then opens the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since it is in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state based on the fact that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. .

  When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number of The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the supply of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a thereafter, is completed. As described above, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, it is possible that the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is subsequently restored. As a condition, it is possible to resume the suspended payment of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

(Ball lending process when power is cut off (moves to setting change mode))
FIG. 10-7 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is a game control micro. It is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the clerk at the game arcade operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to clear the RAM 102 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 and initialize the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Both the RAM clearing and the RAM clearing are executed.

  Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption while the ball lending is being executed and the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, FIG. Will be specifically described. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the power is cut off while executing the payout of the game medium, the payout under execution is stopped and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended without restarting the payout. do not do.

  FIG. 10-7 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and suspends the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade sets the game machine frame 3 to the open state and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid amount data stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state without turning it on, the ball lending process is not executed. In this way, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then confirms that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be in an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Therefore, the PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing). The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 does not detect any open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, and the PRDY signal is turned on. And

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is performed. In the microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (because there are remaining game media to be paid), Based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. One by one until the data of the unpaid coin number becomes 0 performs a payout operation. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, it is set based on the fact that the data of the unpaid amount is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended payout of the game medium is restarted to complete the ball lending. Is possible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). In this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid quantity stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining payouts to be paid out). Therefore, even when the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM21TM302 accordingly. The unpaid quantity data stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the data of the unpaid number is initialized. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before (that is, the number of payouts specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout has not been paid out. No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the unpaid number stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is accompanied with this. Is initialized, it is possible to simplify management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to power failure during the ball lending process, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to clear the data of the unpaid amount, so that the interrupted payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid amount is not paid out.

(Modified example of ball lending process (transition to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
FIG. 10-8 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the above-mentioned clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with independent clear switches.

  When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  When the game clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on. The 21TM052a is turned off. On the contrary, when the game control microcomputer 100 is not initialized but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off when the power is turned on, and the game is cleared. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. Then, when the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on. And

  Next, regarding the processing in the case where the withdrawal is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure while the ball lending is being executed and the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, FIG. 10-8 (2) Will be specifically described. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the power supply is cut off while executing the payout of the game medium, the payout in progress is stopped, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without restarting the payout. .

  FIG. 10-8 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and suspends the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade sets the game machine frame 3 to the open state and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. Also, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state instead of the ON state, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in the present example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of power-on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state without turning it on, the ball lending process is not executed. In this way, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then confirms that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be in an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Therefore, the PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), When RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on)). However, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid quantity stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Because (there are remaining game media to be paid out), the PRDY signal is turned on, and based on the contents of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation one by one until the data of the unpaid amount becomes 0. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, it is set based on the fact that the data of the unpaid amount is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended payout of the game medium is restarted to complete the ball lending. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is backed up in the RAM 21TM302. When the PRDY signal is turned on because the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid) Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed because the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid quantity data stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area of the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) However, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not initialized and is executed before the power is cut off (before the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Regarding the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid amounts not paid out , The payout will be executed.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the unpaid amount stored in the RAM21TM302 is not initialized, so the ball lending is performed. It is possible to appropriately protect the data of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to power failure during the ball lending process, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not cleared and is maintained. Therefore, the suspended payout is restarted, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, a period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout of the unpaid number is executed.

  In this embodiment, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game controlling microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Limitation on prize ball payout based on detection of open state of frame for game machine or glass door frame)
Next, a method of limiting the prize ball payout when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10-9 is a game control microcomputer when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the computer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. As shown in FIG. 10-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  At this time, when a clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is opened), the prize balls to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls flow down is not physically connected to the upper plate that stores the flowing down prize balls, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It will fall without doing.

  In the example of FIG. 10-9, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game control is performed. The microcomputer 100 has detected the passage of the game medium relating to any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the special winning opening. Based on the above, a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is issued to the game control microcomputer 100. To send. This award ball preparing command is until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

  As described above, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is at each winning opening. Even when the winning prize is detected after passing through, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 and does not execute the prize ball payout control. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game medium payout control by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from being executed. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, a clerk or the like in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The provided gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in a state in which neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. With the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a both closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, and the gaming machine frame 3 or glass. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number designated by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has paid out a predetermined number of game media, transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

(Resumption of prize ball payout after completion of open state detection)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the prize balls are being paid out, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The processing in the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the gaming medium is being paid out. The payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is restarted on the basis that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in the open state (becomes in the closed state).

  As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal is received and the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted), a game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened and the gaming machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided while paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is used for the game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100. This award ball preparing command is until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

  As described above, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even while the game medium is being paid out. Does not execute payout of game media. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to operate based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the stored contents of the unpaid quantity storage buffer, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid quantity is zero. As a result, the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

(Prize ball processing at the time of power failure (without changing to setting change mode))
Next, FIG. 10-11 is used for the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption while the payout of the prize balls is being performed and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. It will be specifically described. In the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 11, the game medium payout is interrupted based on that the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on. Instead, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the suspended payout is restarted.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal is received and the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted), a game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, when the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade sets the game machine frame 3 to the open state and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10-1 is executed without being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is a process at the time of turning on the power (after the power is turned on, the serial number shown in FIG. During the communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480), since the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the game medium payout is maintained in a suspended state.

  As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (from power-on to the serial communication circuit setting process (step Until the execution of S21TM1480)), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. To do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  In addition, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then opens the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since it is in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The game medium is not paid out.

  When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are detected. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the supply of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a thereafter, is completed. As described above, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On that condition, it is possible to restart the suspended game medium payout and complete the prize ball payout.

(Prize ball processing when power is cut off (moves to setting change mode))
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the payout of the prize balls is being performed, and the process is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. It will be specifically described by using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-12, when the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the current payout is stopped, and when the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the payout is not restarted based on the execution of the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal is received and the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted), a game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, when the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade sets the game machine frame 3 to the open state and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is a power-on process (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. Until the execution of)), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is suspended is maintained even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared. It will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid amount data stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Therefore, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be open. In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It becomes a state.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing). And the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect any open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, and drives the payout motor 21TM289. Let

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is performed. In the microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (because there are remaining game media to be paid), Based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the unpaid number data becomes 0 one by one. Carry out the work. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, based on the fact that the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, , If the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, the suspended payment of the game medium is restarted and the prize balls are paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid amount stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area of the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game media to be paid out are Since it does not exist), the dispensing motor 21TM289 is not driven and the dispensing operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM21TM302 accordingly. The unpaid quantity data stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the data of the unpaid number is initialized. Therefore, before the power is cut off (the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14) to be paid out in the award ball processing executed before), the payout has not been paid out. No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure during the execution of the prize ball process, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to clear the data of the unpaid amount, so that the interrupted payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid amount is not paid out.

(Modification regarding prize ball processing (switch to setting change mode) when power is interrupted)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the payout of the prize balls is being executed and the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, FIG. It will be specifically described by using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-13, when the power is cut off during execution of the payout of the game medium, the payout under execution is stopped, and when the power is restored and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without restarting the payout.

  As shown in FIG. 10-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal is received and the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted), a game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, when the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk of the game arcade sets the game machine frame 3 to the open state and then turns on the power switch 21TM055. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (to further initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. Also, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is a power-on process (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. Until the execution of)), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is suspended is maintained even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared. It will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in the present example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of power-on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game arcade usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then confirms that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be in an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on this, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

  When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state and the game machine frame / door frame is opened. The sensor 21TM300 starts driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is not detected.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), When RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on)). However, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid quantity stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Therefore (because there are remaining game media to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, based on the fact that the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, , If the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, the suspended payment of the game medium is restarted and the prize balls are paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is backed up in the RAM 21TM302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout is performed. No action is taken.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed because the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid quantity data stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area of the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) However, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not initialized and is executed before the power is cut off (before the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the award ball processing (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid amounts that have not been paid out , The payout will be executed.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure during the execution of the prize ball process, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not cleared and is maintained. Therefore, the suspended payout is restarted, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, a period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout of the unpaid number is executed.

  In this embodiment, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game controlling microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, even if the winning is detected, the command for the number of prize balls is not transmitted. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command is not received, so that the payout of the prize balls is not executed.

(Output period of security signal and signal corresponding to setting change)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. By this security signal, as described above, the possibility that initialization processing (RAM clear), fraudulent activity detection, game stop target error detection, and the like have been performed can be notified to the outside. In addition, the security signal, until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started and the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. From step S21TM3510 shown in 10-2, until it is determined as NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed), it is turned on.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the end of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the shift to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. From step S21TM3510 shown in 10-2, until it is determined as NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed), it is turned on. With this setting change corresponding signal, it is possible to notify the outside that the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been executed (the process related to the change or confirmation of the set value has been executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when shifting to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is turned off once, and then from the same seventh terminal to the RAM 102. Since the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals stored in the set value storage area corresponds to the current set value, the set value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1), when the mode is changed to the setting change mode accompanied by the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) when the power is turned on, A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed, the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode ends and the process moves to the normal game process. Also, with the completion of the setting change mode (to be exact, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed after the setting change mode has ended and the process has shifted to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, Based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, two pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) was executed when the power was turned on, but the setting change mode was not entered. In this case, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  In this way, the security signal remains in the ON state even during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. It is thus possible to recognize that the control may have been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is in the ON state when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. (To be precise, at the timing when 50 ms elapses after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process is shifted to the normal game process), the OFF state is set. Regarding the security signal as well, it is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed as shown in FIG. 10-15 (3). The OFF state does not immediately occur after the setting change mode ends, and the ON state continues for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting confirmation mode ends). Then, at the timing when 50 ms has passed after the shift to the normal game processing, the state becomes OFF.

  In addition, in either of the cases of (3) and (4) of FIG. 10-15, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (to be exact, the setting change is made. The setting value is stored in the RAM 102 after the mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game process is started, and then the state becomes OFF when 50 ms has elapsed), and thereafter (for example, after 50 ms or more has elapsed). Based on the fact that the set value stored in the area is 2, two pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal. This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode, the security signal is the power-on time (RAM It will be in the ON state for 30 seconds after the execution of clear.

  Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, but the setting change mode is not entered. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that On the other hand, if the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been entered (particularly, it is highly possible that the setting change mode accompanied by RAM clear is entered. If the security signal input period does not reach 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not have been executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. It is possible to recognize that (only the confirmation may have been performed without changing the setting value).

  In other words, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) was executed, but it is possible that the mode did not shift to the setting change mode. If it is recognizable by the management device and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). If the management device can recognize that (only the confirmation may have been performed without changing the setting value), and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, , The setting may have changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. (Especially, it is likely that the transition to the setting change mode with RAM clear) and is recognizable in the management device. In this way, it is possible to distinguish what control the game machine has executed on the external side by the output period of the security signal of the game machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled can be recognized separately.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, so the RAM clear is always executed (step S21TM3050). Or step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is about 30 seconds during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state and the RAM clear flag is 0 when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM3570). RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

  In this way, since the output period of the security signal is different between when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, each gaming machine can change the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting change mode Or, at the timing of 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process starts, the state becomes OFF. Therefore, on the external device side, the control period for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. If the input period of the security signal is longer than the input period of the setting change corresponding signal by about 30 seconds, it is recognized that the setting change mode is controlled and the RAM clear accompanying it is executed. It is possible, and when the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it is possible to recognize that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without the RAM clear.

  In this way, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from different output terminals, so that the external device to which these signals are input has a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) in the game machine. It is possible to distinguish between the occurrence of and the fact that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled can be specified based on the input period of the security signal.

  Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the setting was confirmed without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). The setting confirmation mode ends because the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the mode is switched to and the setting confirmation mode is started (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510). Then, it is assumed that the normal game processing is started.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (5), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. And, even if it is less than 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is started and the setting confirmation mode is finished (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state) to shift to the normal game processing, at least a period of 50 ms or more, The setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on, the on state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  If the period in which the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are in the ON state is less than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation on the external device side such as the hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize that the mode has been entered. As in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. On the external device side, each pachinko gaming machine 1 can recognize that it has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Regarding the setting change correspondence signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the setting change correspondence signal is output in a special mode with a pulse width of 100 ms, so that each pachinko machine can operate on the external device side such as a hall computer. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period under control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal switches to the ON state and then switches to the OFF state in less than 50 ms. When the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area and having a width of 100 ms is output, the period in which the external device is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms) It is not possible to recognize the setting change corresponding signal corresponding to, and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width of 100 ms) that is output thereafter, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is incorrect. May be recognized as As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), so that the external device side Then, it becomes possible to accurately specify the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1.

  10-16 is a diagram showing another example of the effect device included in the effect control board 12. FIG. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, in addition to the game effect lamp 9, on the lamp control board 14, the first off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the second off-screen hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 and the setting change state indicator 21TM104 are connected, and these are each constituted by a light emitting device such as an LED. Further, all of these light emitting devices are provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14. In this example, it is assumed that all of these light emitting devices emit light in a common emission color.

  The off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101 is configured by two light emitting devices. CPU120 for production control, when there is a change in the first reserved memory number, that is, when a winning in the first start winning port has occurred (when the first reserved memory number has increased), and the first special symbol. When the variable display is finished and the display result is confirmed (when the first reserved memory number decreases), the first reserved memory number for designating the updated first reserved memory number from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designated command is received, the off-screen first reserved display 21TM101 is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number command.

  For example, when the first number of reserved storages designated by the first designated number of reserved storages is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. If the first number of reserved storages designated by the first number of reserved storages command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the first number of reserved storages designated by the first reserved storage number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is in a blinking state and the other light emitting device is in a lighting state. Then, when the first number of reserved storages designated by the first designated number of reserved storages is 4, both light emitting devices are made to blink.

  The off-screen second hold display 21TM102 is configured by two light emitting devices. CPU120 for production control, when there is a change in the second reserved memory number, that is, when a winning to the second starting winning opening occurs (when the second reserved memory number increases), and the second special symbol. When the variable display of is finished and the display result is confirmed (when the second reserved memory number decreases), the second reserved memory number for designating the updated second reserved memory number from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designated command is received, the off-screen second reserved display 21TM102 is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the second reserved memory number designated by the second reserved memory number designation command.

  For example, when the second number of reserved storages designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. If the second number of reserved storages designated by the second designated number of reserved storages is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. If the second number of reserved storages designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is in a blinking state and the other light emitting device is in a lighting state. Then, when the second number of reserved storages designated by the second designated number of reserved storages is 4, both light emitting devices are made to blink.

  The fourth symbol display 21TM103 is composed of two light emitting devices. Here, one light emitting device is a variable display device of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (that is, (Variable display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, it is turned off or turned on (that is, the variable display is finished), and the display result is derived. The other light emitting device is a variable display device of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (that is, variation). (Display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the light is turned off or turned on (that is, the variable display ends), and the display result is derived.

  CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the first reserve storage number subtraction designation command that designates that the first reserve storage number has been subtracted, and the display result designation that designates the display result. A command and a variation pattern command that designates a variation time of the special symbol, based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100, that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, And, the variable time of the first special symbol can be specified. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the microcomputer 100 for game control, the first special symbol. It is possible to specify that the variable display of has been completed and the display result has been derived.

  Here, the production control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and blinks one light emitting device in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 (that is, the variable display). When the fluctuation time designated by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or turned on in response to receipt of the symbol fixing designation command (that is, the display result is fixed). ). For example, when the display result of "out of focus" is specified by the display result specification command, one light emitting device is turned off in the symbol fixing period, and the display result of "big hit" is specified by the display result specification command. In this case, one light emitting device is turned on in the symbol fixing period.

  The effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command that designates that the second reserved storage number has been subtracted, and the display result designation that designates the display result. A command and a variation pattern command that specifies the variation time of the special symbol, based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100, that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, And, it is possible to specify the variation time of the second special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the second special symbol. It is possible to specify that the variable display of has been completed and the display result has been derived.

  Here, the production control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands associated with the start of variable display of the second special symbol, and blinks the other light emitting device in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 (that is, variable display). When the variation time designated by the variation pattern command has elapsed, the other light emitting device is turned off or turned on in response to the receipt of the symbol determination designation command (that is, the display result is determined). ). For example, when the display result of "off" was specified by the display result specification command, the other light emitting device was turned off in the symbol fixing period, and the display result of "big hit" was specified by the display result specification command. In this case, the other light emitting device is turned on in the symbol fixing period.

  The emission color of the off-screen first hold display 21TM101 may be different from the emission color of the off-screen second hold display 21TM102. For example, the former may emit blue light and the latter may emit red light. It may be allowed to. Further, in the fourth symbol display device 21TM103, the light emitting color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A and the light emitting color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B are made different. For example, the former is made to emit light in blue (the same emission color as the first off-screen display 21TM101 outside the screen) and the latter is made to emit light in red (the same emission color as the second off-screen display 21TM102 outside the screen). You may do it.

  Also, an image showing the first number of reserved memories (for example, an image of blue numbers “0 to 4”) and an image showing the second number of reserved memories (for example, an image of red numbers “0 to 4”) It may be displayed on the display device 5. Further, in the case of an image of a fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (for example, a quadrangle image, blinking in white during a period in which the first special symbol is variably displayed (fluctuation), and the display result is out of alignment. Is stopped and displayed in blue in the symbol fixing period, and is displayed in red in the symbol fixing period when the display result is a big hit), and an image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, a quadrangle) It is an image of, and blinks (fluctuations) in yellow during the period in which the second special symbol is variably displayed, and if the display result is off, it is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result is a big hit. In this case, an image that is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol fixing period) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  The setting change status indicator 21TM104 is composed of one light emitting device. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change state at the timing of receiving the setting change mode command (see step S21TM3585 of FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode. The device 21TM104 is turned on. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 of FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting change mode is completed, the setting change state indicator 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 changes the setting at the timing of receiving the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The status indicator 21TM104 is made to blink. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 of FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change status display 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change mode indicator 21TM104 (lighting state) and the setting confirmation mode (blinking state). Has become. Here, as compared with the period from when the power is turned on until the image display control in the image display device 5 becomes possible by the display control unit 123, the lamp control board 14 emits light from each light emitting device after the power is turned on. The period until control becomes possible is extremely short. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-17, in the image display device 5, it is not possible to notify that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the image by the display control unit 123. Even before the display control becomes possible), it is possible to notify that the setting change mode is controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by the light emission mode of the setting change status indicator 21TM104. It will be possible.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, not only the setting change state display 21TM104, but also the out-of-screen first hold display 21TM101, the out-of-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are played. It may be possible to notify that the setting change mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode is controlled by emitting a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern during the operation. For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode by turning on all the LEDs that constitute the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103. Being informed, and controlling the setting confirmation mode by setting all the LEDs that make up the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 to a blinking state May be notified.

  On the other hand, on the main board 11 side, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 has the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the first special symbol. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the game is being performed (for example, all are turned on at the same time). ), It is possible to inform that the setting change mode is controlled. Further, during the period of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 has the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second. The special symbol display device 4B and the normal symbol display device 20 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern different from a normal light emission pattern when a game is being played (and a light emission pattern which is also different when being controlled in the setting change mode). It is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled by (for example, making all of them blink simultaneously).

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 30TM]
Next, the characteristic unit 30TM will be described. FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating specific examples of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display area 30TM101 for displaying the first hold storage number (0-4 first hold display 30TM001) and a second hold storage number (0-4 second hold). The second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and the active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently executed variable display are provided. The first hold display area 30TM101, the second hold display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the bottom of the screen, and the left side of the player is the first hold display area 30TM101 with the active display area 30TM103 at the center. The right side is the second reserved display area 30TM102.

  When the first reserved storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first reserved display 30TM001 in a number corresponding to the first reserved storage number in the first reserved display area 30TM101. That is, the first hold display 30TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning hole) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, is controlled to the big hit game state) Not, and, the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display region 30TM101, the first hold display 30TM001 is dealt with in the order close to the active display region 30TM103 (from the right as seen by the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

  Moreover, when the second number of reserved storages is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a second number of reserved displays 30TM002 in the second reserved display area 30TM102 in a number corresponding to the number of second reserved memories. That is, the second hold display 30TM002, the start condition (for example, the winning to the second start winning hole) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit game state). It is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) that is not satisfied and the second reserved storage number is not 0). When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display region 30TM102, the second hold display 30TM002 is handled in the order close to the active display region 30TM103 (from the left as seen by the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003, after the start condition (for example, the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is satisfied, the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the big hit game. It is information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) that the state is not controlled, and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

  In addition, in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (on the left side when viewed from the player), a region different from the first reserved display region 30TM101, the first reserved memory number (0-4 sub reserved display 30TM004) is displayed. A sub-hold display area 30TM104 to be displayed and a sub-active display area 30TM105 which is a different area from the active display area 30TM103 and which displays a sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is to be displayed on the sub-holding display area 30TM104 based on the determination that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is displayed at the time of the start winning (when the winning at the first starting winning opening occurs). The number of sub-holding displays 30TM004 corresponding to one holding storage number is displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, the sub-holding display 30TM004, the start condition (for example, the winning to the first start winning hole) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit game state). It is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is not satisfied, and the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). In addition, the sub-active display 30TM005, after the start condition (for example, the winning to the first start winning opening) is satisfied, the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit game state). It is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-holding displays 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-holding display region 30TM104, a variation corresponding to the sub-holding display 30TM004 in an order close to the sub-active display region 30TM105 (from the right as seen by the player). The display start condition is satisfied.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11A, the sub-holding display 30TM004 has a star-shaped contour, and has a contour different from that of the first holding display 30TM001 (round display or triangular display). The sub-holding display 30TM004 is small in size compared to the first holding display 30TM001, and thus is less noticeable, and is less visible to the player. The sub active display 30TM005 also has a star-shaped outline, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (round display or triangular display). The sub-active display 30TM005 has a smaller display size than the active display 30TM003, and thus is less conspicuous and less visible to the player.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 11A, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative pattern being executed on the image display device 5, and the sub-active is also displayed. A sub active display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. Thus, as information corresponding to one variable display (common variable display) that is being executed, active display 30TM003 and sub active display 30TM005 in different modes are displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 and the sub active display 30TM005 corresponding to the common variable display are simultaneously displayed on the screen.

  Corresponding to the first number of reserved memories being 4, four first reserved displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101, and four sub reserved displays are displayed in the sub reserved display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. As described above, as the information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not been executed yet, the different information such as the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed. That is, the 1st hold display 30TM001 and the 1st hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) corresponding to the 1st 1st hold display 30TM001 and the common variable display (hold memory) are simultaneously displayed. It is displayed on the screen.

  In this way, a plurality of types of hold displays (first hold display 30TM001, sub-hold display 30TM004) corresponding to the common variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen, It is possible to diversify the effect using the hold display and improve the interest. Similarly, a plurality of types of active displays (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of decorative symbol) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the effect using the active display and improve the interest.

  Here, as will be described later, when it is determined that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed in the determination at the time of starting winning, the first holding display 30TM001 is displayed in the first holding display area 30TM101, The sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104. Further, while the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the sub active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105, and further, the sub active display 30TM005 is an area to be displayed. The information (the rectangular frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 11A) will not be displayed either.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the first change effect and / or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize. The first change effect is a special mode different from the normal mode (white circle display in this example) of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning the start prize. (In this example, white triangle display), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), green mode (green circle display in this example), red mode (red circle display in this example) Display) or in a golden mode (in this example, a golden circle display). In addition, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, white star display) of the sub-holding display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning the start prize. The notice effect is displayed in a blue mode (blue star display in this example) or a red mode (red star display in this example).

  FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG.

  In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets a set of commands at the time of starting winning (a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a It is confirmed whether or not a new 1-hold storage count addition command) has been newly received (step S30TM1010).

  The symbol designating command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is included in the winning determination results, and the determination result of the type of big hit. CPU103, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, determines whether or not it is a jackpot, and determines the jackpot type when it is a jackpot, and designates the determination result Output the specified command. The variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not normal reach, super reach or the like is determined based on the variation pattern type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command designating the determination result. To do. Moreover, the 1st reservation storage number addition designation | designated command is a production | generation control command which designates that the 1st reservation storage number increased by one.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one set of a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designating command) is newly stored in the start prize winning command storage area. To do. If one set of commands at the time of starting winning is not newly received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process ends.

  If a new set of commands for starting winning is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set based on at least the determination that the first change effect is executed. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends.

  If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first change effect is executed and the final display mode, and whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode, which will be described later. The determination is made based on the display mode determination table (see FIG. 11-3) (step S30TM1030).

  By executing the processing of step S30TM1010 and step S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processing of step S30TM1030 and subsequent steps is executed only when the first change effect is not executed, and the first change effect is generated. Alternatively, the second change effect can be executed.

  FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is “normal mode”, “special mode”, “blue mode”, “green mode”, “red mode”. , ”Or“ golden mode ”can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005, “no display”, “normal mode”, “blue mode”, and “red mode”. Any of the above can be determined, and the determination value is assigned to each of these aspects. Of these, “no display” indicates that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), the starting winning is concerned. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first reserved memory) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 31% and the special mode (white at a rate of 4%). Triangle display), 18% for blue mode (blue circle display), 21% for green mode (green circle display), 16% for red mode (red circle display) ), And a golden mode (golden circle display) is obtained at a rate of 10%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of the start winning is different from the normal mode (white round display) is 69 It will be executed at the rate of%.

  On the other hand, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is "big hit"), it is based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, a green mode at a rate of 20%, A ratio of 25% results in a red mode, and a ratio of 35% results in a golden mode. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of the start winning is different from the normal mode is executed at a rate of 98%. It will be.

  In this way, when the first change effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the first change effect is not executed. Further, when the first change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the gold mode, the jackpot rate is the highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), with respect to the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold mode. ..

  Further, as shown in a change pattern of a first change effect described later, at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003, the display mode is a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode different from the normal mode. May be Then, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display mode having a higher degree of expectation than that. It has been changed to. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the expectation degree of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the ratio in which the special mode is selected as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the ratio in which the other modes are selected. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, which will be described later, the ratio in which the special pattern is included in the change pattern of the hold display is not so low as compared with the ratio in which the other modes are included. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode, the rate of change in the display mode is higher than when it is displayed in other modes. When the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode, the player cannot expect a big hit compared to when it is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode, but the display mode has a higher expectation. It can be expected to change to a display mode (blue mode, red mode).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), The sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning (new first holding storage) are not displayed at a rate of 70% but are displayed at a rate of 30%. The sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 4%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). Is 1%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning a start is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of a winning start. The second change effect that makes the mode of the displayed information (hold display or active display) different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 5%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “big hit”), The sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first holding storage) are not displayed at a rate of 40% but are displayed at a rate of 60%. The sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 10%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). Is 25%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning the start is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of the winning start. The second change effect that makes the mode of the displayed information (hold display or active display) different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 50%.

  As described above, when the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, the percentage of the big hit is higher than when the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the second change effect is not executed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 is the red mode, the jackpot rate is the highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), with respect to the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005, the expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Further, as shown in a change pattern of a second change effect described later, when the display mode is a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the sub-holding display 30TM004 before the sub-active display 30TM005. There is. Then, when the sub-holding display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display with a higher degree of expectation than that. It is designed to change according to the mode. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004, the expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is set to a mode different from the normal mode), and the second mode It may be decided to execute the change effect (display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 and set the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 to a mode different from the normal mode).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect, and may decide not to display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (2-2) it is determined to execute the first change effect, and the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is normally set. There is a case where it is determined to be a mode).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 decides (3) not to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the normal mode), and executes the second change effect (sub-hold display 30TM004 and The sub active display 30TM005 may be displayed and the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 may be different from the normal mode.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide not to execute the (4-1) first change effect, and may decide not to display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (4-2) it is decided not to execute the first change effect, and the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 is usually There is a case where it is determined to be a mode).

  In the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute neither the first change effect nor the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, (4-1) and (4) above. In the case of any of 4-2), the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed in the normal mode. The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) does not change from the normal mode to another mode, and even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold memory is started, The active display 30TM003 corresponding to does not change from the normal mode to another mode (change patterns 101, 201 when the final display mode is the “normal mode” shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, 301, 401).

  In addition, in the case of corresponding to the above (4-2), although the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first holding memory) is displayed, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending storage is started, the corresponding sub active display 30TM005 does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, (1), (2-1), and (2) above. In the case where either of -2) or (3) is applicable, the change pattern of the change effect is determined as shown below.

  When it is determined to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, when the above (1) is satisfied, in step S30TM1060, the updated first The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the number of reserved memories (the first number of reserved memories after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the determined final display mode of the active display 30TM003 ( 11-4 and 11-5) together with the updated first pending storage number (first pending storage number after receiving the first pending storage number addition designation command) and the determined sub-active display 30TM005. The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode (see FIG. 11-6).

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect and not to execute the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, in (2-1) and (2-2) above. In any case, in step S30TM1120, the updated first pending storage number (the first pending storage number after receiving the first pending storage number addition designation command) and the final of the determined active display 30TM003. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5). In addition, in the case of corresponding to the above (2-2), although the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending storage is started, the corresponding sub active display 30TM005 does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  When the CPU 120 for effect control determines not to execute the first change effect but to execute the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, in the case of the above (3), the step is performed. In S30TM1210, based on the updated first pending storage number (first pending storage number after receiving the first pending storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined sub-active display 30TM005, the second The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 11-6).

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of the above (1), (2-1) and (2-2), and (3). In the case (corresponding to or), the prefetch counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). When neither the first change effect nor the second change effect notice effect is executed, the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first holding memory) is displayed (in the case of (4-2) above). If applicable), also set the look-ahead counter.

  A value corresponding to the first reserved memory number updated based on the start winning is set (the value designated by the first reserved memory number designation command) is set in the prefetch counter, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Every time (each time the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received), the value of the prefetch counter is decremented by one. That is, the value of the prefetch counter is decremented each time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage that is the determination target at the time of winning the start prize is shifted. Then, when the value of the look-ahead counter becomes 0, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and / or the second change effect (or the second hold effect is not executed but the sub-holding display 30TM004 is displayed. (Variable display) will be executed.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, it sets the change prohibition flag (steps S30TM1080 and S30TM1140). While the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new starting prize is generated, it is determined to be YES in step S30TM1020 described above, so that the new starting prize (new first reserved memory) is dealt with. Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new starting winning (new first holding memory) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display that is the target of the first change effect ends.

  11-4 and 11-5 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the first change effect. When the number of first reserved memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) by the start winning, (i) the n-th first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. (Ii) The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning shifts to a position (active display area 30TM103 side) having a higher variation rank in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (when n ≧ 2) and (iii) Timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed ), Display information (holding display or Active display) might be displayed in a different manner from the normal manner.

  In FIG. 11-4 and FIG. 11-5, what is the display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display at each timing (i) to (iii) for each change pattern? It shows whether or not it becomes a display mode. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, “normal” indicates a normal mode in which a white circle is displayed, and “special” indicates a special mode in which a white triangle is displayed. “Blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue round display, and “red” indicates a red mode that is a red round display.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 11-4 (A). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is the off or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  In the description of FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the active shift means that the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, at the time of starting winning). The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target is displayed).

  Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first reserved display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the special mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ) Means that the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in a special mode after the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 105 is In the change pattern, the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the active shift timing (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ) Means that the active display 30TM003 changes from the special mode to the blue mode finally after the active shift. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 remains in the blue state after the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105.

  Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the green mode. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ) Means that the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the green mode after the active shift. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue mode to the green mode finally after the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first reservation display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 107 is The change pattern is such that after the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ) Means that the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue mode to the red mode finally after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405). ˜412), the active display 30TM003 remains in the red state after the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107.

  Here, when the gold color mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the gold mode. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the gold mode. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue mode to the gold mode finally after the active shift. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405). (In the case of ~ 412), the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the red mode to the gold mode after the active shift.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-4 (B). Select a table.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the change pattern 201 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 201 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift It is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203 and the change pattern 204. The change pattern 202 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift The change pattern 203 is a change pattern for changing the first reserved display of the notice target to the special mode at a timing, and the change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize. The change pattern 204 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display in the special mode, the first hold display of the notice target changes in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Without a change pattern remains unchanged at special embodiment the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208. The change pattern 205 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 206 is a change pattern for changing the first reserved display of the notice target to the blue mode, and the change pattern 206 shows the first reserved display of the notice target in the special mode at the time of winning the start and then the notice at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 207 is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the first reserved display of the target in the special mode. After displaying the 1 hold display in a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the Is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the time of the seven shift. This is a change pattern in which the first reservation display of the notice target is not changed in the blue state at the shift timing, and the first reservation display of the notice target is not changed in the blue state even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit), Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing. The change pattern 209 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 210 is a change pattern for changing the first reserved display of the notice target to the red mode. The change pattern 210 displays the first reserved display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of winning the start and then announces at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 211 is a change pattern for changing the first reserved display of the target in the blue mode without changing the first reserved display of the target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the 1st hold display in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the Change pattern 212 is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the time of the seven shift. This is a change pattern in which the first reservation display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the shift timing, and the first reservation display of the notice target is not changed in the red state even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-5 (C). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 301 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 301 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first reservation display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit). A determination value is assigned to each 302. The change pattern 302 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The change pattern is such that the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305. The change pattern 303 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The change pattern 304 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue state at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the hold display is changed to the blue mode and the first hold display of the notice target does not change to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. In the pattern 305, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is held. This is a change pattern in which the first reservation display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode even at the shift timing, and the first reservation display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310. The change pattern 306 is that the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern that changes the first reserved display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of, and changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display of No. 1 is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first notice display of the notice target is also made at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the blue mode and changes the first reservation display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, The conversion pattern 308 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. The change pattern 309 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a red state at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red state at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first notice display of the notice target in a blue mode, the first notice display of the notice target is changed to a red state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first notice display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. The change pattern that does not change the 1 hold display in the red mode and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode even at the time of active shift. The change pattern 310 does not change the first reservation display of the notification target in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift after the first reservation display of the notification target is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning the start prize. This is a change pattern in which the notice-targeted first hold display does not change in the red mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the notice-target first hold display does not change in the red mode even at the active shift timing.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for four reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-5 (D). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 401 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 401 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. At the timing of the hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode. At the timing of the third hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode, and even at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first reservation display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the off or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each 402. The change pattern 402 is such that the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice target does not change in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target does not change in the special mode even at the timing of the third hold shift, and the notice of the active shift timing also occurs. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of No. is not changed in the special mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404. The change pattern 403 is to display the first reserved display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then change the first reserved display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift to change the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift. The 1st hold display is a change pattern that does not change in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 shows the 1st hold display of the notification target in the blue mode at the time of winning the start, and then the 1st hold display of the notification target at the timing of the first hold shift. The 1 hold display is not changed in the blue mode, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift. Without change from the first hold display blue aspects notice object in the timing of the hold shift, a change pattern remains unchanged blue embodiments the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change patterns 405 to 412. The change pattern 405 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 406 is a change pattern for changing the 1-hold display to a red mode, and the change pattern 406 displays the 1st hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the 1st notice target at the timing of the first hold shift The hold display is changed to a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the timing of the third hold shift is changed. The change pattern 407 is a change pattern that does not change the first reserved display of the notice target in the blue mode and changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display of the target in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold of the notice target is held at the timing of the second hold shift. The display is changed to a blue mode, the first reservation display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 408 is the first, second, and third hold after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize. The change pattern 409 is a change pattern that does not change the first reserved display of the notice target in the blue mode even at the timing of the shift, and changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. Sometimes the first notice display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode, and the first notice display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, and the timing of the third hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is changed to a red mode and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 410 is a change target of the notice target at the time of starting winning. After displaying the first hold display in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice subject is changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. No, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first reserved display of the notice target is kept in the red mode even at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern is a change pattern that does not change. The change pattern 411 changes the first notice display of the notice target to the red feature at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first notice display of the notice subject in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize. The change pattern 412 is a change pattern that does not change the first reservation display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 412 is the first notice target at the time of winning the start prize. After displaying the hold display in red, the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts, and the timing of the active shift Also grayed is without changing the change pattern of the red aspect the first hold display notice object.

  Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the gold mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit), Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, the change pattern 405, the change pattern 406, the change pattern 407, the change pattern 408, the change pattern 409, the change pattern 410, the change pattern 411, and the change pattern 412, respectively. ing.

  FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the second change effect. In the case where the number of first reserved memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, and it is determined to display the sub reserved display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005, (i ) The first to nth sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the first holding storage number n at that time is displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is displayed as a sub-display. The timing (timing at the time of starting winning) displayed in the active display area 30TM105, (ii) the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the starting winning is at a position with a higher variation rank in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 (the sub-active display area 30TM105). Timing (when n ≧ 2), and (iii) that A display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning at the timing (the timing at which the sub active display 30TM005 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed) at which the sub holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the moving winning is shifted to the sub active display area 30TM105. Information (hold display or active display) may be displayed in a manner different from the normal manner.

  In FIG. 11-6, the display mode of the display information (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display is changed at each timing (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIG. 11-6, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white star-shaped display, and “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue star-shaped display. "Red" indicates a red mode in which a red star is displayed.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 11-6 (A). Select a table.

  When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 601 has a probability of 100%, regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the notice of the sub-holding display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, and then the notice of the sub-holding display is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  In addition, in the description of FIG. 11-6, the active shift means that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is shifted from the sub-holding display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (as a result, the fluctuation which is the determination target at the time of the start winning). The sub active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed).

  Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub active display 30TM005 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each change pattern 603. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. In addition, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). (In the case of ~ 905), the sub active display 30TM005 remains in the blue state after the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 603, the change pattern 604, and the change pattern 605. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 605 is the start pattern. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. When the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). ~ 905), the sub active display 30TM005 changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708, change patterns 805 to 808, and change pattern 906 described later). In the case of ˜912), the sub-active display 30TM005 remains in the red state after the active shift.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6 (B). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 701 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 701 is such that after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and even in the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, depending on the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 703 and the change pattern 704. The change pattern 702 is such that the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and is changed in the active shift timing. The change pattern 703 is a change pattern for changing the noticeable sub-holding display to a blue mode. The change pattern 703 indicates the noticeable sub-holding display at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the noticeable sub-holding display in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display is changed to a blue mode and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the blue state at the time of the active shift. A change pattern 704 is a noticeable sub-holding display in the blue state at the time of winning the start prize. After that, the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in blue at the timing of the first holding shift and the timing of the active shift. A change pattern remains unchanged at like.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, depending on the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 703, the change pattern 704, and the change patterns 705 to 708. The change pattern 705 is such that the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is made at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 706 is a change pattern for changing the sub-holding display of the sub-holding display in the red mode. The change pattern 706 is to display the sub-holding display of the notice target in the blue state at the time of winning the start prize, and then the sub-hold of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 707 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift without changing the display in the blue form. After displaying, at the timing of the first hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to a red mode, and the active shift Is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the red mode, and the variation pattern 708 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the noticeable sub-holding display in the red mode at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the active shift.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6 (C). Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the change pattern 801 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start prize (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 801 is that the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the secondary hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 802 to 804. The change pattern 802 is such that after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the blue state at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 803 is the noticeable target at the time of starting winning. After displaying the sub-holding display in the normal mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the blue state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the noticeable sub-hold is made at the timing of the second hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern 804 is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue state. After displayed in blue manner, first time, for the second time hold shift, a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display notice object at the timing of the active shift remains blue aspect.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 803, the change pattern 804, and the change patterns 805 to 808, respectively. The change pattern 805 is to display the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then change the sub-holding display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and change the timing of the second hold shift. Is a change pattern that changes the sub-holding display of the notice target to a red mode and changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to a red mode at the timing of active shift. A change pattern 806 is a sub-hold display of the notice target at the time of winning a start. Is displayed in the blue mode, the sub-holding display of the notice subject is not changed in the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the second hold shift. And the change pattern 807 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target does not change in the red state at the timing of the active shift. , After displaying the sub-holding display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift, the active shift The change pattern 808 is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the red mode, and the change pattern 808 is the first and second hold shift after the noticeable sub-holding display is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning the start prize. Is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target does not change in the red state at the timing of, and the timing of the active shift.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6 (D). Select a table.

  When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 901 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 901 displays the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then displays the sub-hold display of the notice target at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts, and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of 902 to change pattern 905. The change pattern 902 is such that after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, and the third time is displayed. Is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is changed to a blue state at the timing of the hold shift, and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the blue state at the active shift timing. After the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is held at the timing of the second hold shift. The display is changed to the blue mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. The change pattern is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 904 changes the sub-holding display of the notification target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-holding display of the notification target at the time of the start winning. The change pattern 905 is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the blue state at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the active shift, and the change pattern 905 is the noticeable sub-hold display in blue at the time of winning the start prize. It is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target does not change in the blue state at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after being displayed in the form.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, which is the off or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 906 to 912. The change pattern 906 is that the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and the secondary hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to blue at the timing of, the sub-holding display of the notice is changed to red at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-holding display of the notice is changed to red at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 907 does not change as it is, and the change pattern 907 is such that the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal form at the time of winning the start. Change, the timing of the second hold shift, the timing of the third hold shift, without changing the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode The sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to a red mode, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed to the red state at the timing of the active shift. A change pattern 908 is a sub-hold display of the notice target at the time of winning the start prize. After displaying in a normal mode, the sub-holding display of the notification target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the first holding shift, and the sub-holding display of the notification target is changed to a red mode at the timing of the second holding shift. At the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift, it is a change pattern that does not change the noticeable sub-holding display in the red state, and the change pattern 909 displays the noticeable sub-holding display in the blue state at the time of winning the start prize. After that, at the timing of the first and second holding shifts, the sub-holding display of the notice target does not change in the blue mode, and 3 The change pattern 910 is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is changed to a red state at the timing of the eye hold shift, and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed to the red state at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-holding display of the notice target in the blue mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target does not change in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is made at the timing of the second hold shift. The hold display is changed to a red mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift, and the change pattern 911 is the notice target at the time of winning the start prize. After the sub-holding display of is displayed in blue, the sub-holding display of the notice target is red at the timing of the first holding shift. The change pattern 912 is a change pattern that does not change the sub-holding display of the notice target in the red state at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 912 is the notice target at the time of winning the start prize. This is a change pattern in which after displaying the sub-holding display in the red mode, the sub-holding display of the notice subject does not change in the red mode at the timings of the first, second, and third hold shifts, and the active shift timings.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3, the proportion of the first change effect in which the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode is determined by the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005. Is higher than the rate at which the second change effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11C, when the second change effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

  As described above, in the lower part of the screen, the first change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 with high visibility is executed at a high frequency, so that the player with respect to the notice effect Can keep the interest of. On the other hand, with regard to the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 which have low visibility, the percentage of the big hit is different depending on whether or not they are displayed on the upper part of the screen. It will be noted whether or not the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Furthermore, since the jackpot expectation when the second change effect is executed is higher than that of the first change effect, when the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, whether or not the display mode changes. Will also pay attention to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the bottom of the screen and a star icon (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active displayed at the top of the screen). The size and shape of display 30TM005) are different. That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions on the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is displayed in a circle, and the other icon (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in a star shape. As a result, the characteristics of each icon are clarified so that the player can easily understand the difference (different types of display information). Further, it is possible to diversify the effect by the icon corresponding to the variable display and improve the interest.

  Also, like the relationship between the red-form first hold display 30TM001 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-form sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed at the top of the screen, a common display color corresponding to the common variable display is displayed. Icons (however, the shape is different between the round and star shapes) may be displayed at the same time. As a result, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display area 30TM101 and the sub hold display area 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect are displayed. It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the target variable display.

  Also, like the relationship between the red-colored active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-colored secondary active display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen, an icon of a common display color corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. (However, the shape is different between the round shape and the star shape). This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the variable display being executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the jackpot expectation degree is different depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, in the red mode). The combination of the first hold display 30TM001 and the red hold sub-hold display 30TM004 has the highest jackpot expectation), so that the player becomes interested in both hold display modes, and the hold display is displayed. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that changes the mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11C, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the active display 30TM003 in the gold mode and the red mode). The combination of the sub-active display 30TM005 has the highest expectation of a big hit), so that the player becomes interested in both active display modes and enhances the attraction of the effect of changing the active display modes. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (when the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed). (When displayed), the display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is inherited during active shift), or the display color is changed to a higher expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the sub-holding display 30TM004 shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the second change effect is displayed. ), The display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is inherited at the time of active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the sub-hold display 30TM004 changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11C, the active display 30TM003 with high visibility is provided with more display modes than the sub active display 30TM005 with low visibility. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the change pattern when changing the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility is the same as when changing the mode of the sub hold display 30TM004 with low visibility. More change patterns are provided. In this way, the first change effect and the second change effect can be prevented while preventing the effect from becoming excessively complicated by changing the type of effectable effect and the effect pattern depending on the visibility of the active display and the hold display. I am trying to raise the interest of change production appropriately.

(Specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9. FIG. 11-7 is a time chart when both the first change effect and the second change effect are executed, and FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9 show both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 at the time of execution.

  First, in FIG. 11-8 (1), in the state where the first number of reserved memories is 3, the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is started on the image display device 5 (started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-7). (Variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first reserved display area 30TM101 displays the normal mode first reserved display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Is displayed three times. At this time, the sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed and the sub-active display 30TM005 is also not displayed. Further, the guide (square frame) showing the sub active display area 30TM105 is not displayed either.

  Then, when the variable display of the left, right, and right decorative patterns is being performed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-7), a new winning is made. It is assumed that the start winning for the ball device 6A occurs and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (the golden mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning that is the determination target. , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) and the second change effect is determined to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning as the determination target. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, based on that the first number of reserved memories is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect, and A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbol (first special symbol) currently being executed. Further, based on the first number of reserved storages being 4, four sub-holding displays 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-7 and FIG. 11-8 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the starting winning (first reserved memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 that is the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub hold display 30TM004 that is the target of the second change effect is displayed. )) To the end of the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (sub-hold display 30TM004) (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-7).

  As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the period, the first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, special mode, blue mode, or red mode). Further, based on that the change prohibition flag is set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed), so that a new start prize is given. The corresponding sub-holding display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  Not limited to such a form, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, although the secondary hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start prize can be displayed, The display mode of the sub hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first number of reserved memories is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth reserved display 30TM001 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the sub reserved display area 30TM104 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-holding display 30TM004 is a holding display corresponding to the variable display that is the subject of advance notice by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (3), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-8 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), and at the same time, The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased. The sub-holding display 30TM004 displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is shift-displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode that was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Also, in this shift display, the normal mode sub-holding display 30TM004 that was displayed as the sub-holding display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first hold display 30TM001a which is a white triangular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (5), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. The 1st hold display (the 1st hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode and the 1st hold display 30TM001a of the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display in normal mode)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is set to 1 The sub-active display area 30TM105 side It was collected displayed in the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first hold display of the notice target is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue round display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-holding display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004b, which is a blue star display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (7), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), and at the same time, the first The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b of the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode) and the blue mode displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 are displayed. Sub-holding display of 30TM004b (blue star Shown)) shifts the display one by one sub active display area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (first reserved display 30TM001c which is a red round display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-holding display of the notice target is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004c which is a red star display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (9), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed on the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-display is erased, and the sub-holding display (red-mode sub-holding display 30TM004c (red star display)) displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. The image is shifted and displayed on the image display device 5. To start the display of the change.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed). In the period from T7 to T8 of 11-7, in the active display area 30TM103, the red active display 30TM003c is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example). A change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. In addition, when changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggestion effect described below may be executed.

  When the sub active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the sub active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105 within the period shown from T7 to T8 in FIG. 11-7. Change the mode. For example, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 determined at the time of winning the start is a red mode and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in a blue mode immediately after the shift display, in the variable display of the notice target, The sub active display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-7), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect is displayed in which the letters "REACH !!" are displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, since the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the reach effect from decreasing and the interest to decrease. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice target ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 11-7).

  As described above, as the reach effect is executed in the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, which have at least a part of the display area in common with the area in which the reach effect is executed, are hidden. On the other hand, the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display that are displayed in an area different from the area where the reach effect is executed can be continuously displayed at the upper part of the screen even while the reach effect is being executed. The player can see these. As a result, the player can easily understand the number of held memories even during the execution of the reach effect, and also can understand the display modes of the sub reserved display 30TM004 and the sub active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in the case of deciding to execute only the first change effect at the time of starting winning will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-12. FIG. 11-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the production image.

  First, in FIG. 11-11 (1), in the state where the first number of reserved memories is 3, the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is started on the image display device 5 (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-10). (Variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first reserved display area 30TM101 displays the normal mode first reserved display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Is displayed three times.

  Then, when the variable display of the left, right, and right decorative patterns is being displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-10), a new prize is awarded. It is assumed that the start winning is generated in the ball device 6A and the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (the golden mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning that is the determination target. , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example). Further, in this example, it is assumed that it is decided not to display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 (therefore, the second change effect is also not executed). Further, at this time, based on that the first number of reserved memories is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control does not display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed by the determination at the time of winning the start, Further, the guide (square frame) showing the sub active display area 30TM105 is not displayed either.

  Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the starting winning (first reserved memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. In the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, from the display of the first hold display 30TM001 which is the target of the first change effect to the end of the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001. The period (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-10) is set.

  As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the period, the first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, special mode, blue mode, or red mode). Further, based on that the change prohibition flag is set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed), so that a new start prize is given. The corresponding sub-holding display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  Not limited to such a form, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, although the secondary hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start prize can be displayed, The display mode of the sub hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first number of pending storages is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth first pending display 30TM001 displayed in the first pending display area 30TM101 is the notice subject to the first change effect. It is a hold display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (3), the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-11 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), and at the same time, The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode that was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first hold display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first hold display 30TM001a which is a white triangular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (5), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. An image display device is provided by shifting and displaying the first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side. At step 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first reserved display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (7), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), and also An image display device is provided by shifting and displaying the first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b of the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side. At step 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first reservation display of the notice target is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (first reservation display 30TM001c, which is a red round display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (9), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-12 (10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-10), and at the same time, The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in red mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed on the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next change is made in the image display device 5. Start display.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed). In the period from T7 to T8 of 11-10, in the active display area 30TM103, the red active display 30TM003c is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-10), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect is displayed in which the letters "REACH !!" are displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden at the timing when the reach state is established. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice target ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 11-10).

  As described above, when it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of winning the start prize, a new start prize is given until the end of the variable display which is the target of the first change effect. Therefore, the first change effect based on the new start prize is not executed. As described above, after the display mode of the first reserved display 30TM001 is changed in the highly visible first reserved display region 30TM101 once (after being set to a mode different from the normal mode), a new start prize is generated thereafter. Even in this case, by not executing the second change effect based on the new start winning in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 having low visibility, the player is focused on the first change effect having high visibility, and The change display that is different from the change display that is the target of the first change effect is prevented from being complicated by the execution of the second change effect.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when a new start winning is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although an example of prohibiting the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is the normal mode). Is displayed in a different manner), if a new start winning occurs, the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start winning can be executed, but at that time The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be lower than that before the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

  In addition, after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), if a new start winning occurs, not only the second change effect but other notices It may be possible to limit the execution of the effect. For example, the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 every time the variable display is executed (for example, the first reserved memory number is changed from 3 to 0). It is possible not to execute the countdown effect by displaying "3", "2", "1", and "0" along with the subtraction by one. Further, the background change effect for changing the background image to the special mode may not be executed until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when a new start winning is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although an example in which execution of both the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is prohibited is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is usually When a new start winning is generated during a period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new starting prize can be executed but corresponds to the new starting prize. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new starting winning is not displayed, or the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new starting winning is displayed. As the display mode remains unchanged at the normal mode) as it may be.

(Modifications regarding the first change effect and the second change effect)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the mode is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shift-displayed in the first change effect, and the mode is changed at the timing when the sub hold display 30TM004 is shift-displayed in the second change effect. However, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed according to the execution of the first hold action effect that acts on the first hold display 30TM001, and the mode is changed to the sub hold display 30TM004. The mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 may be changed according to the execution of the sub-holding effect effect.

  11-13, 11-14, and 11-15 are specific examples of a case where the first holding effect production is executed in the first change production and the sub-holding effect production is executed in the second change production.

  First, FIG. 11-13 (1) shows a state in which the first display memory number is 3, and the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first reserved display area 30TM101 displays the normal mode first reserved display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Is displayed three times. At this time, the sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed and the sub-active display 30TM005 is also not displayed. Further, the guide (square frame) showing the sub active display area 30TM105 is not displayed either.

  Then, when the variable display of the left, right, and right decorative patterns is being performed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (the golden mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning that is the determination target. , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) and the second change effect is determined to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning as the determination target. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, based on that the first number of reserved memories is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect, and A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Further, based on the first number of reserved storages being 4, four sub-holding displays 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104.

  In this example, since the first number of reserved memories is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth reserved display 30TM001 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the sub reserved display area 30TM104 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-holding display 30TM004 is a holding display corresponding to the variable display that is the subject of advance notice by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (3), the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended on the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time displays the first hold display area 30TM101 first. The hold displays 30TM001 are shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. The sub-holding displays 30TM004 are shift-displayed one by one to the side of the sub-active display area 30TM105, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode that was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Also, in this shift display, the normal mode sub-holding display 30TM004 that was displayed as the sub-holding display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

  Here, at the time of starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, displays the first reserved display of the notice target from the normal mode to the special mode (during execution of the variable display). In this example, it is recognized that the first hold display 30TM001a), which is a white triangle display, is changed. Along with this, the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the first holding action effect and the type of the first holding action effect to be executed (type of character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the first holding action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example illustrated in FIG. 11-13 (4), the character A appears and the effect of throwing a ball toward the first reservation display 30TM001 of the notice target is executed. By displaying the image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first hold display 30TM001, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (5), the effect control CPU 120 sets the special notice of the first hold display of the notice target in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect A). The mode is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display in this example. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (6), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, displays the first reserved display area 30TM101 first. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub display displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105 is displayed. While the active display 30TM005 is erased, the sub-holding displays (the sub-holding display 30TM004 (white star display in the normal mode) displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 are displayed one by one on the side of the sub-active display area 30TM105. Then, the image display device 5 To start the next variable display.

  Here, at the time of starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display of the notice target from the special mode to the blue mode (based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect during the execution of the variable display). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first reserved display 30TM001b) which is a blue round display. Along with this, the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the first holding action effect and the type of the first holding action effect to be executed (type of character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120, when starting the variable display, based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, displays the sub-holding display of the notice target from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example) during execution of the variable display. Then, it is recognized that the sub-holding display 30TM004b) which is a blue star display is changed. Along with this, the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the sub-holding effect effect and determines the type of the sub-holding effect effect to be executed (type of character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) in which the character a appears.

  Based on these determination results, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the first holding action effect (action effect B). In the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (7), the character B appears and an effect of throwing a ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001a of the notice target is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first reservation display 30TM001a of the notice target, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first reservation display 30TM001a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first reservation display of the notice subject in blue from the special mode in response to the execution of the first reservation operation effect (operation effect B). The mode is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue round display in this example.

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14 (9), the character a appears and an effect is performed in which the balloon is blown toward the sub-holding display 30TM004 that is the subject of advance notice. As shown in FIG. 11-14 (10) and FIG. 11-15 (11), the balloon that the character a has flown flies toward the sub-holding display 30TM004, which is the subject of advance notice, and reaches the position of the sub-holding display 30TM004. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (11) and (12), when the balloon reaches the position of the preliminary reservation display 30TM004 of the notice target, the mode of the secondary reservation display 30TM004 is balloon-shaped (secondary reservation display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image (sub-holding display 30TM004G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (13) and (14), executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) and displays the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode. To a blue mode (in this example, a blue star-shaped sub-holding display 30TM004b). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (15), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time displays the first reserved display area 30TM101. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b of the blue mode) is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub display displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105. While the active display 30TM005 is erased, the sub-holding display displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 (the sub-holding display 30TM004 in the normal mode (white star display) and the sub-holding display 30TM004b in the blue mode (blue star display) )) One by one as a sub-active table Shifted displayed in the area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, at the time of starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, changes the blue display from the blue mode to the first reserved display of the notice target during the execution of the variable display. In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first reserved display 30TM001c) which is a red round display. Along with this, the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the first holding action effect and the type of the first holding action effect to be executed (type of character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first hold action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120, when starting the variable display, based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, the sub-holding display of the notice target during the execution of the variable display from the blue mode to the red mode (this example. Then, it is recognized that the sub-holding display 30TM004c) which is a red star display is changed. Along with this, the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the sub-holding effect effect and determines the type of the sub-holding effect effect to be executed (type of character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) in which the character b appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first holding action effect (action effect C) based on these determination results. In the example shown in Fig. 11-15 (17), the character C appears and an effect of throwing a ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001b of the notice target is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first reservation display 30TM001b of the notice target, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first reservation display 30TM001b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first reserved display of the notice target from the blue mode to the red state in response to the execution of the first reserved action effect (action effect C). The mode (first reserved display 30TM001c, which is a red round display in this example) is changed.

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15 (19), the character b appears and an effect is performed in which the balloon is blown toward the noticeable sub-holding display 30TM004b. As shown in FIG. 11-15 (20) and FIG. 11-15 (21), the balloon blown by the character b flies toward the sub-holding display 30TM004b, which is the target of advance notice, and reaches the position of the sub-holding display 30TM004b. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b.

  In this example, as shown in (21) and (22) in FIGS. 11-15, when the balloon reaches the position of the preliminary reservation display 30TM004b of the notice target, the mode of the secondary reservation display 30TM004b is a balloon shape (secondary reservation display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image (sub-holding display 30TM004G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (23) and (24), executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect b), and accordingly, the sub-holding display of the notice target in a blue mode. From the red mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004c, which is a red star-shaped display). .

  In this way, the effect mode is different between the first hold action effect executed when changing the mode of the first hold display and the sub hold effect effect executed when changing the mode of the sub hold display. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the interest of having a plurality of types of hold-supporting displays (first hold display and sub-hold display).

  As shown in FIGS. 11-13 to 11-15, the effect in which the character appears and performs an action on the icon may be executed when the display mode of the active display is changed. Further, it may be executed when changing the display mode of the sub active display. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode, the display of the active display 30TM003 is displayed in response to the character A appearing and executing the active action effect of performing the action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003. The mode may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, gold mode). In addition, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active action effect is performed in which the character a appears and a balloon is blown toward the sub-active display 30TM005. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, since the effect modes are different between the active action effect executed when changing the mode of the active display and the sub active effect effect executed when changing the mode of the sub active display, there are a plurality of types. It is possible to further enhance the interests due to the presence of the display (corresponding to the active display and the sub-active display) corresponding to the change.

  In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the first change effect and the execution ratio of the second change effect may be different according to the current set value (1 to 6) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the proportion of the first hold display 30TM001 displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher than when the set value is low (1 to 3). Further, the ratio of the sub-holding display 30TM004 displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio of displaying the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 itself) may be set high. Further, the number of changes in the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is larger when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3) (for example, 3 times). ) The change pattern may be selected at a high rate, and the change pattern having a large number of changes in the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, twice) may be selected at a high rate.

(Active change production and change suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning occurs, but as described above, the active display mode during the active shift is the final display mode. If they are different, an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is executed.

  Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a change suggesting effect that suggests that there is a possibility of changing. This change suggestion effect has a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the success suggestion change effect effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to change the failure mode. When the suggestive effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed.

  When performing an active shift accompanying the start of the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 has a different display form of the active display during the active shift and a final display form of the active display determined when the start winning is generated. In this case, by executing the active change effect and the change suggestion effect during the execution of the variable display, the active display is changed from the display mode during active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variable display.

  In this case, the effect control CPU 120, when starting the variable display, determines a change pattern for changing the active display from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode. FIG. 11-16 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of active display. In this embodiment, determination values are assigned to the special mode, the blue mode, the green mode, the red mode, and the gold mode as the final display mode of the active display. In addition, the display of "○" in FIG. 11-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the display of "?" Indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. ing.

  When the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the special mode. A judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is executed twice, and the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. The change pattern 011 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the special mode.

  When the final display mode is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The change suggestion effect in the change patterns 012 and 013 is executed three times, of which the success mode is twice and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 012, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The change pattern 013 is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the blue mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed to the special mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern in which the suggestive effect is executed to change the active display to a blue mode.

  When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 014 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. Change the display to a blue mode, then execute the change mode effect suggestion of the success mode to change the active display to the green mode, and then execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display in the green mode. The change pattern 015 is a change pattern, and after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is performed. To change the active display to the blue mode, and then execute the change mode suggestion of the failure mode. The active display without change from blue aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display in green mode.

  When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is 5, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 016, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The display is changed to a blue mode, then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the red mode, After that, it is a change pattern in which the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed in the red mode, and the change pattern 017 is the success mode change suggestion effect after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift. To change the active display to a special mode, and then execute the change mode suggestion of success mode. The active display is changed to the blue mode, then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode. This is a change pattern in which the change indication effect of the success mode is executed thereafter and the active display is changed to the red mode.

  Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 018 is executed five times, of which the success mode is 5 times and the failure mode is 0 times. The change pattern 018 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The display is changed to a blue mode, then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the red mode, After that, it is a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

  When the active display during active shift is in the special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active mode change pattern determination table for the special mode as shown in FIG. 11-16 (B). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), in the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the blue mode. A judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 021 is executed twice, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 021, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to activate the active display. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue state.

  When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is 3, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 022 is such that after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The change pattern 023 is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the green mode, and thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed to the green mode. The change pattern 023 displays the active display in the special mode during the active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display in the blue mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern for executing the suggestive effect and changing the active display to a green mode.

  When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 024, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed and activated. The display is changed to the green mode, then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed and the active display is changed to the red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed to the red mode. The change pattern 025 is a change pattern 025. After the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect. To change the active display to the green mode, and then execute the change mode suggestion of the failure mode. Without changing the active display stays green aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display red manner.

  Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is executed four times, of which the success mode is four times and the failure mode is zero times. In the change pattern 026, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed and activated. A change that changes the display to a green mode, then executes a change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a red mode, and then executes a change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a gold mode It is a pattern.

  When the active display during the active shift is in the blue mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode as shown in FIG. 11-16 (C). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the green mode. A judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 031 is executed twice, and the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 031, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and activated. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the green state.

  When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 are selected with a probability of 80% and 20%, respectively. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is executed three times, of which the success mode is twice and the failure mode is once. The change pattern 032 is such that after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The change pattern 033 is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode, and thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed to the red mode, and the change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display in the green mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern in which the suggestive effect is executed to change the active display to a red mode.

  Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 034 is executed 3 times, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 034, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

  When the active display during the active shift is in the red mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (D). As shown in FIG. 11-16 (D), in the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, the change pattern 041 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the gold mode. A judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 041 is executed once, of which the success mode is 1 and the failure mode is 0. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which the active display is displayed in a red mode during the active shift, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11-16, within one variable display period (in this example, since the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, the reach display is started after the variable display is started. Within the period until the condition is established), the more the change suggestion effect is executed, particularly, the more the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the more the display color changes to the jackpot expectation. The percentage is high.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage when the n-th change suggestion effect is executed, the higher the number of times the success-mode change suggestion effect is executed is, the higher the ratio of the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect is executed. Is configured. For example, at the stage when the second change suggestion effect is executed (when n = 2), if both of the success modes are successful, the third change suggestion effect is always executed. When one of the two times is the success mode and one is the failure mode, the change suggestion effect of the third time may not be executed. The same applies to the case of n = 3 and the case of n = 4. In this way, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the larger the number of times of execution of the success suggestion change suggestion effect executed within the period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state, the same change. Since the rate at which the next change suggesting effect is executed is high within the display period (within the period from the start of the variable display until the reach state is established), the number of times of execution of the change suggesting effect, particularly the success mode The attention is paid to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed, which can improve the interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the higher the ratio of [the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is executed] to the [number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] in the variable display period of 1, the higher the jackpot expectation. The rate at which the display mode changes to a high degree is high. Specifically, [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is 1/2 when the final display mode is the special mode, and the final display mode is the blue mode. In the case of 2/3, when the final display mode is the green mode, it is 3/4, when the final display mode is the red mode, it is 4/5, and the final display mode is the gold mode. If so, it is 5/5. As described above, the larger the [number of times of execution of change suggestion effect of success mode / number of times of execution of change suggestion effect] is, the higher the rate of change of the active display to the display mode of high jackpot expectation is. Pays attention also to the relationship between the number of times of execution of change suggesting effects and the number of times of execution of change suggesting effects of a success mode, which can enhance interest.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the higher the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed, the higher the rate of change to the display mode having a high jackpot expectation. Specifically, the number of consecutive success mode change suggestive effects is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is the blue mode, and is the number when the final display mode is the green mode. 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is the red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is the gold mode. As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed, and how many times it is continued.

  Further, in this example, when the final display mode has the same display color, it is easy to select a change pattern having a greater number of succession change suggestive effects. For example, in the case of the blue mode, the change pattern 012 (two continuous) is selected more than the change pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the green mode, the change pattern 012 (two continuous) is selected. 014 (three consecutive) is selected at a higher rate, and in the case of the red mode, the change pattern 016 (four consecutive) is selected at a higher rate than the change pattern 017 (three consecutive). In this way, even if the final display color is the same, it is possible to further enhance the player's expectation by making it easier for the success suggestion effect change suggestion effects to continue.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect and the mode (success mode or failure mode) of the change suggestion effect, based on the change pattern shown in FIG. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on whether the change suggestion effect is the success mode or the failure mode, and whether the next change suggestion effect is executed. decide. As types of change suggestion effects, a change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears, a change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears, and the character. There is a change suggestion effect E in which E appears.

  When the change suggesting effect executed at the n-th time is the success mode and the change suggesting effect at the (n + 1) th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of starting winning, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Success mode, with next performance execution] table is selected. In the case where the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, with next effect execution], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

  When the change suggesting effect executed at the n-th time is a success mode and the change suggesting effect at the (n + 1) th time is not executed in the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. Success mode, no next performance execution] table is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, no effect is performed next time], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

  When the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is the failure mode and the change suggestion effect at the (n + 1) th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start prize, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. Failure mode, performance is performed next time] is selected. In the case where the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, there is next effect execution], character A is 37%, character B is 32%, character C is 30%, character D is 1%, and character E is 0%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

  When the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is a failure mode and the change suggestion effect at the (n + 1) th time is not executed in the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start prize, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. Failure mode, no next production execution] table is selected. In the case where the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, no next effect execution], the character A is 35%, the character B is 30%, the character C is 30%, the character D is 5%, and the character E is 0%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the type of change suggestion effect for each change suggestion effect based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-17. Therefore, when the nth and n + 1th change suggestion effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the nth change suggestion effect and all the characters A to E are selected in the n + 1th change suggestion effect. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears at the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears at the n + 1th time may be executed, while n + 1. There is also a possibility that the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears the same as the nth time is executed at the first time. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 11-17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears has a low probability of being a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of being a success mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggestion effect. Further, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a 100% probability of being a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is low, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is high. When the character D is displayed on the screen, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is high, but the degree of expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In this case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the change suggestion effect this time is the last one).

  In this way, since the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with a high jackpot expectation rate depending on the type of character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears. Will be done. Further, since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is different depending on the type of character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears.

  Not limited to the effect types shown in FIGS. 11 to 17, for example, an effect type in which the display mode of the active display changes at a low rate and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is low may be provided. It is also possible to provide an effect type in which the display mode of the display is changed at a high rate and the change suggestion effect is executed at a high rate next time.

(Specific examples of active change production and change suggestion production)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-18 to 11-20. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 11-18, 11-9 (9) to (12), and FIG. 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode is the gold mode at the time of winning the start prize. In addition, it is an example of a case in which the mode during the active shift is determined to be the normal mode, and the variation pattern of the active display is determined to be the variation pattern 018 when the variable display based on the start winning is started. . Further, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 11-18 and FIGS. 11-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode to the green mode at the time of the start winning. And an example in which it is decided to set the mode at the time of active shift to the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the change pattern of the active display is set to the change pattern 014. Is.

  In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It has been decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on that, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. The change suggesting effect C of the success mode is decided to be executed based on the execution of the change suggesting effect, and the character D is registered for the fourth change suggesting effect. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect D which is performed, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect D of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggestion effect of the fifth time. It is assumed that it is decided to execute the success suggestion change effect E in which the character E appears in the effect.

  11-18 (1), the active display 30TM003 (white round display) of the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the variable display of the decorative pattern on the left middle right is executed on the image display device 5. It shows the state.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect A in response to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (1), the character A appears from the right side of the screen, the effect image in which the character A performs the action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed, and subsequently, FIG. As shown in -18 (2), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the normal mode active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image that reminds that the active display has exploded. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (3), in response to the completion of the first change suggestion effect, an active display 30TM003a (white triangular display) of a special mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. .

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect B in response to the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (4), the character B appears from the left side of the screen, an effect image in which the character B performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed, and subsequently, FIG. As shown in -18 (5), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character B hits the active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003a of the special mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (6), in response to the completion of the second change suggestion effect, an active display 30TM003b (blue circle display) in a blue mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. It

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect C in response to the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18 (7), the character C appears from the right side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character C performs the action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b is displayed, and subsequently. As shown in FIG. 11-18 (8), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character C hits the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the blue active display 30TM003b is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (9), in response to the completion of the third change suggestion effect, a green mode active display 30TM003d (green circle display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. It

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect D in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), the character D appears from the left side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, and subsequently. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (11), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D hits the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the green active display 30TM003d is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (12), in response to the completion of the fourth change suggestion effect, a red mode active display 30TM003c (red circle display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. It

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect E in response to the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which a transparent member (such as a glass plate) forming the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked is displayed. . Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in a mode in which the crack range is enlarged is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (15), an image (screen crack image 30TM210) in which the transparent member forming the screen of the image display device 5 is broken is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image in which the character E performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (16), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character E hits the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the red active display 30TM003c is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (17), in response to the end of the fifth change suggestion effect, an active display 30TM003e (golden circular display) in a gold mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. It

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (18), the screen crack image 30TM210 displayed on the image display device 5 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 11-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol are displayed. A reach state in which the same decorative pattern (“7” in this example) is stopped in the display area is established, and the letters “REACH !!” are displayed at the bottom of the screen (area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). The performance is executed. Here, as described above, at the timing when the reach is established, the gold-colored active display 30TM003e is hidden and the square frame indicating the active display area 30TM103 is also hidden. The hidden information will not be displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 11-18 and FIGS. 11-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the CPU 120 for effect control determines the final display mode to be the green mode at the time of winning the start prize. In addition, it is an example of a case where the mode at the time of active shift is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 014. .

  In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It has been decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on that, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. It is determined that the change suggestion effect C of the success mode is executed based on the change suggestion effect being performed, and the character D is registered for the fourth change suggestion effect. It changes suggested effect decided to run a D, and it is assumed that the fifth variation suggest effect is decided to execute the changes suggested effect D failure mode based on the not executed for.

  11-18 (1) to 11-19 (9) are similar to the effect examples of the change pattern 018 described above (the first change suggesting effect to the third change suggesting effect), which will be described. 11-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the failure mode change suggestion effect D in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (10), the character D appears from the left side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, and subsequently. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (20), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D has not hit the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the green active display 30TM003d is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the above-described effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed, and instead, the character D throws and does not hit. An effect image in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (21), when the fourth change suggestion effect is finished, the active display area 30TM103 continuously displays the active display 30TM003d in the green form. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change from before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (22), the reach state in which the same decorative design (in this example, “4”) is stopped in the left design display region and the right design display region is established, and “reach !! The reach effect in which the character "" is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103) is executed. Here, as described above, the active display area 30TM103 is hidden at the timing when the reach state is established, so the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-18 (1) to 11-20 (19), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state in which the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is continuously executed on the image display device 5. , The change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. Then, when the execution of the change suggestion effect of a predetermined number of times is completed, the same decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area to establish the reach state. That is, while the effect control CPU 120 is executing the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are temporarily stopped, the direction of variable display is changed, and the reach state is changed. It is not established. According to such a configuration, since the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not change during the period in which the change suggestion effect is performed a predetermined number of times according to the change pattern, the change suggestion effect can be more focused.

  Although FIG. 11-16 shows a change pattern in which the failure mode change suggestive effects are not continuous, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which failure mode change suggestive effects are continuous may be provided. . Further, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more than the change suggestion effect of the success mode. For example, a change pattern may be provided in which the failure mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed three times and then the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed twice. Further, an effect pattern may be provided in which the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed once or more, but the success mode change suggestion effect is not executed even once, so that the display mode of the active display does not change.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11 to 16, the display mode of the active display does not change when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display mode is always displayed when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed. Although the example in which the display mode changes is shown, the display mode is not limited to such a mode, and when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, it is activated at a higher rate than when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed. It suffices that the display mode of the display is changed, and for example, an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change even when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed may be provided. An effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes even when the suggestive effect is executed may be provided.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11-16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is a mode in which the jackpot expectation is one step higher (from the normal mode to the special mode, the special mode. An example of changing from a blue mode, a blue mode to a green mode, a green mode to a red mode, and a red mode to a gold mode) has been shown, but the invention is not limited to such a mode, and when a change suggestive effect of a successful mode is executed. May provide a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display is changed to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation level is higher by two or more levels (for example, a normal mode to a green mode, a blue mode to a gold mode, etc.). Further, the rate of change in the display mode in two or more stages may be different depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of character that appears). For example, the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears If the display mode is changed, the rate of change in the display mode by two or more steps is low, and if the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate of change in the display mode by two or more steps is high. Is also good. Further, when the change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three stages.

  In the above embodiment, the change suggesting effect may be executed at a timing before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the fluctuating display of the decorative design is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped and then re-varied is executed once or more, before the temporary stop of the decorative design. You may make it perform the change suggestion production of a success mode. For example, when the temporary stop is executed n times, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed before each temporary stop (the success mode change suggestion effect is executed n times in succession), and thereafter. By executing the failure mode change suggestion effect, it may be suggested that the (n + 1) th temporary stop is not executed. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the change pattern in which the pseudo-continuous change is not executed even once, only the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed. May be provided. Further, when the variation display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n + 1 times), the success suggestion change production of n + 1 times is continuously performed. An effect pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed.

  In the case of such a configuration, the change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped (a character appears), and the change suggestion effect is ended before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (the character. Perform an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the character A appears and takes action to change the display mode of the active display from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the first temporary stop is performed and the first time. After the re-fluctuation of No. is started, the character B appears and takes action to change the display mode of the active display from the special mode to the blue mode, and then the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-fluctuation occurs. After the start, the character C may appear and take action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the green mode. In this way, by not overlapping the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (that is, the period in which the variation mode of the decorative pattern is changed), the change suggestive effect can be noticed. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the effect of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped from being lowered.

  When performing the effect of changing the variable display direction of the decorative pattern from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the change suggesting effect is started in the state where the decorative pattern is displayed in the vertical direction (the character appears). The change suggesting effect may be ended (the display mode of the active display is changed by the action of the character) before changing the variable display direction of the decorative pattern to the horizontal direction. For example, the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode after the first character appears and takes action immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, and then the variable display direction of the decorative pattern changes from the vertical direction. After the change in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and take action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by not overlapping the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the timing at which the variation display direction of the decorative pattern changes, the change suggestion effect can be focused and the variation display of the decorative pattern can be displayed. It is possible not to reduce the effect of the effect when the direction changes.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the change suggesting effect is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes has been described, but the change suggesting effect is not limited to such a mode, and the change suggesting effect is the display mode of the hold display. It may be a production that suggests that the change. For example, the change pattern shown in FIGS. 11-16 may be used as a change pattern when changing the display mode of the hold display, and when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display may not be changed when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed.

  In the above-described embodiment, in both cases of the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character is a similar action (effect that acts on the active display or the hold display, for example, the ball. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, but in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, while the appearing character performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display, In the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character may not perform the action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. In addition, the action performed by the character that has appeared may be different between the success mode change suggestion effect and the failure mode change suggestion effect. For example, in the success mode change suggestion effect, an active display or a pending display to be changed. The action of throwing the ball in the direction of (the effect that acts on the active display or the hold display) is performed, and in the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the action of throwing the ball in the direction different from the active display or the hold display (the active display or the hold display is displayed. You may make it perform the effect).

  In the above-described embodiment, as the number of times of execution of the success mode change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state increases, the next change suggestion effect within the predetermined period. Shows that the jackpot expectation is higher as the ratio of the execution frequency of the change suggestion effect of the success mode to the execution frequency of the change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period is higher. . However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the temporary suspension of the decorative pattern (the combination of the decorative patterns or the pseudo continuous pattern in which re-variation (pseudo continuous) will be performed after the temporary stop) It may be a period, or may be a period from the temporary stop of the decorative pattern to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern again after the decorative pattern is changed again (that is, a period during the pseudo run). The predetermined period may be a period from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the first stop of any one of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and all the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right from the start of variation of the decorative pattern It may be a period until the fixed stop.

  In the above embodiment, when a plurality of change suggesting effects are executed, there may be a plurality of patterns of periods from the end of one change suggesting effect to the start of the next change suggesting effect. For example, when the interval from the end of the change suggestion effect 1 to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the rate of success of the next change suggestion effect is higher than when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation degree is high. May be higher. Further, when a large number of times of change suggesting effects are executed, the interval may be gradually shortened, and accordingly, the jackpot expectation may be gradually increased. According to such a form, the player determines whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed when the change suggestion effect 1 is finished and also the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. You can become interested and improve your interest.

  In the above embodiment, the rate of changing the display mode of the active display may be different depending on the current set value (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case where the set value is high (4 to 6), the proportion in which the display mode of the active display is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher than when the set value is low (1 to 3). You may do it. Further, compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the number of times the display color of the active display is changed is larger (for example, 3 times or more) when the set value is high (4 to 6). The pattern selection rate may be high, that is, the success mode change suggestion effect may be executed and the success mode change suggestion effect may be continuous. Further, compared to the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the change suggestion effect of the specific type is higher when the set value is high (4 to 6) (for example, the effect in which the character X having a low appearance frequency appears). May be executed at a higher rate.

[Another example of power-on processing]
Next, another example of power-on processing will be described.
12-1 to 12-3 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 and 9 -11 and FIGS. 9-43 to 9-44, and processes corresponding to the processes shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, some of the processes (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11) are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 12-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 9-43, and a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0-5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the set values stored in the set value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as normal values, and six-stage set values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, and the setting value 4 in this example is described above. 9-4, etc., and the setting value 5 in this example corresponds to the setting value 6, shown in FIG. 9-4.

  Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before being installed in the gaming hall), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is set in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a normal value. If the set value is a legal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the mode is changed to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

  If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is determined to be executed. When the value is 1, it is determined that the RAM clear is performed. It has been done. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed. When the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

  The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at power restoration is 0 (initial value is not set). The notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified on the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 informs the gaming control microcomputer 100 of a detection signal indicating that the gaming machine frame 3 has been opened, and that the glass door frame 3a has been opened. When the detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4510 and subsequent processes related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 12-2. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the set value can be confirmed.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change ( If NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the setting value is changed and / or Or it becomes possible to confirm. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), which one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is set? Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

  In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state in order to bring the setting value into a state in which the setting value is not permitted to be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), (2) ) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are both satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode) on the condition that the setting has been performed.

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is abnormal, or some illegal operation. There is a possibility that the means is about to confirm or change the set value. In such a state, it is inappropriate to permit the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. Also, the control is not performed in any of the setting change modes.

  In the present embodiment, as condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode. It may not be controlled by any of the above.

  On the other hand, in step S21TM4060, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described below without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the mode is not controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 described later is performed. Move on to (Send setting command).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 determines that , And proceeds to step S21TM4120. If it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set in the setting change flag check (step S21TM4030) (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

  Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Will be controlled by the mode. Further, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), a normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. If the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

  In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

  If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 12B is executed.

  On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), in the step S21TM4140, when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state In (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing in step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode. Indicated setting error To send over command to effect control for the CPU120.

  Upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message "Setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily switch off the power (turn off the power switch 21TM055) and then shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The user is informed that the operation for changing the set value is performed (the set value is confirmed). For example, a message “Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after turning off the power” is displayed. It should be noted that similar notification may be performed by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

  In this loop processing, the CPU 103 performs a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4200), and then displays the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029, whereby "the set value is not a regular value (0 to 5)". Despite that there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all of which are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a call lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine). To be done.

  During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. A weight of 4 ms is provided to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. The security signal is continuously output during the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not established and the setting change mode is not entered) although it may not be).

  The loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

  That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when YES is determined in step S21TM4030), in any of the cases, the game should not be played in this state, Before shifting to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing and special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 9-14), the set value in the set value storage area is set to a regular value. Need to let. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state in order to bring the setting value into a changeable state (setting change mode). (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, it is possible to change the setting value ( It is possible to switch to the setting change mode).

  If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be set to a regular value. Without, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) described above.

  If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the game player cannot shift to the normal game process. Therefore, the clerk or the like in the game arcade must turn off the pachinko gaming machine 1 and turn it on again. I won't. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is temporarily cut off so that all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

  When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 presets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), although the setting value change is not permitted, the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), two conditions are required.

  However, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even if the two conditions that are (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3. In the processing of FIG. 12-2, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). When a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as the regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a power-off process after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power-off processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure is input, and if the power-off signal is input, the CPU 103 confirms that the power is being supplied. Immediately before the power supply stops operating due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off process, the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area.

  Thereby, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repeated processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620, or the repeated processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed). When the disconnection occurs, the data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk at the amusement hall normally recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk at the amusement hall actually sees it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the setting value of. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode is controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, when the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting change flag indicating that there is a possibility of being set is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is cut off while the control is in the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is 1 (set state) at the next power-on.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has transitioned to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

  If the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4680. When the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and then proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

  Every time the clerk at the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off last time) is 3 If there is, the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 responds. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

  Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) is possible. ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the set confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040 and RAM clear flag). Remains 0).

  In addition, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and to send the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the setting value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

  In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined that the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command, it can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and set a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM4680, CPU 103 confirms whether lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes of step S21TM4540 and subsequent steps are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). Since the predetermined time is set as the value of the security signal timer, the value of the security signal timer is changed from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process (the step S21TM1670 in FIG. 9-14) when the process is shifted to the normal game process thereafter. The security signal will continue to be output until. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode is ended or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are confirmed. Corresponding to the end of control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

  Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether it is controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process (without (without). In addition, the processing for setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also performed regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (determine which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process. In this way, the output control of the security signal is simplified by sharing the output start control and the output end control of the security signal depending on whether the setting change mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode. The control load can be reduced.

  Also, output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is output in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the common value (1000 ms) is set for the security signal when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The timer is set. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is set on the external device side. It will be difficult to know if it was controlled.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is temporarily sent in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the value of the timer, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM, reset (overwrite) 30000 ms as the value of the security signal timer. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

  When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. 1 sec has passed, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the timing is 30 sec after the setting change mode ends.

  Specifically, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when RAM clear is not performed and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt permission is given. In the process (for example, the information output process of step S21TM1670 shown in FIG. 9-14), the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled ( When the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt permission (for example, in FIG. 9-14) In the information output processing of step S21TM1670 shown), the security signal timer value is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms. It will be to continue the output of the I signal. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) before the game control timer interrupt process. ) To 0 ms, the security signal may be continuously output, and the game control timer interrupt process may be performed after the security signal is output.

  As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control in the setting change mode is finished, and the control is changed to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the control of the setting change mode ends. With such a configuration, while the output control of the security signal is made common, the output period of the security signal can be made different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled.

  As a result, in the external device, it is possible to grasp whether the initialization processing is executed and the control is performed in the setting confirmation mode, or the initialization processing is executed and the setting is changed. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial state can be specified. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion processing is executed and the setting change mode is controlled.

  The security signal is also output when the game stop target error such as the magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

  If the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 is not executed). Therefore, the value of the abnormality detection flag is set to the initial value in the signal output process. It remains set without being converted, and the security signal can be continuously output for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it becomes possible to prevent the output period of the security signal from being limited to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the lapse of 1 second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 is executed). Therefore, in the subsequent signal output processing. The anomaly detection flag is cleared (it is unknown whether or not an anomaly was detected when the power was cut off), and as a result, the setting change mode ends during the security signal output period. It is a period from the time until 30 seconds have elapsed (a period corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear).

  In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 12-2, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer set to 1 may be at least a period in which the output of the security signal can be recognized by the external device side, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

  After the processing of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, when the power is cut off after the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 erases the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the set command, and the set command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are not controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

  Here, the player normally recognizes the range of setting values as 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is directly displayed as an image on the effect control CPU 120 side. If it is displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) designated by the setting command is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6), and the setting value 1 to 6 is set. The production that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

  Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area to the setting command to perform the effect control. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the setting value designated by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the CPU 120 side for effect control, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is, or an effect that suggests the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it becomes unnecessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value designated by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value designated by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state ends different according to the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

  Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). It is determined to be YES in S21TM4020, the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040). ), It is sufficient to execute the processing at the time of power interruption recovery without clearing the RAM.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the same processing as that of step S21TM1340 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 9-13. Specifically, the processing of steps S21TM1340 to S21TM1370 and steps S21TM1480 to S21TM1540, that is, the processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on is executed, and after the interrupt permission, the processing shown in FIG. It suffices to shift to the game control timer interrupt processing (including special symbol process processing) shown in 14. That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, the CPU 103 determines that the RAM clear flag is 0 Without executing the clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command for power-off recovery (step S21TM1370), and the normal game process is started.

  In the production control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), restoration from power interruption is performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed. Be recognized). When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like performs recovery from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that the RAM has not been cleared.

  On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, the process at the time of turning on the power, which involves clearing the RAM, may be executed.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the same processing as the step S21TM1410 (RAM clear processing) and the subsequent steps shown in FIG. 9-13. Specifically, steps S21TM1410 (RAM clear processing) to step S21TM1460, processing for setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer described above (step S21TM1465), and processing of steps S21TM1480 to step S21TM1540, that is, backup RAM at power-on. If the data check result of the area is abnormal, the processing may be executed, and after the interruption is permitted, the game control timer interruption processing (including the special symbol process processing) shown in FIG. 9-14 may be performed. .

  As shown in FIG. 12C, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.), is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102.

  The reason why the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clearing process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a normal value is set in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. If it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the set value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the setting change mode is in progress. This is because the normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table to the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

  After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the production control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize (have been broken). When the production control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 has initialized the game state (when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data of 1.).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. When the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Value), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is.

  Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt processing after the interrupt permission (see FIG. 9-14). The information output process of step S21TM1670 shown), and thereafter, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed due to interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. The output of the security signal is stopped at the timing.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21 described above). Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103, for example, executes a process in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to make settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 2 ms.

  Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number updating process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 9-14) is shifted to the normal game process which can be executed. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not a big hit and a random number for determining whether to reach when not a big hit, for display The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value is the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating the random number for determining whether or not to win the normal symbol. It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process to do, or the process of sending a command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (ordinary random number for per symbol determination) When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

  In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the power-off recovery process (process after step S21TM1340), but is not limited to such a form. When it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the game machine frame 3 or the glass). It is also possible to shift to the process when power is restored (the process after step S21TM1340) depending on the state of the door frame 3a.

  Further, in the present example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process proceeds to the process at power-on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the gaming machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process when the power is turned on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

  As described above, the clerk or the like in the game hall puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control, and it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Also, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also the gaming state and the like. Can be prevented from being initialized (NO in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 to set the RAM clear flag to 1). In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. There is.

  As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting value was unstable because it was controlled in the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the set value that the game hall is trying to confirm is not stored in the set value storage area. In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 to FIG. 12-3, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process, but stops the game (step S21TM4030 based on the setting change flag being set) (step S21) (step S21). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 are controlled so that a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stopped state (step S21TM4220).

  With such a configuration, the game is prevented from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in the state where the set value is unstable, and the power is supplied when the power is turned on. It is possible to notify the external device that it was controlled in the setting change mode when the disconnection occurred.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3, the CPU 103 determines the condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) ( When all of the steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES), the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor is displayed in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" is displayed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

  In the example shown in FIG. 12-5, each 7-segment display 21TM029A to 21TM029D forming the display monitor 21TM029 displays the letter “E”, thereby causing an abnormality in the clerk at the amusement hall (in the setting change mode). There is a possibility that the power supply may have been cut off while it was under control). In addition, the production control CPU 120, which has received the setting value error command, causes the image display device 5 to display a message “Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after the power is turned off.” After turning the power off (power switch 21TM055 is OFF), the store clerk, etc., shifts to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (power switch 21TM055 is ON), and changes the set value. Perform a notification prompting to perform (determine the set value).

  In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“Power is turned on again after power is turned off. Please switch to the setting change mode ”) will not be performed.

  Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has been controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated. ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, a message “in the setting change mode” or a message “please perform the setting change operation to change the set value” can be displayed on the image display device 5. With this, the clerk at the game hall can understand that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area can be set. By changing the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing the preset set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any one of the conditions is not satisfied, the setting change mode is not controlled and the game is stopped (the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the setting value error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190). . As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" display on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Power is turned on again after power is turned off." Switch to the setting change mode ").

  In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the production control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power is turned off”). If the power is cut off during the setting change mode as a state of the gaming machine, the condition for changing to the setting change mode after the power is restored is It will be notified that the condition is not met. In this case, the clerk at the game hall understands that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stopped state (it is necessary to turn the power on again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, it is possible to fix the set value and shift the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the normal game processing.

  In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

  If the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error is displayed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029). This automatically shifts to the setting change mode without prompting the user to avoid unnecessary error display and promptly change the setting value appropriately.

  On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on display monitor 21TM029). Will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

  When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transitioning to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) To (iii) are not satisfied, different commands may be transmitted as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

  For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the setting change mode is entered (or the transition condition is established). The CPU 120 for effect control, which has transmitted the command indicating that the command has been received, displays the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "The setting is automatically controlled in the setting change mode" It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, when the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process is shifted to the normal game process, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the change (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

  And as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) sets based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, even though the operation is not controlled by either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and notify that effect. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk at the amusement hall clearly understands that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed even though the operation is not controlled in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the illegal It is possible to check whether or not

  Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process moves to the normal game process, and The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modification of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 12-1, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM clear flag is set, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

  Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the setting change mode may be entered (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not the condition is satisfied.

  In the processing shown in FIG. 12-6, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the setting value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. If (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The process is controlled (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), which is different from the process shown in FIG. 12-1. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3.

  Even in this case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to properly determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12-6, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. Is set, and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the control is changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570). However, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) are set. Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

  As described above, when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, it is possible to improve workability for fixing the set value.

  Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is performed even if the condition (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled in the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state. (Step S21TM4610 to step S21TM4620 in FIG. 12-2).

  As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the store clerk who has performed the setting value change operation once turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

  In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). While making the setting change mode different, the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) is made common to clarify the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode, It is arranged to appropriately shift to the normal game processing.

  Here, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) and the setting change mode is controlled, a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be given. good. For example, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits the setting value error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). Performing the corresponding processing), and the effect control CPU 120 that received the setting value error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn the lock switch ON once and switch it OFF after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In the processing shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3 and 12-6, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing when the setting change flag is set. Therefore, the gaming machine manufacturer sets the setting change flag in advance when shipping the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), and then the gaming machine side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Accordingly, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode and perform the setting change operation, and take a measure to fix the set value.

(Setting value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the setting value)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-7, a description will be given of the setting value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the setting value. In the example shown in FIG. 12-2 and the above-described FIG. 10-2, in the setting change mode, the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated to set the setting value stored in the setting value storage area. It will change itself.

  First, regarding the control in the case where the power supply is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -7 (1).

  As shown in the order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on), and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, “0” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on. Next, as shown in order 2, with the start of the setting change mode, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read set value is set to 1 "1", which is obtained by adding, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from "1" to "1", and "2" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “1” based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from "2" to "2", and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the set value storage area. In the power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on), and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The set value "2" is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power supply was cut off in the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in order 7, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  When the power is turned on in the order 6, the setting change flag is set. Therefore, when the control shown in FIG. 12-6 is applied, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

  As described above, when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored when the power is restored. The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the preset setting value may have already been set, and in this case, the clerk at the amusement arcade terminates the setting change mode without performing a new operation to change the setting value. Since it is only necessary to shift the game machine to the normal game processing, workability can be improved.

  Next, regarding the control in the case where a power-off occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG. 12-7 (2).

  The order 1 to the order 4 is the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, whereby the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the confirmed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power switch 21TM055 is turned off, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

  Next, as shown in order 8, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  As shown in FIGS. 12-7 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is cut off, , Valid setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area when power is restored).

  The storage control of the set values shown in FIG. 12-7 is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIG. 9-37. That is, when the setting value is controlled in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting change switch (clear switch) is set in the setting change mode. When the 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is ended (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting value is fixed. May be. In this case, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 becomes a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting information temporary storage area The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes in response to the change in the set value stored in.

  With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. If the power is cut off without completing the operation for ending the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is the power supply. It has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stopped state, the set value stored in the set value storage area when the power was last turned on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on. It becomes a value according to the set value.

  In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

  For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and for a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability depending on the setting values. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting values (for example, for all of the setting values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to a gaming machine (the jackpot probability is 1/300).

[Explanation on Characteristic Section 35TM]
Next, a gaming machine including the characteristic unit 35TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-20. The gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 includes one image display device, but the gaming machine may include a plurality of image display devices. In the example of FIG. 13-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as a first image display device and a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a second image display device. Further, as the movable body 32 described above, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are decorative bodies having a light transmitting property, are provided.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the two image display devices shown in FIG. 13-1, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 which is the first image display device corresponds to the image display device 5 shown in FIG. It is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. That is, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays information that can be displayed by the image display device 5 described above. For example, a background image of a decorative design is displayed and variable display of the decorative design is executed. Further, an effect image such as a notice effect associated with the variable display of the decorative design is displayed. The main liquid crystal display 35TM200 also displays a hold display and an active display (variable display correspondence display).

  The sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, which is the second image display device, is provided below the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. On the front side (player side) of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a first logo panel 35TM410 and a second logo panel 35TM420 at the downward movement end are arranged. On the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, an image for changing the mode (for example, emission color) of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 having light transmittance, an image simulating a 7-segment display, etc. are displayed. It is possible.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, with an image simulating a 7-segment display, the remaining time until the suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop of the pseudo continuous symbol) is executed, the jackpot expectation degree (for example, the winning expectation in the battle effect) It is possible to notify the player of a numerical value indicating the degree), a time elapsed after the suggestion effect (for example, a music reach effect of reproducing a music when the reach state is established) is started, and the like. The numerical values shown by the images simulating these 7-segment displays are images related to the effect (including variable display of the decorative pattern) executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and are executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is an image related to the production time.

  The first logo panel 35TM410 is vertically driven by the first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is vertically driven by the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520. Hereinafter, a main liquid crystal display 35TM200, a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a first logo panel 35TM410 and a first logo panel driving mechanism 35TM510, and a logo panel including a second logo panel 35TM420 and a second logo panel driving mechanism 35TM520. The drive mechanism 35TM001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-2 to 13-4.

(Logo panel drive mechanism)
13-2 shows the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001, FIG. 13-2 (a) is a front view of the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001, and FIG. 13-2 (b) is P of FIG. 13-2 (a). FIG. FIG. 13-3 is a view on arrow Q of FIG. 13-2 (a). As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-3, the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001 is arranged near the center of the game area on the game board 2. FIG. 13-2 (a) shows a state in which both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the downward movement end and overlap the front and rear sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 13-2 (b) and FIG. 13-3, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is located below the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and on the front side (player side) of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is arranged. The main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are both rectangular in a front view, and the width and height of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are larger than the width and height of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged side by side at the same distance from the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when they are at the downward movement end. The first logo panel 35TM410 is arranged on the left side of the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is arranged on the right side of the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. That is, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged at positions overlapping the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The width and height when the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged in parallel are substantially the same as the width and height of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Therefore, from the player's point of view, when the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the downward movement end, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is covered by the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. It looks like you are.

  The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are made of a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, the contour of the character information "FEV" and the contour of the character information "ER!" Are formed by unevenness modeling. For example, in a transparent synthetic resin plate, the character part (the part surrounded by the outline of the character) is formed thin, and the other part is formed thick, so that the translucency of the character part is improved. It is configured to be higher than the luminous property.

  Incidentally, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, a contour member formed of a material such as a colored and opaque synthetic resin on a transparent synthetic resin plate and formed according to the contour of a character May be attached. In addition, the first logo panel is made of a plurality of materials having different translucency so that the translucency of the material of the character portion (the portion surrounded by the outline of the character) is higher than that of the material of the other portions. The 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 may be formed.

  In this way, by making the translucency of the character portion higher than the translucency of the other portion, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (first logo) located behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. When the panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are moved to the upper performance position, among the information displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 located behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, Positions corresponding to the character portions of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 (the area surrounded by the outline of "FEV" and the area surrounded by the outline of "ER!") (Positions facing each area) The information displayed in <1> has higher visibility than the information displayed in the positions corresponding to other parts.

  The first logo panel 35TM410 can be moved in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a) by the first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510. Further, the second logo panel 35TM420 can be moved in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a) by the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520. The first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510 and the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520 have the same structure and are symmetrically arranged in the left-right direction of FIG. 13-2 (a).

  The first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510 includes a first rack 35TM511, a first pinion 35TM512, a first motor 35TM513, a first support plate 35TM514, and the like. The second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520 includes a second rack 35TM521, a second pinion 35TM522, a second motor 35TM523, a second support plate 35TM524 and the like. The first rack 35TM511 is fixed to the left side surface of the first logo panel 35TM410, and the second rack 35TM521 is fixed to the right side surface of the second logo panel 35TM420. The first rack 35TM511 and the second rack 35TM521 are formed in an elongated prism shape in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a).

  The first support plate 35TM514 and the second support plate 35TM524 are formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the up-down direction of FIG. 13-2 (a). The first rack 35TM511 is guided by a first guide 35TM515 integrally formed on the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514, so that the first rack 35TM511 can move in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a). Similarly, the second rack 35TM521 is guided by the second guide 35TM525 integrally formed on the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524 so that the second rack 35TM521 can move in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a).

  A first motor 35TM513 and a second motor 35TM523 are attached to the back surfaces of the first support plate 35TM514 and the second support plate 35TM524, respectively. The first pinion 35TM512 fixed to the output shaft of the first motor 35TM513 meshes with the first rack teeth 35TM511A formed on the left side surface of the first rack 35TM511. Similarly, the second pinion 35TM522 fixed to the output shaft of the second motor 35TM523 meshes with the second rack teeth 35TM521A formed on the right side surface of the second rack 35TM521.

  As described above, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 as movable bodies are connected to the effect control board 12, and the operation of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is the effect control board. 12 (production control CPU 120).

  Specifically, the first motor 35TM513 for driving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the origin detection sensor 35TM519 for detecting whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 is located at the downward movement end, that is, the origin position. (Photo sensor), second motor 35TM523 for driving second logo panel 35TM420, origin detection sensor 35TM529 for detecting whether or not second logo panel 35TM420 is located at the downward movement end, that is, the origin position. (Photo sensor) is connected, and the operation of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is controlled by controlling the operations of the first motor 35TM513 and the second motor 35TM523. CPU 120) can be controlled individually Together, the first logo panel 35TM410, second logo panel 35TM420 is whether positioned at the origin position (initial position), the performance control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) can be sensed.

  When the production control CPU 120 rotates the first motor 35TM513, the first logo panel 35TM410 fixed to the first rack 35TM511 moves in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a). Similarly, when the effect control CPU 120 rotates the second motor 35TM523, the second logo panel 35TM420 fixed to the second rack 35TM521 moves in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a).

  The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are independently movable in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2 (a), and both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved. It can be moved upward or downward in FIG. 13-2 (a).

  Plate-shaped first contact members 35TM516 and second contact members 35TM526 are fixed to the lower ends of the first rack 35TM511 and the second rack 35TM521, respectively. A first lower end stopper 35TM517 is fixed to the lower end of the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514, and a first upper end stopper 35TM518 is fixed to the upper end side of the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514. Similarly, a second lower end stopper 35TM527 is fixed to the lower end of the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524, and a second upper end stopper 35TM528 is fixed to the upper end side of the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524.

  When the first logo panel 35TM410 moves upward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the first contact member 35TM516 abuts the first upper end stopper 35TM518 at the upward moving end of the first logo panel 35TM410, The logo panel 35TM410 stops at the correct presentation position at the upward movement end. When the first logo panel 35TM410 moves downward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the first contact member 35TM516 abuts the first lower end stopper 35TM517 at the downward movement end of the first logo panel 35TM410, The logo panel 35TM410 stops at the accurate origin position of the downward movement end (also referred to as an initial position or a retracted position). Whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 is at the origin position is detected by the origin detection sensor 35TM519 (photo sensor).

  Similarly, when the second logo panel 35TM420 moves upward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the second contact member 35TM526 contacts the second upper end stopper 35TM528 at the upward moving end of the second logo panel 35TM420. , The second logo panel 35TM420 stops at the correct effect position at the upward movement end. When the second logo panel 35TM420 moves downward in FIG. 13-2 (a), the second contact member 35TM526 abuts the second lower end stopper 35TM527 at the downward moving end of the second logo panel 35TM420, and The logo panel 35TM420 stops at the accurate origin position of the downward movement end (also referred to as an initial position or a retracted position). Whether or not the second logo panel 35TM420 is at the origin position is detected by the origin detection sensor 35TM529 (photo sensor).

  In the state of FIG. 13-2 (a), both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged at the origin position overlapping with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and back, and the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is in a state in which the player can visually recognize the whole. However, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are formed of a translucent material, the player can display the sub liquid crystal display through the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. It is possible to visually recognize the information of the container 35TM300.

  That is, the mode of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position changes according to the display image on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. At this time, the character portions of “FEV” and “ER!”, That is, the portion where the contour for effect is formed has higher visibility than the other portions, so that the player can more clearly display the sub liquid crystal display. The display image on the display 35TM300 can be visually recognized, and the change in the image displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be more clearly understood.

  FIG. 13-4 is a front view showing a state in which both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved to a position overlapping with the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a front view and a rear direction. That is, in FIG. 13-4, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved to the effect position that is the upward movement end of FIG. 13-4, and the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM410 are moved. The panel 35TM420 is arranged at a position overlapping the front and rear of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, with respect to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the visibility of the lower portion is lowered, and with respect to the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the overall visibility is improved. The player can clearly see the information displayed on the entire sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Further, in this state, the modes of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position may change according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly the part displayed at the bottom). become. At this time, regarding the character portion of "FEV" in the first logo panel 35TM410 and the character portion of "ER!" In the second logo panel 35TM420, the player can more clearly show the main character compared to other portions. The display image on the liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be visually recognized, and the change in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be grasped more clearly.

  Although not shown, the first logo panel 35TM410 may be independently moved to a position overlapping the front and rear of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a front view. That is, the first logo panel 35TM410 is moved to the effect position which is the upward movement end, and the first logo panel 35TM410 is arranged at a position overlapping the front and rear of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, with respect to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the visibility of the lower left part is lowered, and with respect to the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the visibility of the left half is improved, while the right side is improved. Visibility is reduced by half. While the player can clearly see the information displayed on the left half of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is difficult to clearly see the information displayed on the right half.

  Further, in this state, the mode of the first logo panel 35TM410 in the effect position changes according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly the part displayed in the lower left part). Further, the mode of the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position changes depending on the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (particularly the portion displayed on the right half). At this time, with respect to the character portion of “FEV” in the first logo panel 35TM410, the player can visually recognize the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 more clearly than other portions, and more. The change in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be clearly recognized. Regarding the character portion of “ER!” In the second logo panel 35TM420, the player can more clearly visually recognize the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as compared with other portions, and more clearly. The change in the image displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be grasped.

  Similarly, although not shown, the second logo panel 35TM420 may be independently moved to a position overlapping the front and rear of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a front view. That is, the second logo panel 35TM420 is moved to the effect position which is the upward movement end, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is arranged at a position overlapping the front and rear of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, with respect to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the visibility of the lower right part is lowered, and with respect to the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the visibility of the right half is improved, while the left side is improved. Visibility is reduced by half. While the player can clearly see the information displayed on the right half of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the information displayed on the left half.

  Further, in this state, the mode of the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position changes according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly the part displayed in the lower right part). In addition, the mode of the first logo panel 35TM410 at the origin position changes according to the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (particularly the portion displayed on the left half). At this time, with respect to the character portion of “ER!” In the second logo panel 35TM420, the player can visually recognize the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 more clearly than other portions. It is possible to more clearly grasp the change in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Regarding the character portion of “FEV” in the first logo panel 35TM410, the player can more clearly visually recognize the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as compared with other portions, and the character can be more clearly displayed. The change in the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be grasped.

  As shown in FIGS. 13-2 to 13-4, the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001 displays both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 between the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It can be moved at the same time as one body or independently. That is, it is possible to provide a plurality of patterns for moving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, and to provide a plurality of patterns for changing the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Since it is possible, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the interest.

  Further, as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move from the origin position to the presentation position, the screen visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved and the screen visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is reduced. To do. On the other hand, as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move from the effect position to the origin position (return to the origin position), the screen visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 improves and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Screen visibility is reduced.

  In this way, the visibility of the different display means, that is, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, changes according to the displacement of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are decorations. And the visibility of each display unit can be associated with each other, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Pseudo continuous production)
As described above, the variation pattern is determined when the variation display of the special symbol is started by the game control microcomputer 100 (variation pattern setting process shown in S111 of FIG. 5). Here, when it is determined that the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous production is executed once or more is determined, the production control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern command designating the variation pattern causes the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 to display the decoration based on the variation pattern. During the variable display period of the symbol, the pseudo-relational effect is executed once or more.

  Pseudo continuous production, in the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the decorative design is fixedly stopped and the display result is derived and displayed, in each display area of the left design, the middle design, and the right design. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then displayed again in a variable manner. By executing the pseudo-relational effect, as if within the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed once, that is, within the variable display period of the decorative symbol based on the 1 variation pattern command corresponding to 1 reserved memory, It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed plural times.

  In the pseudo continuous effect shown in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern made up of numbers is temporarily stopped in the display area of the left symbol and the display area of the right symbol, and then the character "NEXT" is displayed in the display area of the middle symbol. After the pseudo continuous symbol (in this example, the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 displayed as “NEXT” shown in FIGS. 13-9 (5) and 13-10 (10)) is temporarily stopped, the left The variable display of the decorative symbol in each display area of the symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is restarted (so-called revariation is performed). Here, the "state in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped" is a state in which the decorative pattern does not completely stop and moves slightly up and down, but is not limited to this, a state in which the decorative pattern is swinging, It may be a state in which the decorative pattern is repeatedly expanded or reduced, or a state in which the decorative pattern is in a different form (deformed) from the final stop (when the pattern is fixed).

(Countdown production)
In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 based on the variable pattern accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the display area of the middle symbol (the re-variation is performed. It is possible to execute a countdown effect of notifying the remaining time (until it is notified) in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Here, as described below, when the countdown effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is always executed, but the pseudo continuous effect may be executed without executing the countdown effect.

  In the countdown effect in the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the sub liquid crystal is displayed at a timing when the remaining time until the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the display area of the middle symbol is 3 seconds. "3" is displayed on the display 35TM300, "2" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the remaining time is 2 seconds, and "2" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the remaining time is 1 second. "1" is displayed, and "0" is displayed at the timing when the remaining time is 0 seconds (timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the display area of the medium symbol). The remaining time until the temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the countdown effect is displayed by an image simulating a 7-segment display.

  In this way, as the time (seconds) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the countdown effect, "3" which is set as the initial value is displayed first. After that, the countdown operation is performed, so that the time (seconds) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 decreases by 1 every 1 second, and at the timing when the final value becomes “0”. Pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped in the display area of the medium symbols. That is, it is notified that the re-change will be executed.

  In addition, when the variable display is executed based on a variation pattern involving a plurality of pseudo continuous effects, and when it is determined to execute the countdown effect, the countdown effect is corresponding to each pseudo continuous effect. Will be executed. That is, the same number of countdown effects as the pseudo continuous effects are executed within one variable display period of the decorative pattern based on one fluctuation pattern (reserved storage).

  In this example, the initial value of the countdown effect is "3" regardless of the variation pattern and the display result. As a result, when "3" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the player immediately starts the countdown until the suggestive effect with high jackpot expectation (in this example, the pseudo effect) is executed. It is possible to understand that.

(Expectation degree notice production)
Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined when the variation display of the special symbol is started by the game control microcomputer 100 (variation pattern setting process shown in S111 of FIG. 5). At that time, it may be determined to a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach. For example, in a variation pattern involving super reach, after a reach state is established in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, a battle effect in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle with each other is executed (FIGS. 13-11 (13) and (18)). If the final display result is a big hit (when the big hit symbol stops fixed), the teammate character executes a victory effect to win over the enemy character, and if the final display result is a miss (the hit symbol is fixed) In the case of stopping), a defeat effect in which the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character is executed.

  The expectation notice production in the present embodiment is a notice for notifying the victory expectation degree (that is, the jackpot expectation degree) in which the teammate character wins the enemy character in the battle presentation. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), the numerical bar 35TM610 is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 after the reach state is established (after the battle effect is started), and the entire width of the numerical bar 35TM610 is displayed. With respect to the ratio of the range of the colored part (0 to 100%), the expectation of winning (the expectation of jackpot) is suggested. The victory expectation degree indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 is updated by 10 every 5 seconds after the initial value is indicated, and finally reaches the final value. When the victory expectation degree indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 reaches the final value, the victory expectation degree indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 is not updated even after 5 seconds from the timing.

(Count up production)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a count-up effect in which the expectation of winning is displayed as a numerical value (numerical value) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in correspondence with the expectation notice effect executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. . Here, as will be described later, when the count-up effect is executed, the expectation notice effect is always executed, but when the expectation notice effect is executed without the count-up effect being executed. There is also.

  In the count-up effect, the degree of expectation of winning indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a two-digit numerical value (number). Therefore, the degree of expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is updated by 10 every 5 seconds after the initial value is displayed, and finally reaches the final value. When the expectation of victory (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value, the degree of expectation of victory (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is not updated even after 5 seconds from the timing. .

  In this way, the expectation of victory indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the expectation of victory indicated by numerical value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 match, and the expectation of victory indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 is the same. In response to the change from the initial value to the final value, the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 also changes from the initial value to the final value.

  The numerical value as the degree of expectation of victory displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is displayed by an image simulating a 7-segment display as in the case of the countdown effect. However, unlike the case of the countdown effect described above, the initial value and the final value of the countup effect are respectively provided in plural, and the jackpot expectation degree is determined according to the combination of the initial value and the final value (that is, the change pattern). It is different. In addition, the display mode is changed according to the degree of expectation of victory (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In this example, the degree of expectation of victory (numerical value) is in the range of "50" to "70". If it is, it is displayed in blue, and if it is in the range of "80" to "100", it is displayed in red. Further, when the expectation of victory (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value, the player is informed that the expectation of victory has reached the final value by blinking the numerical value. I am trying.

  In this way, in the count-up effect, as the victory expectation degree displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the value (50 to 90 in this example) set as the initial value is displayed first. After that, a count-up operation is performed based on the determined change pattern (number of changes), so that the victory expectation degree displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 increases by 10 every 5 seconds, and finally, The final display mode is set when the value (60 to 100 in this example) is reached. That is, the final winning expectation (big hit expectation) is notified by the blinking numerical value.

(Variation start effect determination process)
As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the special symbol process process (step S25), the CPU 103 displays the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the random number value for determining the display result. The “big hit” or “out” and the big hit type in the case of “big hit” are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by using the random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of the preliminary determination of the display result.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination table for deviation shown in FIG. 13-6 (A) when the predetermined display result is “disconnection”. In this example, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode but the display result is out of alignment, and the variation pattern of the non-reach is the reach mode, and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode. ) Is performed, a variation pattern of the out-of-reach is provided. As the variation patterns of the out-of-reach, the variation patterns of the out-of-reach (without pseudo-relation) in which the pseudo continuous production is not executed and the variation in the out-of-reach (one pseudo-repeation) where the pseudo-reproduction is performed only once. There are provided a pattern and a variation pattern of out-of-reach (pseudo continuous twice) in which the pseudo continuous production is executed twice.

  In the example of FIG. 13-6 (A), a variation pattern of non-reach loss is determined at a rate of 90%, a variation pattern of out-of-reach loss (no pseudo-relation) is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 4%. Therefore, the variation pattern of out-of-reach (pseudo-repeated once) is determined, and the variation pattern of out-of-reach (two pseudo-repeated) is determined at a rate of 1%.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined display result is “big hit”, the CPU 103 determines the change pattern based on the big hit change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). In this example, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the super reach jackpot variation pattern in which the super reach reach effect (battle effect) is executed. A variation pattern, a variation pattern of a super reach big hit (pseudo consecutive 1 time) in which the pseudo continuous production is executed only once, and a variation pattern of a super reach big hit (pseudo consecutive 2 times) in which the pseudo continuous production is executed twice. , Are provided.

  In the example of FIG. 13-6 (B), the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot (without pseudo-repeating) is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot (one pseudo-repetition) is determined at a rate of 40%. Then, the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot (pseudo continuous twice) is determined at a rate of 50%.

  In this way, when the variation pattern of super reach is selected, the jackpot is more likely to occur than when the variation pattern of super reach is not selected. In addition, in the variation pattern of super reach, the ratio of big hits is higher when the pseudo continuous effect is executed than when the pseudo continuous effect is not executed, and when the pseudo continuous effect is executed only once. The proportion of big hits is higher when the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice. That is, the jackpot expectation in the change pattern of super reach has a relationship of super reach (no pseudo-repeating) <super reach (1 pseudo-repeating) <super reach (2 pseudo-repeating).

  In addition, in this example, the example in which the pseudo continuous effect may be executed up to two times is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the pseudo continuous effect may be executed three times or more. May be. Further, the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect that can be selected only when the big hit occurs may be set. For example, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed four times, the big hit always occurs, that is, the super reach big hit (pseudo It may be configured such that the variation pattern of four consecutive times is provided, but the variation pattern of out of super reach (four pseudo consecutive times) is not provided.

  The CPU 103, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation command for designating the display result, the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern, and the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation Command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

  CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved) for designating that the reserved storage number has been subtracted Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating the display result (big hit or off, big hit type in case of big hit), and variation time of special symbol and effect contents ( Reach and pseudo-relationship, etc.) variation pattern command to specify, a set of commands received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol It is possible to specify the variation time and the effect contents (reach, pseudo-relationship, etc.). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the microcomputer 100 for game control, the special symbol (first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished and the display result is derived.

  FIG. 13-5 is a flowchart showing the variation start time effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands that accompany the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. While setting a production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute production) based on the command and the variation pattern designation command, a decorative pattern based on the designated variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-5.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the anticipation degree notice effect based on the expectation degree notice effect execution ratio determination table (see FIGS. 13-6 (C) and (D)) (step S35TM1010). .

  FIG. 13-6 (C) shows the execution ratio of the expectation notice production in the case where the display result is disappointing, and is a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation notice production is executed for each of the deviation variation patterns. Has been allocated. When the variation pattern is “out of reach”, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “out of super reach (no pseudo-relation)”, it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 90%, and to execute at a rate of 10%. When the variation pattern is “out of super reach (one pseudo-repeating)”, it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 80%, and to execute at a rate of 20%. . When the variation pattern is “out of super reach (two pseudo-repetitions)”, it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 70% and at a rate of 30%. .

  FIG. 13-6 (D) is an execution rate of the expectation notice production when the display result is a big hit, and is a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the expectation notice production for each of the big hit variation patterns. Has been allocated. When the variation pattern is “super reach jackpot (without pseudo-repeating)”, the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 40%, and executes it at a rate of 60%. To decide. When the variation pattern is “super reach big hit (pseudo continuous one time)”, it is decided not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 30%, and it is decided to execute at a rate of 70%. . When the variation pattern is “super reach jackpot (pseudo consecutive twice)”, it is decided not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute at a rate of 80%. ..

  In this way, in the case of super-reach, the proportion of expectation notice productions executed is higher than in the case of non-super-reach, and in the case of super-reach, the more the pseudo-reproduction productions are executed, The rate of expectation notice production is increased. As described above, the larger the number of times the pseudo-relationship production is executed, the higher the jackpot expectation is. Therefore, when the expectation notice production is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the expectation notice production is not executed. Is high.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation notice production (YES in step S35TM1020), the final display mode (final value) of the expectation notice production is finally displayed. A determination is made based on the mode determination table (see FIG. 13-6 (E)) (step S35TM1030). On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production (NO in step S35TM1020), the process proceeds to step S35TM1090 described later.

  FIG. 13-6 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode of the expectation notice production. As shown in FIG. 13-6 (E), in the present embodiment, according to the display result, “60”, “70”, “80”, “90”, and It is possible to determine any numerical value of “100”, and a determination value is assigned to each of these numerical values.

  As shown in FIG. 13-6 (E), when the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “out”), the end of the expectation notice production is performed. The display mode is “60” at a rate of 40%, “70” at a rate of 30%, “80” at a rate of 20%, “90” at a rate of 10%, and “0” at a rate of 0%. 100 ". On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the final display mode of the anticipation notice production is 9%. The ratio is 60 ", 15% is" 70 ", 30% is" 80 ", 45% is" 90 ", and 1% is" 100 ".

  In this way, the final display mode of the expectation notice production is a big hit as the victory expectation degree (the ratio of the range of the colored portion to the entire width of the numeric bar 35TM610) indicated by the numeric bar 35TM610 increases. The ratio is high, and the jackpot expectation degree has a relationship of “60” <“70” <“80” <“90” <“100”. Further, when the final display mode of the expectation notice production is "100", it is decided that a big hit will be made.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode change pattern and the initial value of the expectation notice production on the basis of the display mode change pattern determination table of the expectation notice production (see FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G)). (Step S35TM1040).

  FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G) are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the display mode change pattern of the expectation notice production. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the expectation notice production is executed and the final display mode of the expectation notice is determined, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode with respect to the determined final display manner. Any initial value (first display mode) is determined. In this example, any one of "50", "60", "70", "80", and "90" can be determined as the initial value of the expectation notice presentation effect. On the other hand, a judgment value is assigned to each.

  As shown in FIG. 13-6 (F), when the display result is "disappearance" (that is, when the determination result designated by the display result designation command is "disappearance"), the determined expectation notice presentation effect is displayed. When the final display mode is "60", the initial value is set to "50" at a rate of 100% (the number of changes is 1). That is, in the case where the final display mode is “60”, there is no change pattern other than the change pattern that changes the minimum initial value “50” to the final value “60”. The initial value is determined to be "50".

  Further, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is "70", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 40% (the number of changes is 2 times), and the initial value at a rate of 60%. The value is determined to be "60" (the number of changes is 1). Further, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is “80”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 20% (the number of changes is 3 times), and the initial value at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (the number of changes is 2), and the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 50% (the number of changes is 1). Further, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is "90", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 10% (the number of changes is 4 times) and the initial value is at a rate of 20%. The value is determined to be “60” (the number of changes is 3 times), the initial value is determined to be “70” at a rate of 30% (the number of changes is 2 times), and the initial value is determined to be “80” at a rate of 40%. (1 change).

  As shown in FIG. 13-6 (G), when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the determined expectation notice effect When the final display mode is "60", the initial value is set to "50" at a rate of 100% (the number of changes is 1). That is, in the case where the final display mode is “60”, there is no change pattern other than the change pattern that changes the minimum initial value “50” to the final value “60”. The initial value is determined to be "50".

  Further, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is "70", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 60% (the number of changes is 2 times) and the initial value is at a rate of 40%. The value is determined to be “60” (the number of changes is 1). In addition, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is “80”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 50% (the number of changes is 3 times), and the initial value is set at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be “60” (the number of changes is 2), and the initial value is determined to be “70” at a rate of 20% (the number of changes is 1). Further, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is "90", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 40% (the number of changes is 4 times), and the initial value at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (the number of changes is 3 times), the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 20% (the number of changes is 2 times), and the initial value is determined to be "80" at a rate of 10%. (1 change). Further, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is "100", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 35% (the number of changes is 5 times), and the initial value is at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (4 changes), the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 20% (3 changes), and the initial value is determined to be "80" at a rate of 10%. (The number of changes is 2) The initial value is determined to be "90" at a rate of 5% (the number of changes is 1).

  In this way, when the display mode change pattern and the initial value of the expectation notification effect are determined, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the count-up effect corresponding to the execution of the expectation notification effect (step S35TM1050). ). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the count-up effect, based on the table for determining whether or not to execute the count-up effect shown in FIG. 13-7 (H).

  As shown in FIG. 13-7 (H), in this embodiment, the determination value is assigned such that the execution ratio of the count-up effect is different depending on the display result. When the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), it is determined that the count-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. It decides to carry out at the rate of%. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the count-up effect at a rate of 25%. , Decide to execute at a rate of 75%.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the expectation notice production is executed, there are cases where the count-up production is executed and cases where the count-up production is not executed, and when the count-up production is executed, , The percentage of big hits is higher than when the count-up effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the count-up effect is executed, the expectation notice effect is always executed.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the count-up effect (YES in step S35TM1060), it determines the final display mode of the count-up effect (step S35TM1070), and further changes the display mode of the count-up effect. The pattern and the initial value are determined (step S35TM1080). Then, the process proceeds to step S35TM1090. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the count-up effect (NO in step S35TM1060), the process directly proceeds to step S35TM1090.

  Here, as described above, in the expectation notice performance executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the expectation of victory indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 (the ratio of the range of the colored portion to the entire width (100%) (0 % To 100%)) and the expectation of victory indicated by a numerical value in the count-up effect executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are in a matched state. Therefore, the final value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same value as the winning expectation degree finally indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 in the expectation notice effect, that is, the value determined in step S35TM1030 (step S35TM1070). Further, the change pattern of the expectation of victory shown as a numerical value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same pattern as the change pattern of the expectation of victory shown by the numerical value bar 35TM610 in the expectation notice effect, that is, the pattern determined in step S35TM1040. (Step S35TM1080). In addition, the initial value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same value as the winning expectation degree first indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 in the expectation notice effect, that is, the value determined in step S35TM1040 (step S35TM1080).

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the expectation notice production and the display mode of the count-up production corresponding thereto are increased by 10 from the first display mode (initial value) to the final display mode (final value). Assuming that the configuration is such that the initial value is “n”, it changes stepwise to the final value such as “n + 10”, “n + 20”, “n + 30”, ... For each change. In addition, the change pattern of the expectation notice announcement effect and the change pattern of the count-up effect corresponding thereto change at least once (10) from the first display mode (initial value). When the display mode (initial value) is “n”, the minimum value of the final display mode (final value) is “n + 10”.

  As shown in FIG. 13-6 (E), regarding the expectation notice production and the corresponding count-up production, the higher the final value of the victory expectation, the higher the jackpot expectation. Here, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the initial value determined based on the final value of the expectation of victory, that is, according to the change pattern and the number of changes. For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G), when the final value of the victory expectation degree is “90”, when the initial value is “50” (the number of changes is 4 times), the jackpot expectation degree is Is the highest, and when the initial value is "60" (3 changes), the big hit expectation is the second highest, and when the initial value is "70" (2 changes), the big hit expectation is 3. It is the second highest, and when the initial value is "80" (the number of changes is 1), the jackpot expectation is the lowest. In this way, when the final value of the winning expectation is “N (70 ≦ N)”, the jackpot expectation is highest when the initial value is “50”, and when the initial value is “N-10”. Has the lowest expectation of a big hit. That is, the larger the variation of the winning expectation from the initial value (the greater the number of changes), the higher the jackpot expectation.

  As described above, with regard to the expectation notice production and the corresponding count-up production, since the big hit expectation is different according to the initial value and the change pattern (the number of changes), the expectation notice production is performed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. The initial value and the change pattern (the number of changes) when it is executed, and the initial value and the change pattern (the number of changes) when the count-up effect is executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 corresponding to this, let the player It can be noticed.

  In step S35TM1090, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern involving pseudo continuous production. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is executed once or more during the variable display period of the decorative pattern to be started. When the variation pattern does not involve the pseudo continuous effect (YES in step S35TM1090), the variation start time effect determination process ends. When the variation pattern is accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect (NO in step S35TM1090), it is determined whether or not to execute the countdown effect (step S35TM1100), and the variation start time effect determination process is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 13-7 (I), in this embodiment, the determination values are assigned such that the execution ratio of the countdown effect is different depending on the display result. When the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), it is determined that the countdown effect is not executed at a rate of 55%, and 45% Decide to run at a rate of. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), it is decided not to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 40%, It is decided to execute at a rate of 60%.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, there are times when the countdown effect is executed and times when the countdown effect is not executed. When the countdown effect is executed, the countdown effect is The jackpot rate is higher than when it is not executed. On the other hand, when the countdown effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is always executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, when the count-up effect corresponding to the expectation notice effect is executed, the count-down effect corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect is executed. The expectation for a big hit is higher than if it is done. As a result, the player pays attention to which effect, the count-up effect or the count-down effect, is performed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the interest of the effect of updating the numerical value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. Can be made.

  Regarding the big hit expectation degree, the big hit expectation degree is the highest when both the countdown effect and the count up effect are executed, and the countdown effect is not executed but the count up effect is secondly hit. The expectation is high and the countdown effect is executed, but the countup effect is not executed. The expectation for the big hit is third highest. Has become.

(Specific examples of countdown effect and countup effect)
Next, specific examples of the countdown effect and the countup effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-8 to 13-11. FIG. 13-8 is a time chart when both the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed, and FIGS. 13-9 to 13-11 show the main liquid crystal when both the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image displayed on indicator 35TM200 and sub liquid crystal indicator 35TM300.

  In the example shown below, the pseudo continuous effect is determined to be the variation pattern of the super reach executed twice, the expectation notice effect is determined to be executed, and both the countdown effect and the count up effect are executed. It is assumed that the performance is decided to be executed.

  First, FIG. 13-9 (1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is performing the variable display of the left, right, and right decorative patterns (the variable display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-8). Shows. At this time, although nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. In, the entire character is displayed. The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position which overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear directions.

  At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a reduced state, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. By having the property, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. When (while at the timing of T2A shown in FIG. 13-8), depending on the timing of 3 seconds before the temporary stop timing of the first pseudo-relational pattern determined based on the variation pattern. Then, the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays the initial value of the countdown effect (in this example, “3” in white mode) to start the first countdown effect.

  Then, the decorations of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position are simultaneously moved to the effect position (T2A to T2B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character part of "FEV" and the character part of "ER!" Are not separated but are integrally moved from the origin position to the effect position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a presentation position overlapping front and rear in a front view, so that the visibility of the lower portion of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is reduced. It is in a state.

  Next, at the timing 1 second after the timing T2A in FIG. 13-8 (timing T3 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main liquid crystal display device to display, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (3). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, a countdown operation for reducing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed. Then, the updated value (“2” in white mode in this example) is displayed.

  Next, at a timing 1 second after the timing T3 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T4 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main liquid crystal display device to display as shown in FIG. 13-9 (4). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, a countdown operation for reducing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed. Then, the updated value (in this example, the white mode “1”) is displayed.

  Next, at the timing 1 second after the timing T4 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T5 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main liquid crystal display device to display, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (5). 35TM200 design display area 5L decorative pattern (in this example, a numerical design "2") is temporarily stopped, the design display area 5R is a decorative design (in this example, a numerical design "4") is temporarily stopped Then, the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. In addition, in accordance with the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C, a countdown operation for reducing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed, and the final value after updating (in this example, The white mode “0”) is displayed.

  Then, the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position are simultaneously moved to the origin position (T6A to T6B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" Are not separated but are integrally moved from the effect position to the origin position. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position overlapping the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front view, so that the visibility in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. ing.

  Next, at a timing 1 second after the timing T5 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T6B in FIG. 13-8), as shown in FIG. 13-9 (6), the symbol display area 5L of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is displayed. In the symbol display area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the first re-variation display of the decorative symbol is executed and the first countdown effect is finished. In this example, the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (in this example, “0” in the white mode) is erased to return to the state where the value related to the countdown effect is not displayed. At this time, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position overlapping the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (7). In response (at the timing of T7A shown in FIG. 13-8), according to the timing 3 seconds before the temporary stop timing of the first pseudo-relational pattern determined based on the variation pattern. Then, the second countdown effect is started by displaying the initial value of the countdown effect (in this example, “3” in the white mode) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Then, the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position are simultaneously moved to the effect position (T7A to T7B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character part of "FEV" and the character part of "ER!" Are not separated but are integrally moved from the origin position to the effect position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a presentation position overlapping front and rear in a front view, so that the visibility of the lower portion of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is reduced. It is in a state.

  Next, at a timing 1 second after the timing T7A in FIG. 13-8 (timing T8 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main liquid crystal display device to display, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (8). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, a countdown operation for reducing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed. Then, the updated value (“2” in white mode in this example) is displayed.

  Next, at a timing 1 second after the timing T8 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T9 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main liquid crystal display device to display, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (9). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, the countdown operation for reducing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed. Then, the updated value (“1” in white mode in this example) is displayed.

  Next, at a timing 1 second after the timing T9 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T10 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main liquid crystal display device to display, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (10). 35TM200 design display area 5L decorative pattern (in this example, the numerical design "3") is temporarily stopped, the design display area 5R decorative pattern (in this example, the numerical design "5") is temporarily stopped Then, the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. In addition, in accordance with the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C, a countdown operation for reducing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed, and the final value after updating (in this example, The white mode “0”) is displayed.

  Then, the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position are simultaneously moved to the origin position (T11A to T11B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" Are not separated but are integrally moved from the effect position to the origin position. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position overlapping the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front view, so that the visibility in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. ing.

  Next, at a timing 1 second after the timing of T10 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T11B in FIG. 13-8), FIG. In the area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the second variation display of the decorative symbol is executed and the second countdown effect is finished. In this example, the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (in this example, “0” in the white mode) is erased to return to the state where the value related to the countdown effect is not displayed. At this time, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position overlapping the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (12), the effect control CPU 120 displays "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern “” is stopped and displayed to reach the state, and the character “REACH !!” is displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing T12 in FIG. 13-8).

  After the reach state is established, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect according to the variation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (13). Here, the ally character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606 are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 along with the execution of the battle effect (timing of T13 in FIG. 13-8).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, at the timing immediately after the battle effect is started based on the variation pattern (timing of T14A in FIG. 13-8), as shown in FIG. And the count-up effect is executed. That is, when the expectation notice production is started, the battle presentation is temporarily suspended to hide the ally character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606, and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters of "winning expectation", and The numerical bar 35TM610 is displayed, and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is caused to display the determined initial value as the count-up effect is started.

  In this example, it is assumed that the initial value of the expectation notice production and the count-up production are determined to be 70 and the final value thereof is determined to be 90 (that is, the change pattern of the number of change times of 2 is determined). Based on this, initially, the ratio of the colored portion in the numerical value bar 35TM610 is “70”% of the entire bar, and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays “70”. In addition, in response to the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 being in the range of “50” to “70”, the numerical value “70” is displayed in blue on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The effect control CPU 120 starts the count-up effect and, at the same time, moves the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 from the origin position to the effect position (T14A to T14B). As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and attention is paid to the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the count-up effect is executed, and the change pattern from the initial value to the final value. Can be made. The timing for moving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 from the origin position to the presentation position to improve the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is before the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Alternatively, it may be after the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Next, at a timing 5 seconds after the timing of T14A of FIG. 13-8 (timing of T15 of FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the numerical bar 35TM610 to display, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (15). Count-up operation to update the ratio occupied by the colored part from "70"% to "80"% of the entire bar and to increase the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 10 from "70" to "80". (1st change). In addition, in response to the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 being in the range of “80” to “100”, the numerical value of “80” is displayed in red on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. .

  Next, at a timing 5 seconds after the timing T15 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T16 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value bar 35TM610 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (16). Count-up operation to update the ratio occupied by the colored part from "80"% to "90"% of the entire bar and to increase the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 10 from "80" to "90". (2nd change). In addition, in response to the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 being in the range of “80” to “100”, the numerical value of “90” is displayed in red on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. .

  Next, at a timing 5 seconds after the timing T16 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T17 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value bar 35TM610 as shown in FIG. 13-11 (17). The display mode is not changed according to the fact that the proportion occupied by the colored portion reaches the final value (“90”% of the entire bar), and the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is the final value (“90”). ") Is reached, the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is blinked (" 90 "is blinked in a red mode). As a result, the player is informed that the display state of the expectation notice production and the count-up production has reached the final display state and no further update will be performed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value (“90”), it is not immediately notified that the final value has been reached (FIG. 13). In (T16) of -8 and the timing of (16) in FIG. 13-11 (without blinking mode immediately), in a mode (for example, 5 seconds), a mode (non-flash mode) suggesting that there is a possibility of change. The information is displayed, and then, the fact that the final value has been reached is notified (changed to a blinking mode at the timing of (T17) in FIG. 13-8 and FIG. 13-11 (17)). By doing so, the player cannot immediately know whether or not the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is the final value, that is, whether or not there is room for further change. The interest in the numerical value displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be maintained.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position to the origin position (T18A to T18B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" Are not separated but are integrally moved from the effect position to the origin position. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position overlapping the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front view, so that the visibility in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. ing.

  Next, at a timing 5 seconds after the timing T17 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T18B in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. And, the count-up effect is ended, the battle effect is restarted, and the ally character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606 are displayed again. With the end of the expectation notice production, the character and numerical value bar 35TM610 of “winning expectation” are hidden on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the numerical value indicating the expectation of victory is also hidden on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Here, as described above, in T18A to T18B of FIG. 13-8, since the ornaments of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is displayed. The visibility is improved and the player can concentrate on the battle production.

  Thus, the countdown effect accompanied by the subtraction operation of the displayed numerical values shown in FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5) and FIGS. 13-10 (7) to (10), and FIG. 13-11 (14). Since the count-up effect accompanied by the addition operation of the displayed numerical values shown in (17) to (17) can be executed in the common sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the numerical value updating operation executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be performed. It is possible to diversify the accompanying effect and improve the interest of the effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  In addition, a countdown effect and a countup effect are provided as effects accompanied by different types of update operations (subtraction, addition), but the numerical values are shown by images simulating a 7-segment display for any type of effects. By performing such an effect on the common sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to provide consistency as an effect and to effectively use a common display area to create multiple types of effects. Can be run.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in response to the pseudo continuous effect being executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the countdown effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 from 3 seconds before the pseudo continuous effect is executed. In response to the expectation notice effect being executed on the liquid crystal display 35TM200, the count-up effect is simultaneously executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 at the same time as the expectation notice effect. In this way, a countdown effect is provided in correspondence with the pseudo continuous effect as one effect that suggests the big hit expectation degree, and a count up effect corresponding to the expectation notice announcement effect as the other effect that suggests the big hit expectation degree. By providing, the correspondence relationship between the effects is clarified.

  In the present embodiment, as the operations executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect and a countup operation corresponding to the expectation notice announcement effect are provided. The former action causes the numerical value to decrease and the latter action causes the numerical value to increase, which is a completely contradictory operation. Therefore, the player has the effect corresponding to the simulated continuous effect and the expectation notice announcement effect. It is possible to clearly distinguish the corresponding production.

  In the countdown effect, 3 seconds before the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped, "3" is displayed as the initial value, and the update format is such that 1 is subtracted every 1 second, while in the count up effect. Immediately after the start of the battle effect, any of "50" to "90" is displayed as an initial value, and 10 is added every 5 seconds, which is an updating method. In this way, by varying the initial value and the change pattern of each effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the player can easily understand which effect is being executed. Furthermore, the subtraction cycle (1 second in this example) of the countdown effect and the addition cycle (5 seconds in this example) of the count-up effect are made different, so that the player can execute which effect. You can easily grasp what is going on.

  The sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the countdown effect is executed and the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the countup effect is executed may be different. Well, the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 when the countdown effect is executed may be different from the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 when the count up effect is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the numerical range “0 to 3” in the countdown effect does not overlap with the numerical range “50 to 100” in the countup effect, so the effect being executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding. Not limited to such a form, the numerical range in the countdown effect may partially overlap with the numerical range in the countup effect. For example, the countdown effect may be subtracted from the initial value “10”. Alternatively, the count-up effect may be added from the initial value “10”. According to this, when the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to focus on which effect is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the countdown effect, the numerical value is displayed in white regardless of the numerical value range. On the other hand, in the count-up effect, the numerical value is displayed in the blue mode (“50” to “70”) or the red mode (“80” to “100”) according to the numerical range, and the final value is set to the blinking mode. . In this way, by making the display mode of the numerical value during execution of the countdown effect different from the display mode of the numerical value during execution of the countup effect, it is possible to further clarify the difference between the countdown effect and the countup effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, within one variable display period, the countdown effect is executed in the periods T2A to T6B and T7A to T11B in FIG. 13-8, and the period T14A to T18B in FIG. 13-8. Now we are performing a count-up production. In this way, the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed at different timings so that the countdown effect execution period and the countup effect execution period do not overlap (when one effect is being performed on the other, By not performing the effect), it is possible to prevent the effect from being complicated and to perform both the countdown effect and the count-up effect in the common area (in this example, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).

  Further, in this embodiment, in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 different from the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in which the count-up effect is executed, the number bar 35TM610 is displayed in a mode that matches the value displayed in the count-up effect. Will be. That is, the numerical value displayed in the count-up effect and the proportion occupied by the colored portion in the numerical value bar 35TM610 match. In this way, the display effect is further enhanced by displaying the winning expectation degree, which is the common effect information, in different modes by using different display devices such as the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 and the main liquid crystal display device 35TM200. it can.

(1) In the above embodiment, the example in which the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed is shown as the effect associated with the display result of the variable display being executed, but the invention is not limited to such an embodiment and is executed. A countdown effect or a countup effect may be executed as the look-ahead notice effect related to the display result of the variable display. Specifically, based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize, the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display (target change) based on the starting prize is executed is performed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 every time the variable display is executed. You may make it perform the production which counts down. In addition, based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize, until the variable display (target change) based on the starting prize is executed, the big hit expectation degree of the target change is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 every time the variable display is executed. You may make it perform the production which counts up. As in these examples, the countdown effect and the countup effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the pseudo-relational pattern, which is a decorative pattern that suggests that the re-variation of the decorative pattern is executed, is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-relational effect is executed. Not limited to such a form, when the pseudo-relational effect is executed, a predetermined pattern including a decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern made of numbers) that can appear or can be definitely stopped even when the pseudo-reciprocal effect is not executed The combination of the decorative symbols (for example, the combination of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol being “2”, “4”, “6”) may be temporarily stopped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped, first, the left design and the right design are provisionally stopped, and finally the middle design is temporarily stopped. Not limited, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may be temporarily stopped at the same time.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example in which the initial value of the countdown effect is always "3" (the countdown effect is started 3 seconds before the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped) has been described. Not limited to the form, a plurality of initial values may be selectable at different ratios according to the variation pattern or the display result. For example, when the number of times the pseudo-repeating is performed is one, in the first countdown effect, the ratio of "3" being the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" being the initial value is 20%. If the number of executions of the pseudo-repeating is two, the ratio of “3” as the initial value is 20% and the ratio of “5” as the initial value is 80% in the first countdown effect. May be. Also, when the display result is out of proportion, in the countdown effect, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 20%, but when the display result is a big hit. In the countdown effect, the ratio of "3" as the initial value may be 20% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value may be 80%.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, when the change pattern of the super reach involving the pseudo continuous production is determined twice, and when it is determined to execute the countdown production, the pseudo continuous production is performed twice. Although the example in which the countdown effect corresponding to each is executed (the countdown effect is executed the same number of times as the pseudo continuous effect) is shown, the invention is not limited to such a form, and a super reach involving two pseudo continuous effects is performed. When the change pattern is determined, there may be an effect pattern in which the countdown effect is executed for one pseudo linked effect, but the countdown effect is not executed for another simulated linked effect. You can

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the pseudo continuous effect is always executed when the countdown effect is executed is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed even when the countdown effect is executed. The production may not be executed in some cases. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the expectation notice production is executed whenever the count-up production is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the count-up production is executed. The expectation notice production may not be executed in some cases.

(6) In the above embodiment, the example is shown in which the CPU 120 for effect control displays the numerical value of the countdown effect and the numerical value of the countup effect as an image simulating a 7-segment display on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Not limited to such a form, an actual 7-segment display is provided in place of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the light emission control of the 7-segment display is performed, whereby the numerical value of the countdown effect and the numerical value of the count-up effect are obtained. May be displayed (light emission).

(7) In the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the effect control CPU 120 allows the number of remaining fluctuations that can be controlled to the time saving state (the number of times of saving) and the number of remaining fluctuations that can be controlled to the probable variation state (the number of STs (special time)). It is possible to display the number of rounds in the big hit game state. During the period in which the information (numerical value) related to these gaming states is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown effect or count up is performed compared to the period in which the information (numerical values) related to these gaming states is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. You may make it the ratio in which an effect is performed low. According to such a configuration, in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to limit the simultaneous display of the numerical value of the countdown effect or the numerical value of the count up effect and the information (numerical value) related to the game state, so that the player can enjoy more. It is possible to give priority to the important latter.

(8) In the above embodiment, the countdown effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in correspondence with the pseudo-reminder effect as the first suggestion effect executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is operated. The example in which the count-up effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 corresponding to the expectation notice effect as the second suggestion effect to be executed is shown. Not limited to such a form, the countdown effect is executed corresponding to the first suggestive effect, and the countdown effect is executed corresponding to the second suggestive effect (for example, the remaining time until the expectation notice effect is counted down). You can do so. On the contrary, the count-up effect may be executed corresponding to the second suggestive effect, and the count-up effect may be executed corresponding to the first suggestive effect. In this way, the numerical value updating operation corresponding to the first suggestive effect and the numerical value updating operation corresponding to the second suggestive effect may be common.

  Further, there are a case where the countdown effect is executed corresponding to the first suggestive effect, and a case where the countup effect is executed, and a case where the countup effect is executed corresponding to the second suggestive effect, and a countdown. There may be a case where an effect is executed. In this way, it is possible to execute effects involving different types of actions corresponding to the common suggestive effect.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, both the countdown effect and the count-up effect are display devices different from the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in which the pseudo continuous effect as the suggestive effect and the expectation notice effect are executed. Although the example executed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and one or both of the countdown effect and the countup effect execute the pseudo-relation effect and the expectation notice effect that are suggestive effects. The main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be executed.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, in the countdown effect, an example in which the remaining time until the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is updated by subtraction, but the remaining time until another effect is executed is updated by subtraction. Alternatively, for example, the remaining time until the movable accessory such as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 operates may be subtracted and updated. Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the count-up effect, the example in which the numerical value related to the jackpot expectation degree is added and updated is shown, but the numerical values related to other indicators may be added and updated, for example, You may make it add and update the elapsed time after movable movable objects, such as the 1st logo panel 35TM410 and the 2nd logo panel 35TM420, moved to a production position.

(Example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value and a countup effect of adding an numerical value, and it is possible to execute the countdown effect and the countup effect in the sub liquid crystal display which is a common area. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illustrated as such a gaming machine, the gaming machine having such a configuration is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and may be a slot machine.

  The slot machine includes a variable display device having a plurality of reels (for example, three reels of a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) on the outer peripheral portion of which a plurality of types of symbols as identification information are drawn. The player sets the number of bets (1 to 3 medals) and operates the start lever to start rotation of each reel, and the player operates the stop button provided corresponding to each reel. Thus, the rotation is stopped within the range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. Then, a prize is generated according to the display result derived when all the reels are stopped rotating (or according to the internal lottery result regardless of the display result).

  There are various types of winning combinations, such as a small winning combination, a special winning combination, and a replaying combination. Here, in winning a small winning combination, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small winning combination. In the winning of the special role, the player can obtain a benefit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus (RB) or a big bonus (BB). In the replay winning combination, it is possible to gain the advantage that the next game can be played without consuming a new medal for setting the bet number.

  In such a slot machine, after the bonus is over, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the reduction amount of the gaming value by increasing the winning probability of the re-playing role as compared with the normal time, as a state advantageous to the player. There is one that controls the replay time (which will be referred to as RT) that is possible and ends the RT when an end condition including winning a predetermined falling winning combination is satisfied. In addition, there is one in which the effect state can be controlled at an assist time (referred to as AT) that is a notification period during which a navigation effect (for example, pushing order is guided) for informing the internal lottery result can be executed. A state in which the game state is RT and the effect state is controlled by AT is also referred to as assist replay time (ART). By the main control unit sets a flag corresponding to each gaming state, a winning combination, etc., and executes a process corresponding to the set flag (including transmission of a production control command to the sub control unit) The game is controlled.

  The lottery for the roles, the lottery for the AT, the lottery for the RT, the lottery for the ART, and the additional lottery for the number of times AT, RT, and ART are stored in the RAM at the start of the game (immediately after the start switch is operated), for example. The game is performed based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag, and the winning flag of the winning combination is stored. Whether or not the winning combination is actually established is determined by the winning flag and the operation timing of the stop button stored in the RAM.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above-described embodiment includes a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as a first display device, a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a second display device, and a movable body 32. As described above, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are light-transmissive ornaments, are provided, but similarly in the slot machine, the main liquid crystal display as the first display device and the second logo panel 35TM420 are also provided. A sub liquid crystal display as a display device may be provided, and the movable body may be provided with a first logo panel and a second logo panel which are decorative bodies having a light transmitting property.

  In such a slot machine, the sub control unit can control the remaining number of times (AT number) that can be controlled to the AT state, the remaining number of times (RT number) that can be controlled to the RT state, and the ART state in the sub liquid crystal display. The remaining number of times (number of ARTs) and the like can be displayed. During the period in which the information (numerical value) related to these gaming states is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display, the countdown effect or the count up effect is produced more than in the period in which the information (numerical value) related to these gaming states is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device. The rate of execution may be low. According to such a configuration, on the sub liquid crystal display, it is more important for the player by limiting the simultaneous display of the numerical value of the countdown effect or the numerical value of the countup effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the game state. It is possible to give priority to the latter.

(Example of related effects related to the execution status of suggestive effects)
Next, an example of executing a related effect related to the execution state of the suggestive effect that suggests that the big hit game state is controlled will be described. In the example shown below, a music reach effect and a cut-in notice effect can be executed as suggestive effects. Further, it is possible to execute a count display effect as a related effect related to the execution status of the music reach effect. Further, a timer effect can be executed as an effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. Hereinafter, each of these effects will be specifically described.

(Directed by Music Reach)
The music reach effect is an effect that can be executed when the change pattern of the super reach is selected as the change pattern, and is a suggestion effect that can be executed as one type of the super reach effect after the reach state is established. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) to (6) and FIGS. 13-19 (3) to 13-20 (12) described later, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the same time, it is an effect of displaying an image in a mode according to the reproduction time of the music on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200.

  In the present embodiment, on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, images of characters (A to C) corresponding to the reproduction time of the music and images of notes (35TM700 to 35TM720) corresponding to the reproduction time of the music are displayed. In the first stage of the music reach effect (the period during which the music reproduction time is 1 second to 15 seconds), one character (character A) and one kind of note (note 35TM700) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, In the second stage of the music reach effect (the period during which the music reproduction time is 16 seconds to 30 seconds), two characters (character A, character B) and two kinds of notes (note 35TM700, note) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. 35TM710), and in the third stage of the music reach effect (the period during which the music reproduction time is 31 seconds to 60 seconds), three characters (character A, character B, character C) and a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are displayed. Display three types of notes (note 35TM700, note 35TM710, note 35TM720) That.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 13-13, the music reach effect ends in the first stage, in the second stage, and in the third stage (when the music is output to the end). ), And which stage to proceed to is determined in advance according to the display result and the variation pattern. When the music reach production reaches the 2nd stage, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it ends in the 1st stage, and when it reaches the 3rd stage, the jackpot expectation degree than when it ends in the 2nd stage Is high. As a relationship between the final number of stages of music reach production and the jackpot expectation, the relationship of 1st stage <2nd stage <3rd stage is established.

  The timing at which the reproduction of the music related to the music reach production is started is the timing before the fixed stop timing of the decorative pattern by the music reproduction time. Therefore, when the music reach effect ends in the first stage, the reproduction of the musical composition is started 15 seconds before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped, and the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped at the timing when the musical composition is reproduced for 15 seconds. Will be done. Also, when the music reach effect ends in the second stage, the reproduction of the music will be started from 30 seconds before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped, and the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped at the timing when the music is reproduced for 30 seconds. Will be done. Also, when the music reach effect ends in the third stage (when the music is played to the end), the reproduction of the music is started 60 seconds before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped, and the music is reproduced for 60 seconds. The decorative pattern will be fixedly stopped at the timing of reproduction (timing at which the music is reproduced to the end).

  With such an effect structure, when the reproduction of the music relating to the music reach effect is started, the player expects that the music is reproduced as long as possible before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped.

(Count display effect)
The count display effect is an effect related to the execution status of the music reach effect, and is shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) to (6) and FIGS. 13-19 (4) to 13-20 (12) described later. As shown, the reproduction time of the music in the music reach effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Specifically, it is an effect of displaying the elapsed time (seconds) from the start of the reproduction of the music on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and displays the reproduction seconds (1 to 60) by an image simulating a 7-segment display. I am trying.

  In the count display effect, the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is "1", and the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by 1 every 1 second. As described above, in the count display effect, the operation of adding and updating the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by one every second is performed. As a result, the playing time of the music in the music reach effect is notified to the player. Therefore, the final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect ends in the first stage is "15", and the final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect ends in the second stage is "30", The final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect reaches the third stage is "60".

  With such an effect structure, the player can clearly understand the reproduction period after the music is started. By understanding that the longer the reproduction period of the music is, the higher the jackpot expectation is. Therefore, it is expected that the numerical value (music reproduction time) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is increased as much as possible. .

  Note that the display mode of the numerical value (reproduction time) may be different according to the range of the numerical value (reproduction time) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. For example, in the range of 1 to 15, the numerical value is blue It is also possible to display the numerical values in red in the range of 16 to 30, and to blink the numerical values displayed in red in the range of 31 to 60.

(Cut-in notice production)
The cut-in notice effect is an effect that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled. As shown in FIG. 13-20 (10) which will be described later, when another effect such as a super reach effect (music reach effect) is being executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the effect is higher than that of the other effect being executed. This is a notice effect executed in a display mode with high priority. As the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, there are a plurality of effect modes (“CHANCE” and “intense heat”) in which the displayed characters are different, and the ratio of selecting each effect mode varies depending on the display result (Fig. 13-13 (F)).

  From the player's point of view, when an image related to another suggestive effect or the like is displayed, it suddenly appears in a display mode with a higher priority than the image related to the other suggestive effect (the display layer is higher and The cut-in image is displayed, which appears to be displayed on the front side of the image related to the suggestive effect, etc.), so that it is attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed. In addition, it also becomes of interest in which of the plurality of effect modes the cut-in notice effect is executed.

(Timer production)
The timer effect is an effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and is an effect for displaying the remaining time (seconds) until the cut-in notice effect is executed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. As shown in FIGS. 13-19 (6) to 13-20 (9), which will be described later, in the timer effect, the cut-in notice effect is executed (the cut-in image of “CHANCE” or “intense heat” is displayed. 3 seconds ago, first, "3" is displayed as an initial value in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. The numerical value displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is decremented and updated by 1 every 1 second, and the cut-in image is displayed at the timing when it becomes "0".

  As described above, the timer effect is an effect executed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 different from the display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300) in which the count display effect is executed, and is different from the count display effect. As an operation, a subtraction operation of the remaining time until the start of the suggested effect (a countdown operation until the cut-in notice effect is executed) is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the timer effect is always executed.

(Variation start effect determination process)
As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the special symbol process process (step S25), the CPU 103 displays the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the random number value for determining the display result. The “big hit” or “out” and the big hit type in the case of “big hit” are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by using the random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of the preliminary determination of the display result.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination table for deviation shown in FIG. In this example, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is out of alignment. There are provided a variation pattern of the outlier and a variation pattern of the outreach in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the superreach effect is executed and the display result is out.

  In the example of FIG. 13-13 (A), the non-reach deviation variation pattern is determined at a rate of 90%, the normal reach deviation variation pattern is determined at a rate of 8%, and the super reach deviation variation is determined at a rate of 2%. It will be decided by the pattern.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined display result is “big hit”, the CPU 103 determines the change pattern based on the big hit change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-13B. In this example, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is a big hit. The normal reach jackpot variation pattern and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern are the reach mode and the super reach effect is executed and the display result is The variation pattern of the super reach jackpot, which is a jackpot, is provided.

  In the example of FIG. 13-13 (B), the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is determined at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot is determined at a rate of 95%.

  In this way, when the variation pattern of super reach is selected, the jackpot is more likely to occur than when the variation pattern of super reach is not selected. That is, the jackpot expectation in the variation pattern of this embodiment has a relationship of normal reach <super reach.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (A) and (B), non-reach, normal reach, and super reach are provided as the variation patterns. As shown in (B), as the variation patterns of super reach, super reach without pseudo continuous production (no pseudo continuous production), super reach with one pseudo continuous production (one pseudo continuous production), and multiple times. It is also possible to provide a super reach (pseudo continuous two times) with the pseudo continuous production of.

  As described above, the CPU 103, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation command for designating the display result, the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern, and the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first The reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

  CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved) for designating that the reserved storage number has been subtracted Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating the display result (big hit or off, big hit type in case of big hit), and variation time of special symbol and effect contents ( Reach and pseudo-relationship, etc.) variation pattern command to specify, a set of commands received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol It is possible to specify the variation time and the effect contents (reach, pseudo-relationship, etc.). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the microcomputer 100 for game control, the special symbol (first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished and the display result is derived.

  FIG. 13-12 is a flowchart showing a variation start time effect determination process. Unlike the processing shown in FIG. 13-5, this fluctuation start effect determination processing determines whether or not to execute the music reach effect, the count display effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands that accompany the start of variable display of special symbols, the display result designation of variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is performed. While setting the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) based on the command and the variation pattern designating command, the decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-12.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the music reach effect and the final stage when the music reach effect is executed, by using the final stage determination table of the music reach effect (FIGS. 13-13 (C) and (D)). (See step S35TM2010).

  FIG. 13-13 (C) shows the execution ratio of the music reach effect when the display result is out of alignment, and the determination for determining whether or not to execute the music reach effect and the final stage for each of the out-of-range variation patterns. A value has been assigned. When the variation pattern is “out of reach”, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to perform the music reach effect at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “out of normal reach”, it is determined that the music reach effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “out of super reach”, it is decided not to execute the music reach effect at a rate of 40%, and to execute the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 30%. Then, it is decided to execute up to the second stage of the music reach production at a rate of 20%, and to execute up to the third stage of the music reach production at a rate of 10%.

  FIG. 13-13 (D) shows the execution ratio of the music reach effect when the display result is a big hit, and the determination for determining whether to execute the music reach effect and the final stage for each of the variation patterns for the big hit. A value has been assigned. When the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 determines not to perform the music reach effect at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “super reach jackpot”, it is decided not to execute the music reach effect at a rate of 20% and to execute the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 10%. Then, it is decided to execute up to the second stage of the music reach production at a rate of 30%, and to execute up to the third stage of the music reach production at a rate of 40%.

  Thus, when the final stage of the music reach production is the second stage (when the reproduction period of the music is up to 15 seconds), the final stage of the music reach production is the second stage (the reproduction period of the song) When the number is up to 30 seconds), the jackpot expectation is higher. Further, when the final stage of the music reach production is the third stage (when the reproduction period of the music is up to 30 seconds), the final stage of the music reach production is the third stage (when the reproduction period of the music is 60 seconds). Seconds, when the music is played to the end), the jackpot expectation is higher. In other words, regarding the reliability of the music reach effect (big hit expectation), the relationship of 1st stage <2nd stage <3rd stage is established.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the music reach effect (YES in step S35TM2020), it determines to execute the count display effect (step S35TM2030). On the other hand, when it is determined not to perform the music reach effect (NO in step S35TM2020), it is determined not to execute the count display effect (step S35TM2040).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the count display effect at a rate of 100% when the music reach effect is executed, and 100 when the music reach effect is not executed. The percentage display effect is not executed.

  Here, the numerical value update period in the count display effect matches the music reproduction period in the music reach effect. Therefore, when it is decided to end the music reach effect in the first stage, the final value in the count display effect is decided to be "15", and when it is decided to end the music reach effect in the second stage. Determines the final value in the count display effect to be "30", and when it is determined to end the music reach effect in the third stage, determines the final value in the count display effect to be "60". Thus, the final value of the count display effect is determined based on the final stage of the music reach effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, based on the cut-in notice effect execution ratio determination table (see FIG. 13-13 (E)) (step S35TM2050).

  FIG. 13-13 (E) is a table showing the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect, and a determination value for deciding whether to execute the cut-in notice effect is allocated in correspondence with the presence or absence of the count display effect. There is. When the count display effect is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 45% but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 55%. When executing the count display effect, it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed at a rate of 98% and the cut-in notice effect is executed at a rate of 2%.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in notification effect (YES in step S35TM2060), the effect mode of the cut-in notification effect is changed to the effect mode determination table of the cut-in notification effect (FIG. 13). -13 (F)) (step S35TM2070). On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the cut-in notice effect (NO in step S35TM2060), the process ends.

  As shown in FIG. 13-13 (F), in this embodiment, the determination values are assigned so that the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is different according to the display result. When the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is “out”), the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect (characters in the cut-in image) is 80%. The ratio becomes 1st mode "CHANCE", and the ratio of 20% becomes 2nd mode "heat". On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result designated by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the effect mode (characters of the cut-in image) of the cut-in notice effect is , 20% is the first aspect “CHANCE”, and 80% is the second aspect “intense heat”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (step S35TM2080), and ends the process.

  In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, it is decided to execute the timer effect at a rate of 100%. Therefore, the execution rate of the timer effect is shown in FIG. It matches the execution ratio of the cut-in notice production shown. As shown in FIG. 13-13 (E), when the count display effect is executed, the ratio of the cut-in notice effect executed is lower than when the count display effect is not executed. That is, when the count display effect is executed, the rate at which the timer effect is executed is lower than when the count display effect is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, when both of the count display effect and the timer effect are executed, the execution period of the count display effect and the execution period of the timer effect overlap (the timer effect is executed while the count display effect is being executed. Therefore, a plurality of types of operations, that is, an operation of adding and updating the reproduction time of the music and an operation of subtracting and updating the remaining time until the cut-in image is displayed, are simultaneously performed in parallel. As a result, the production may be complicated and the player may be confused. In the present embodiment, when the count display effect is being executed, by lowering the execution ratio of the timer effect compared to when the count display effect is not being executed, both effects can be achieved while diversifying the effect. The simultaneous execution is restricted to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Specific example of counting display production corresponding to music reach production)
Next, a specific example of the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-14 and 13-15. FIG. 13-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect is executed and the timer effect is not executed, and FIG. 13-15 corresponds to the music reach effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, when a count display effect is performed and a timer effect is not performed.

  In the example shown below, the production control CPU 120 determines the final stage of the music reach production to be the third stage based on the change pattern of the super reach, and correspondingly sets the numerical value of the music reproduction time. It is assumed that it is decided to execute the count display effect for updating up to 60, but not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect.

  First, FIG. 13-15 (1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is performing variable display of the left, right, and right decorative patterns (variable display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-14). Shows. At this time, although nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. In, the entire character is displayed. The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position which overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear directions.

  At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a reduced state, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. By having the property, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern "" is stopped and displayed to reach the state, and the character "REACH !!" is displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing T2 in FIGS. 13-14).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the music reach effect in response to the reach state being established. FIG. 13-15 (3) shows a state in which the first stage of the music reach effect (the music reach effect started at the timing of T3 in FIG. 13-14) is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 starts playing the music at the start timing of the music reach effect, and displays the characters A, the notes 35TM700, and the characters "Music Reach START!" On the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as the first stage effect. Display it. With the start of the music reach effect, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  The effect control CPU 120 starts the count display effect at the timing when the music reproduction is started, and displays “1” as the initial value of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Then, while the music is being reproduced, the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by 1 every 1 second. Here, at the timing when the music reach effect is started, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (on the player side), the player is required to operate the sub liquid crystal display. It is difficult to visually recognize the music reproduction time displayed on the display 35TM300.

  During the first stage of the music reach effect (the period during which the music reproduction time is 1 to 15 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (on the player side). Since the state of being maintained continues, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the music reproduction time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. However, although the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 disposed behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a lowered state, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. With the above, it is possible to visually recognize the music reproduction time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (3), since it is possible to visually recognize that the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is “8”, the player plays the music reproduction time (see FIG. 13-14). It is possible to understand that the elapsed time from the timing T3 shown) is 8 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 16 seconds (timing of T4A shown in FIG. 13-14), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (4), the second stage of the music reach effect. Move to. In the second stage, the reproduction of the music is continued (the part of the music after 16 seconds is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters A and B, and the notes 35TM700 and 35TM710. That is, with the transition from the first stage to the second stage, the type of character and the type of note to be displayed are increased while reproducing the continuation of the same music.

  Further, as the music reach effect reaches the second stage, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position to the effect position. (T4A-T4B shown in FIGS. 13-14). That is, the character part of "FEV" and the character part of "ER!" Are not separated but are integrally moved from the origin position to the effect position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the visibility of the count display effect is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a presentation position overlapping front and rear in a front view, so that the visibility of the lower portion of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is reduced. It is in a state.

  During the second stage of the music reach effect (the period during which the music reproduction time is 16 to 30 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 do not exist in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display effect is produced. Is more visible than in the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and can grasp the music reproduction time more clearly. In the example shown in Fig. 13-15 (4), "16" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 16 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the second stage (16 to 30 seconds) of the music effect.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds (timing T5 shown in FIG. 13-14), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (5), the third stage of the music reach effect. Move to. In the third stage, while the reproduction of the music is continued (the part of the music after 31 seconds is reproduced), the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters A, B and C, and the notes 35TM700 and 35TM710. And the note 35TM720 are displayed. That is, with the transition from the second stage to the third stage, the types of characters and the types of notes to be displayed are increased while reproducing the continuation of the same music.

  During the period when the music reach effect is in the third stage (the period during which the music reproduction time is 31 to 60 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 do not exist in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display effect is produced. Is more visible than in the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and can grasp the music reproduction time more clearly. In the example shown in Fig. 13-15 (5), "31" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the third stage (31 to 60 seconds) of the music effect.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 60 seconds (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 13-14), the music is reproduced until the end, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped when the reproduction of the music is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (6), the effect control CPU 120 causes the design display area 5L, the design display area 5C, and the design display area 5R to have a combination of decorative designs whose display result is a big hit (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed. Further, the occurrence of the big hit is notified by displaying the characters "big hit !!" on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays "60" as the final value of the count display effect (the final reproduction time of the music in the music reach effect) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  With the end of the music reach effect and the count display effect, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position to the origin position (FIG. 13- 18 T7A-T7B). Thereby, the visibility of the final value (“60” in this example) of the count display effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the visibility of the final value is the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel. It will be lowered by 35TM420. After that, the effect control CPU 120 erases the final value (“60” in this example) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  As described above, while the effect control CPU 120 is executing the first stage (1 second to 15 seconds) of the music reach effect, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 have the sub liquid crystal. Since it is located at the origin position which overlaps with the display 35TM300 in the front and back when viewed from the front, the visibility of the count display effect (the period when the numerical value is 1 to 15) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced. On the other hand, while the effect control CPU 120 is executing the second step (16 seconds to 30 seconds) and the third step (31 seconds to 60 seconds) of the music reach effect, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM410. The logo panel 35TM420 is located at a presentation position that does not overlap the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in a front view, and the visibility of the count display presentation (the period when the numerical value is 16 to 60) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. is doing.

  As described above, the visibility of the count display effect can be switched by improving or reducing the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 with the displacement of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. There is. As a result, regarding the count display effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to easily change only the visibility while performing a certain addition operation according to the music reproduction time.

  When the music reach effect shifts from the first stage to the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move to the effect position to improve the visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Since it is improved, it is emphasized that the music reach production has shifted from the first stage to the second stage, that is, the period when the expectation of a big hit is high and the interest can be improved.

  On the other hand, if the music reach effect is in the first stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the effect position, and the visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. Then, the numerical value (1 to 15) of the count display effect is clearly recognized by the player even though the jackpot expectation level is still low. As a result, the interest of the music reach effect and the count display effect may be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displayed during the period in which the first stage of the music reach production is executed regardless of whether or not the music reach production ends in the first stage. By setting it at the origin position, the visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced, and the decrease in interest is suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is executed at a rate of 100%, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the stage finally executed in the music reach effect. The execution ratio of the count display effect may be changed according to the number. For example, when the music reach effect ends in the first stage, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 100%, and when the music reach effect is executed up to the second stage or the third stage, 100%. The count display effect may be executed at the ratio of. Here, when the music reach effect is executed up to the second stage or the third stage, the count display effect is started at the timing when the music reach shifts to the second stage (that is, addition from the initial value “16”). Perform update operation). With such a configuration, during the period in which the second stage or the third stage of the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is executed to reproduce the music displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It becomes possible to visually recognize the time (16 to), but during the period in which the first stage of the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is not executed, so that the music reproduction time is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Since it is not done, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G) described later, when the music reach effect is executed up to the second stage, the count display effect corresponding to this is started from the first stage (initial value “1”). There may be a case where it is performed and a case where it is started from the second stage (initial value “16”). Further, when the music reach effect is executed up to the third stage, the count display effect corresponding to this is started from the first stage (initial value “1”) and the second stage (initial value “16”). )) And the third stage (initial value “31”). With such a configuration, the timing at which the count display effect is started can be diversified, and the interest can be improved.

  As described above, as the variation patterns of the super reach, there are provided the super reach without the pseudo continuous production, the super reach with one pseudo continuous production, and the super reach with two pseudo continuous productions. You may do it. In this case, it is preferable that the jackpot expectation degree be in the relationship of super reach (no pseudo-repeating) <super reach (pseudo consecutive 1 time) <super reach (pseudo consecutive 2 times). In the case of such an effect configuration, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed (when the pseudo-reach once or the pseudo continuous twice is selected), the pseudo continuous effect is not executed (the pseudo continuous effect). It is preferable that the ratio of performing the music reach effect and the count display effect up to the second stage or the third stage is higher than that in the case where the super reach of none is selected).

  In addition, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed a plurality of times (when the super reach of the pseudo continuous two times is selected), the pseudo continuous effect is executed only once (the super reach of the pseudo continuous one time is selected. The ratio in which the music reach effect and the count display effect are executed up to the second stage or the third stage may be higher than that in the case of being performed). With such an effect configuration, the player is interested in whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is executed and whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is executed a plurality of times, and the interest is improved. be able to.

(Another example of effect determination process at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 13-16 is a flowchart showing another example regarding the effect determination process at the start of variation. In this variation start stage effect determination process, unlike the process shown in FIG. 13-12, when the music reach effect is executed, the timing of starting the count display effect according to the final stage number of the determined music reach effect. It is possible to make different.

  Specifically, in the process shown in FIG. 13-12, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is always executed from the first stage of the music reach effect (the initial value of the count display effect is Although it is always "1", in the processing shown in FIGS. 13-16, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is started from the second stage (sub liquid crystal display). There is a case where the initial value displayed on the 35TM300 is "16"), and the count display effect is started from the third stage (when the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is "31"). (See FIGS. 13-17 (G)).

  Further, the execution ratios of the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect are set to be higher when the count display effect is executed than when the count display effect is not executed (FIG. 13-17 (H). See)). Therefore, there is a high rate that the countdown operation up to the start of the cut-in notice effect in the timer effect and the operation for updating the music reproduction time in the count display effect are simultaneously executed in parallel.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a set of commands associated with the start of variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation command for displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. And a production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute production) to be executed based on the variation pattern designation command, and variation of the decorative pattern based on the designated variation pattern. The effect to be executed during display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-16.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of execution of the music reach effect and the final stage based on the final stage determination table of the music reach effect (see FIGS. 13-13 (C) and (D)) (step S35TM3010). ).

  Next, when it is decided to execute the music reach effect (YES in step S35TM3020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the count display effect by determining the execution start stage determination table of the count display effect (FIG. 13-17). (See (G))) (step S35TM2030). On the other hand, when it is determined not to perform the music reach effect (NO in step S35TM3020), it is determined not to execute the count display effect (step S35TM3040).

  FIG. 13-17 (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution start stage determination table of the count display effect, and the execution start stage of the count display effect for each of the final stages of the determined music reach effects. The determination value for determining is assigned. When the final stage of the music reach effect is the first step, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the count display effect from the first step of the music reach effect at a rate of 1% (sub liquid crystal display device). It is determined to display "1" as an initial value on the 35TM300) and not to execute the count display effect at a rate of 99%.

  When the final stage of the music reach effect is the second step, it is determined that the count display effect is executed from the first step of the music reach effect at a rate of 3% (the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300). Is determined to be displayed as "1"), and it is determined that the count display effect is executed from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 25% ("16" is set as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300). It is decided to display), and it is decided not to execute the count display effect at a rate of 72%.

  When the final stage of the music reach effect is the third step, it is determined that the count display effect is executed from the first step of the music reach effect at a rate of 5% (the initial value for the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Is determined to be displayed as "1", and it is determined to execute the count display effect from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 30% ("16" is set as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300). It is decided to display), and it is decided to execute the count display effect from the third stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 60% (it is determined to display "31" as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. )) It is decided not to execute the count display effect at a rate of 5%.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the count display effect is started from the first stage of the music reach effect, "1" is displayed as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and then the music reach effect is displayed. The adding operation according to the music reproduction time is continued until the final value (“15” in the first stage, “30” in the second stage, “60” in the third stage) according to the final stage. Will be. When it is determined that the counting display effect is started from the second stage of the music reach effect, "16" is displayed as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and then the final stage of the music reach effect is displayed. The adding operation according to the music reproduction time is continued until the final value (“30” in the second stage, “60” in the third stage). Further, when it is determined that the count display effect is started from the third stage of the music reach effect, "31" is displayed as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and then the final stage of the music reach effect is displayed. The addition operation according to the music reproduction time is continued until the final value (“60” in the third stage).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), when the final stage of the music reach effect is the second step, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 72%, and (i) at a rate of 3%. The count display effect is executed from the first stage of the music reach effect, and (ii) the count display effect is executed from the second step of the music reach effect at a rate of 25%. That is, the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the first stage of the music reach effect is 3% of (i), while the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the second stage of the music reach effect. Is 28% of (i) + (ii). When the final stage of the music reach effect is the third stage, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 5%, but (iii) The count display effect is executed from the first step of the music reach effect at a rate of 5%. Then, the count display effect is executed from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of (iV) 30%, and the count display effect is performed from the third step of the music reach effect at a rate of (V) 60%. That is, the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the first stage of the music reach effect is 5% of (iii), while the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the second stage of the music reach effect. Is 35% of (iii) + (iV), and the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the third stage of the music reach effect is 95% of (iii) + (iV) + (V).

  According to the ratio shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the ratio of executing the count display effect is the lowest when the music reach effect is in the first stage, and the count display is executed when the music reach effect is in the second stage. The rate of executing the effect is next lower, and the rate of executing the count display effect is the highest when the music reach effect is the third stage.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice effect execution ratio determination table (see FIG. 13-17 (H)) (step S35TM3050).

  FIG. 13-17 (H) is a table showing the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect, and a determination value for determining whether to execute the cut-in notice effect is assigned in correspondence with the presence or absence of the count display effect. There is. When the count display effect is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 95% but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 5%. Further, when executing the count display effect, it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40% but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 60%.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in notice effect (YES in step S35TM3060), the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is changed to the cut-in notice effect effect determination table (FIG. 13). -13 (F)) (step S35TM3070), the timer effect is determined to be executed (step S35TM3080), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed (NO in step S35TM3060), the process ends.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-13C and 13D, the relationship between the final stage of the music reach effect and the jackpot expectation is “first stage” <“second stage” <“ Since the third stage ”is reached, the player expects that the music reproduction time is as long as possible, that is, the number of the music reproduction time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is as large as possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), the proportion of the count display effect executed in the case where the music reach effect is in the second stage is higher than that in the case where the music reach effect is in the first stage. The ratio is higher, and the count display effect is executed more frequently when the music reach effect is at the third stage than when the music reach effect is at the second stage. Therefore, the player is also interested in the timing when the count display effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, the timer effect is executed at a rate of 100%, so the execution rate of the timer effect matches the execution rate of the cut-in notice effect. . Then, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (H), the ratio of the cut-in notice effect executed is higher in the case where the count display effect is executed than in the case where the count display effect is not executed. . That is, when the count display effect is executed, the rate at which the timer effect is executed is higher than when the count display effect is not executed. In this way, by increasing the execution ratio of the timer effect while the count display effect is being executed, the count display effect and the timer effect can be related to each other and the interest can be improved.

(Modification of counting display effect and timer effect)
Next, modified examples of the count display effect and the timer effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-18, 13-19, and 13-20. 13-18 is a time chart in the case of executing the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect and the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and FIGS. 13-19 and 13-20 are An example of the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect is executed and the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is executed is shown. FIG.

  In the example described below, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stage of the music reach effect to be the third step based on the change pattern of the super reach, and the count display effect in the first stage of the music reach effect. It is determined that the count display effect is executed in the second and third stages of the music reach effect, and the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect of the first aspect are executed during the execution of the third step of the music reach effect. Suppose that you decide to do.

  First, FIG. 13-19 (1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is performing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative designs (variable display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-18). Showing. At this time, although nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. In, the entire character is displayed. The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position which overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear directions.

  At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a reduced state, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. By having the property, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. However, since the count display effect has not yet been executed at this point, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is in a state where no numerical value is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern "" is stopped and displayed to reach the state, and the characters "REACH !!" are displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing T2 in FIG. 13-18).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the music reach effect in response to the reach state being established. FIG. 13-19 (3) shows a state in which the first stage of the music reach effect (the music reach effect started at the timing of T3 in FIG. 13-18) is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 starts playing the music at the start timing of the music reach effect, and displays the characters A, the notes 35TM700, and the characters "Music Reach START!" On the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as the first stage effect. Display it. With the start of the music reach effect, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Since the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 during the period (T3 to T4A in FIG. 13-18) during which the first stage of the music reach effect is being executed, the sub liquid crystal is executed during this period. The music reproduction time is not displayed on the display device 35TM300, and the update operation is not performed.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 16 seconds (timing of T4A shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Move to. In the second stage, the reproduction of the music is continued (the part of the music after 16 seconds is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters A and B, and the notes 35TM700 and 35TM710. That is, with the transition from the first stage to the second stage, the type of character and the type of note to be displayed are increased while reproducing the continuation of the same music.

  The CPU 120 for effect control starts the count display effect at the timing when the music reach effect is in the second stage (the timing at which the part of the music is moved for 16 seconds is reproduced), and the count display effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. "16" is displayed as the initial value of. Then, while the music is being reproduced, the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by 1 every 1 second. Here, as described later, at the timing when the second stage of the music reach effect is started, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are positioned in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (on the player side). Therefore, the player is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize the music reproduction time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Further, as the music reach effect reaches the second stage, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position to the effect position. (T4A-T4B shown in FIGS. 13-18). That is, the character part of "FEV" and the character part of "ER!" Are not separated but are integrally moved from the origin position to the effect position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the visibility of the count display effect is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a presentation position overlapping front and rear in a front view, so that the visibility of the lower portion of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is reduced. It is in a state.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (5), the third stage of the music reach effect. Move to. In the third stage, while the reproduction of the music is continued (the part of the music after 31 seconds is reproduced), the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters A, B and C, and the notes 35TM700 and 35TM710. And the note 35TM720 are displayed. That is, with the transition from the second stage to the third stage, the types of characters and the types of notes to be displayed are increased while reproducing the continuation of the same music.

  During the period when the music reach effect is in the third stage (the period during which the music reproduction time is 31 to 60 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 do not exist in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display effect is produced. Is more visible than in the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and can grasp the music reproduction time more clearly. In the example shown in Fig. 13-19 (5), "31" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the third stage (31 to 60 seconds) of the music effect.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 42 seconds (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (6). The timer effect is executed based on the remaining time (seconds) until 3 seconds, and the timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the initial value "3" is displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. (Numerical image of) is displayed. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, "42" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 42 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 43 seconds (timing of T7 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (7). Based on the fact that the remaining time (seconds) is 2 seconds, the timer effect is continued and the timer image 35TM620 is updated in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (in this example, the value of "2" is set). Image) is displayed. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, "43" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 43 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 44 seconds (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (8). Based on the remaining time (seconds) until 1 second, the timer effect is continued and the timer image 35TM620 is updated in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (in this example, the value of "1" is displayed). Image) is displayed. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, “44” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 44 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 45 seconds (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (9). Based on the remaining time (seconds) until 0 seconds, the timer effect is continued, and the updated timer image 35TM620 is displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (in this example, the final value " A numerical image of “0”) is displayed. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, "45" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 45 seconds.

  The effect control CPU 120 adjusts the cut-in notice effect to the execution timing (the timing when the numerical value of the timer image in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is updated from “1” to “0”). To display the cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, the cut-in image “CHANCE” of the first mode) having a display mode with a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. .

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 46 seconds (timing T10 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 ends the timer effect in response to the cut-in notice effect being executed, and The display of the timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the numerical image of “0” which is the final value) displayed in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 35TM200 is ended. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 is continuously executing the cut-in notice effect, and the cut-in image 35TM800 (in the display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect is displayed on the upper portion of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 ( In this example, the cut-in image “CHANCE”) of the first mode is continuously displayed. As the numerical value of the count display effect, "46" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the music reproduction time reaches 46 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 47 seconds (timing T11 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 continues the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (10). The cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, the cut-in image “CHANCE” of the first mode) having a higher display priority than the effect image of the music reach effect is displayed above the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is being displayed continuously. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, "47" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 47 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 48 seconds (timing T12 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (11). , A display of the cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, the cut-in image "CHANCE" of the first aspect) displayed on the upper portion of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect. To end. Thereby, the character A, the character B, and the character C displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the note 35TM700, the note 35TM710, and the note 35TM720 can be visually recognized again. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, “48” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 48 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 60 seconds (timing of T13 shown in FIG. 13-18), the music is reproduced until the end, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped when the reproduction of the music is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 13-20 (12), the effect control CPU 120 has a combination of decorative symbols whose display result is a big hit in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed. Further, the occurrence of the big hit is notified by displaying the characters "big hit !!" on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays "60" as the final value of the count display effect (the final reproduction time of the music in the music reach effect) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The effect control CPU 120 moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position to the origin position at the same time with the end of the music reach effect and the count display effect (FIG. 13- 18 shows T14A-T14B). Thereby, the visibility of the final value (“60” in this example) of the count display effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the visibility of the final value is the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel. It will be lowered by 35TM420. After that, the effect control CPU 120 erases the final value (“60” in this example) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The effect control CPU 120 displaces the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 to the origin position during the period in which the first stage of the music reach effect is executed, and executes the second stage of the music reach effect. During the period, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the effect position. Further, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the execution ratio of the count display effect during the period during which the first stage of the music reach effect is being executed, while the period during which the second stage of the music reach effect is being executed, The execution rate of the count display effect is set higher than that during the period in which the first stage of the music reach effect is being executed.

  Therefore, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved during the period in which the second stage of the music reach effect is being executed, and the proportion of the effect information of the count display effect displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is also improved. is doing. Therefore, it is emphasized that the musical reach production has shifted to the second stage, and the interest can be improved. On the other hand, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is decreased during the period in which the first stage of the music reach production is being executed, regardless of whether the music reach production is completed in the first stage. The rate at which the performance information of the count display performance is displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 is also reduced. Therefore, it is not emphasized that it is the first stage (1 second to 15 seconds) in which the count display effect is executed but the jackpot expectation is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(1) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the count display effect and the timer effect are executed as the effects related to the display result of the variable display being executed has been described, but the invention is not limited to such an embodiment and is executed. A count display effect or a timer effect may be executed as the look-ahead notice effect related to the display result of the variable display. Specifically, based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize, a special background image different from the normal background image over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display (target change) based on the starting prize is executed. It may be possible to execute a zone effect for displaying. Then, a count display effect may be executed in which the execution period of this zone effect (the number of times of variation in the special background image) is added and updated in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In addition, based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize, the timer effect of subtracting and updating the remaining time until the variable display (target change) based on the starting prize is executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is executed. Is also good. As in these examples, the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed over a plurality of changes.

(2) In the above embodiment, the example in which the initial number of seconds of the timer effect is always "3" (the timer effect is started 3 seconds before the cut-in image 35TM800 is displayed) has been shown as an example. Not limited to this form, a plurality of initial seconds may be selectable at different ratios according to the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect or the display result. For example, when the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is the first mode, the ratio of "3" being the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" being the initial value is 20% in the timer effect. When the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is the second mode, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 20% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 80% in the timer effect. May be. Also, when the display result is off, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 20% in the timer effect, but when the display result is a big hit. In the timer effect, the ratio of "3" as the initial value may be 20% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value may be 80%.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the music reach effect is always executed when the count display effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the count display effect is executed. The music reach effect may not be executed in some cases. Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the timer effect is always executed when the cut-in notice effect is executed has been shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and even when the cut-in notice effect is executed. The timer effect may not be executed in some cases. Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the cut-in notice effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in notice effect is executed even when the timer effect is executed. The advance notice effect may not be executed in some cases.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value of the count display effect as an image simulating a 7-segment display on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 has been described. Without being limited to this, an actual 7-segment display device is provided in place of the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300, and light emission control of the 7-segment display device is performed to display (emit) the numerical value of the count display effect. good.

(5) In the above embodiment, the example in which the count display effect is executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, while the timer effect is executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is shown. The effect may be executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, while the timer effect may be executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Further, both the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and both the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

(6) In the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the effect control CPU 120 controls the number of remaining fluctuations that can be controlled in the time-shortened state (the number of time-savings) and the number of remaining fluctuations that can be controlled in the probable state (the number of STs (special time)). It is possible to display the number of rounds in the big hit game state. During the period in which the information (numerical value) related to these gaming states is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the count display effect is executed more than in the period in which the information (numerical values) related to these gaming states is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. You may make it a low rate. With such a configuration, in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the numerical value of the count display effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the game state are restricted from being displayed at the same time, and the latter, which is more important to the player, is prioritized. Can be notified.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the remaining time until the cut-in notice effect is executed is subtracted and updated in the timer effect, but the remaining time until another effect is executed is subtracted and updated. For example, the remaining time until the movable accessory such as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 operates may be subtracted and updated. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the reproduction time of the music, which is a numerical value related to the execution status of the effect, is added and updated in the count display effect is not limited to this, and, for example, the first logo panel 35TM410 and You may make it add and update the elapsed time after movable movable objects, such as the 2nd logo panel 35TM420, moved to a production position.

(8) In the above embodiment, a timer effect that performs a countdown operation that gradually decreases the displayed numerical value is illustrated as an effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect that suggests that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect, an update effect that performs an update operation for updating the display mode of the display body (the object displayed on the screen) may be executed. Specifically, the addition operation of gradually increasing the display area of the display body (or gradually increasing the number of display bodies) or the stepwise reduction of the display area of the display body (or of the display body) is performed. You may make it perform the update production | generation which performs the subtraction operation | movement which reduces the number in steps.

  As an example, an update effect may be executed in which an addition operation of gradually increasing the display area of the meter displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 or the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is executed, and the display area of the meter becomes maximum. When the aspect is set to 100%, the display area of the meter is gradually increased and updated from 0% (initial value) to 10%, 20%, ... May be executed, and if the update is stopped before reaching 100% (for example, 80%), the suggestive effect may not be executed (the execution rate of the suggestive effect is low).

(9) Further, when a plurality of types of suggestive effects are provided, an update effect corresponding to each type of suggestive effects may be executed. For example, as a first suggestive effect, a first cut-in notice effect that can be executed immediately after the reach state is established is provided, and as a second suggestive effect, a second cut-in notice effect that can be executed immediately before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. When the first cut-in advance notice effect is executed, the first cut-in advance notice effect is executed and the second cut-in notice effect is executed. It is also possible to execute a second update effect that performs an operation of updating a numerical value indicating the possibility (expectation level) or a meter.

  In this case, the first update effect and the second update effect may be concurrently executable. For example, at the timing immediately after the reach state is established, the possibility (expected degree) indicated by the first update effect reaches 100% (while the possibility (expected degree) indicated by the second update effect is still 20% at this point). In response to this, the first cut-in notice effect is executed, and in response to the execution of the first cut-in notice effect, the first update effect ends (the displayed numerical value or meter is deleted), After that, at a timing immediately before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped, the possibility (expected degree) indicated by the second update effect reaches 100%, and the second cut-in notice effect is executed correspondingly, and the second cut effect is executed. The second update effect may be ended (the displayed numerical value or meter is deleted) in response to the execution of the in-notice effect.

(10) In the above embodiment, the numerical value (seconds) or the display color of the display body (meter) regarding the count display effect related to the execution status of the suggestive effect, or the numerical value regarding the update effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect ( The number of seconds) or the display color of the display body (meter) may be determined at different rates depending on the display result. For example, when the display result is a big hit, the display color is determined to be red at a higher rate than when the display result is a big hit, and when the display result is a big hit, the display result is higher than when the big hit is a big hit. The display color may be determined to be blue in proportion. In addition, when the display result is a big hit, the display bodies to be displayed are determined to be a plurality of at a higher rate than when the display result is out of alignment (the types of counting display effect and update effect to be executed are determined to be a plurality of types). ), When the display result is out of proportion, the display object to be displayed is determined to be one at a higher rate than when the display result is a big hit (the number of types of counting display effect and update effect to be executed is one type). May be determined).

(11) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the reproduction time (reproduction seconds) of the music is displayed as an effect related to the execution status of the music reach effect. It is also possible to display the ratio of the reproduction period (the period from the start of the song to the present time) up to the present time with respect to the reproduction period (the period from the beginning to the end of the song). For example, when the reproduction period of the entire music is 60 seconds, the reproduction ratio is gradually updated such as 10%, 20%, etc. every 6 seconds of the reproduction time of the music. The reproduction ratio may reach 100% at the timing when the music is reproduced to the end (at the time when 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the reproduction of the music). It should be noted that the reproduction time (reproduction seconds) or the reproduction ratio of the music may be displayed by a display body other than the numerical value (for example, the above-mentioned meter).

(12) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G), an example in which the count display effect is continued until the final stage of the determined music reach effect is finished has been described. However, the counting display effect may be ended before the final stage of the determined music reach effect is ended. For example, when the final stage of the determined music reach production is the second stage and the counting display production is started from the first stage (initial value 1), the counting display production is ended only in the first stage (final stage). There is a case where it ends with a value of 15). Further, when the final stage of the determined music reach effect is the third stage and the counting display effect is started from the first step (initial value 1), the counting display effect is ended only in the first step (final step). There may be a case where it is ended with a value of 15), and there may be a case where the count display effect is ended with a second stage (it is ended with a final value of 30). Further, when the final stage of the predetermined music reach effect is the third stage and the counting display effect is started from the second step (initial value 16), the counting display effect is ended only in the second step ( There is a case where it is finished with the final value of 30). Even in such a case, the execution ratio of the count display effect is highest when the music reach effect is in the third stage, second highest when it is in the second stage, and is high in the first stage. Try to be the lowest at some point.

(Example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, as a gaming machine capable of executing the suggestive effect suggesting that the jackpot game state is controlled, a count display effect related to the execution state of the suggestive effect, and a timer effect. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, the gaming machine having such a performance configuration is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and may be a slot machine.

  Further, as described above, the slot machine also includes the main liquid crystal display as the first image display device and the sub liquid crystal display as the second image display device, and the light transmissivity as the movable body. The first logo panel and the second logo panel, which are the ornaments having the above, may be provided.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the music reach effect and the cut-in notice effect can be executed as the suggestive effect, but the slot machine may be able to execute the reel lock effect as the suggestive effect. The reel lock effect means that when the start lever is operated, the reel is not driven by the normal control (for example, the normal rotation method), but is driven by the special control (for example, the reverse rotation method and / or the vibration method). It is a production to make. For example, the reel lock effect is composed of three stages of effects from the first stage to the third stage. In the first stage of the reel lock effect, the reel is vibrated at a low speed, and in the second stage of the reel lock effect, After the first step, the reel is vibrated at a medium speed, and in the third step of the reel lock effect, the reel is vibrated at a high speed after the first step and the second step.

  In the slot machine having such an effect configuration, the sub control unit may execute the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display while the reel lock effect is being executed. Here, during the period when the sub control unit is executing the first stage of the reel lock effect, the first logo panel and the second logo panel are at the origin position which overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display in front and back in a front view. The visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display is reduced. On the other hand, during the period in which the second stage and the third stage of the reel lock production are being executed, the first logo panel and the second logo panel are in the production position where they do not overlap the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display in front view, The visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display is improved. According to such a configuration, when the reel lock effect is at the first stage, it is more difficult to recognize the count display effect than when the reel lock effect is at the second stage and the third stage. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the slot machine having such an effect configuration, the sub control unit may change the ratio at which the count display effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display, depending on the stage of the reel lock effect (for example, 13-17 (G), which is the same as the relationship between the stage of the music reach effect and the execution start timing of the count display effect). Further, the execution ratio of the timer effect may be changed depending on whether or not the count display effect is executed (for example, whether or not to execute the count display effect shown in FIG. 13-17 (H) and cut-in). Similar to the relation with the execution rate of the notice production). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest by making the count display effect and the timer effect in the slot machine relevant to each other.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the later-described embodiments.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the later-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be considered that the above-described embodiments and the embodiments described below disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is, in addition, a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and suggests that the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state (pseudo continuous game). Suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production, expectation notice production, and predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, count up for adding a numerical value, corresponding to the execution of the suggestion production. And a predetermined effect executing unit (a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (countdown effect, count-up effect) for changing the display mode of the effect display. As an effect, a predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying an effect display (“3” defined as an initial value) in the first special mode. A predetermined effect (as shown in (2) to (5) in FIG. 13-9), after displaying "3" which is set as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the countdown operation is performed, whereby the numerical value of A second predetermined effect (FIG. 13-) in which a predetermined operation (addition and count-up operation) is performed after displaying a subtraction countdown effect) and an effect display (“70” defined as an initial value) in the second special mode. 11 (14) to (17), after displaying "70", which is set as the initial value, on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the count-up operation is performed to perform the count-up to add the numerical values. And), and the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I). Specific suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the state is controlled, and a title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the specific suggestion effect. (For example, CPU 120 for effect control), the title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the specific suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the specific suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 8-2). (D), (F)) gaming machines.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area. Moreover, since the notification of the title according to the specific suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can improve the interest and the effect of the production, the gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) ), And a specific suggestion effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, and a title corresponding to the specific suggestion effect. And a title notifying unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying the title, the title notifying unit can notify a title corresponding to the specific suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the specific suggestion effect. There is a certain gaming machine (for example, FIGS. 8-2D and 8F). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, the characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described. Next, the characteristic unit 150IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 14-1 and 14-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 150IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 150IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, a glass door frame 150IW003a having a glass window is provided in the gaming machine frame 150IW003 between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface. The glass door frame 150IW003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 150IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 150IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, the main board 11 is provided with a setting key 150IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later.

  The setting switching main body part provided with an operation part such as these setting keys 150IW051 that can be operated by the player is housed in the board case 150IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 150IW051 does not need to open the board case 150IW201. The substrate case 150IW201 is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back side so that it can be operated.

  Since the board case 150IW201 having the setting key 150IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 closed, The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 150IW003 by using the door key. Further, the setting key 150IW051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in a game arcade, so that only a store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The setting key 150IW051 is also a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic part 150IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

  Further, a display monitor 150IW029 and a display changeover switch 150IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 150IW029 are arranged on the board case 150IW201. The display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 150IW201. That is, the display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are arranged on the front surface of the substrate case 150IW201 when the main substrate 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  As described above, the setting key 150IW051 in the characteristic unit 150IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is The setting key 150IW051 may be operated from the inside of the installed gaming island. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 150IW, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3, the right side portion of the board case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is provided at the right end portion of the outer frame 150IW001a when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. A security cover 150IW500A that covers the front side of the is attached. The security cover 150IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 150IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 150IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 150IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , A plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 150IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 150IW201. The security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 150IW001a via the front end of the short piece 150IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 14-2, the long piece 150IW500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 150IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. By doing so, the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 150IW051 becomes inoperable by the long piece 150IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the setting key 150IW051 moves with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and moves away from the long piece 150IW500Ab to cause the long piece to move. When the covering state with 150IW500Ab is released, the state becomes operable.

  In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic unit 150IW is maintained in a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 150IW500A described above is released, and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to be operated.

  Since the board case 150IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 150IW051 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. It is impossible to change the set value by operating the setting key 150IW051 unless the game machine frame 150IW003 is opened by the door key or the like.

  However, in the state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. An illegal member such as a wire or cell plate is inserted between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or the like installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the setting key 150IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the set value is performed by operating the, the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. By maintaining the restricted state, it is possible to suitably suppress the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

  Further, even when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500A, it is accommodated in the substrate case 150IW201 through the transparent security cover 150IW500A. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like, the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 and the like of the main board 11 are mounted and the situation such as a seal can be easily confirmed.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the characteristic part 150IW, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining Numerical value data indicating the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted in the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-4 and 14-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns that are stored is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 14-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (set value 3), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 14-5 (A), a big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a small hit variation pattern determination table ( (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-6, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a public figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic unit 150IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the setting value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. . The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value being in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually increases. In the feature section 150IW, the winning probability for a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
14-4 (A) to 14 (C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 14-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set values are “2” and “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is supposed to do. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hit, so that the first special symbol has a small probability with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. It is supposed to win.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. You win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when uncertain change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is supposed to do. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 during non-probability change, 1/30 during probability change) To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value Is a "1" or "3", with the same probability (1/2) as a small win.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 in non-probability change, 1/28 in probability change) than in the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is supposed to do. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, with the same probability (1/280 when non-probable variation, 1/28 when probable variation) To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The winning probability is small with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "2".

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 14-4 (A) to (C). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Moreover, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 14-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the small hit is for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 14-4 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 14-4, a case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, similar to the winning probability of the big hit, the winning probability of the small hit may increase as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “1” is set to 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “2” is designed to be 1 / 93.75, You may set so that the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “3” may be 1 / 87.5.

  Further, in a gaming machine in which no small hit is provided, the configuration shown by the characteristic part 150IW may be applied.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-4A to 14C. The big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The common table may be used, and the small hit may be determined by using different tables for the case where the variation special map designation buffer is the first and the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the second.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the case where the degree of advantage increases in the order of the set value “1” <the set value “2” <the set value “3” is shown. May be changed. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintain the high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 14-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in a specific game state (in this example, high probability / high base state), unlike other game states, on the contrary, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is easy to continue) The value “1” may be set to have the highest advantage.

  Further, for example, the same probability change is applied when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the fact that the change display is performed a predetermined number of times (the probability change end count) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of times of termination, the probability variation continuation rate (rate of condominium) may be configured to increase in the order of set value “1” <set value “2” <set value “3”.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 150IW, as a set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 14-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In addition, in this characteristic part 150IW, when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the proportion of which jackpot type is determined is different.

  The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot type A to jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-5 (A), the determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned to each set value, but for simplification of description, assignment is made. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-7, which will be described later, are actually assigned the determination value corresponding to the random number. For simplification, the percentage of the assigned decision value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 14-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is “2”, The determination value is assigned such that when the jackpot type B is highly determined and the set value is “3”, the jackpot type A is highly determined.

  Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 150IW will be described with reference to FIG. 14-5 (B). In the feature portion 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is performed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12, the big hit game state is started. It is a period during which the fanfare production as the production operation to be notified is executed.

  The interval period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and on the effect control board 12 side, after the round in which the special winning opening is opened is completed, Is a period in which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period of time.

  As shown in FIG. 14-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the big hit type A, the longest in the big hit type B, and the longest in the big hit type C. It is set to be short.

  As described above, in the characteristic unit 150IW, when the set value is “1”, the percentage of determination as the jackpot type C is high, and thus the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the percentage of determination as the big hit type A is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature section 150IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of “<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is high, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period, that is, to delay the progress of the game, and thus the gambling gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  The feature section 150IW is configured to be able to execute a big hit medium suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a big hit game. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased. In addition, by directing the player's interest to the suggestion production during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is not easily noticed by the players is commonly executed.

  In addition, in the feature unit 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the percentage of which big hit type is determined for each set value is different, so that the big hit When the winning probability (ball-out rate) is set high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the determination values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set are selected in the descending order of the big hit type A <B <C. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In the present characteristic part 150IW, in any of the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control which are executed after the end of the big hit game state are a special number of times (100 times in the present characteristic part 150IW). The figure game ends, or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type. May be, in the case of a particular big hit type, high-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state, continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is a so-called condominium state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. In the characteristic part 150IW, the jackpot rate is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. The rates (rates of consecutive holidays) may be different.

  Further, in the feature section 150IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the big hit type A to the big hit type C (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.), and the fanfare period and interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, for each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control is different, and the advantage is different You may do it. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  In the characteristic unit 150IW, the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C are determined in different proportions in accordance with the set value, when the variation display result is a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value being set, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot types B, and the jackpot types C that cannot be determined or There may be more than one. In other words, if the jackpot type determination rate differs according to the set value, either one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period differ depending on the type of jackpot. The period may be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the set value may be uniformly determined depending on which of the set values is "1" to "3". Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3” is set, a lottery process is performed with a selection probability according to the set value, and a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are determined. You may.

  In this way, in the characteristic part 150IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. ..

  In the feature section 150IW, the big hit type is determined by using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the game nature itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game property of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and game balls are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game varies depending on the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, which is a high base. Also as a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 (during time saving control). Good. Further, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the game playability of 1 to 3, but the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time it is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to a positive variation state or a big hit gaming state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 14-5 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 14-5 (C), in the present feature part 150IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 14-5 (C), in the characteristic part 150IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values is "1" to "3".

  Further, in the present characteristic part 150IW, regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, the opening period and the number of times of opening the special winning opening during the small hit game are the same, and the advantage degree in the game is the same. .

(Variation pattern determination table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "big hit" and the variation display result "small hit" The small hitting variation pattern determination table used when is predetermined and the variation variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to change the variation display result to "miss" are prepared in advance. .

(Loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 14-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic unit 150IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( In the following, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and different loss variation pattern determination tables are used.

  Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 14-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second lost variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic unit 150IW, the period from when the setting is changed at power-on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, a real time clock or the like may be used to set a special period in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be a special period.

  In the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-6 (A) and (B), both normal reach loss and super reach loss occur in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach or the super reach differs depending on the set value, and thus the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach or the super reach is executed.

  Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-6 (B), and further has a set value. The determination value is assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of executing the normal reach than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and thus the motivation for playing the game in the special period. Can be given to enhance the fun of the game.

  Note that, for example, fluctuation patterns with super reach (or specific fluctuation patterns among them) are determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in set values (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do it. By doing this, the execution rate differs only for a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. Note that conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

  In addition, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-6 (A), the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example). Then, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-6 (B) shows the normal reach loss in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In the characteristic part 150IW, setting suggestive effects can be executed at different rates according to the set value. This is because the execution rates of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different according to the set value, The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and the execution ratios of only the normal reach loss are different according to the set value.

  In the feature unit 150IW, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-6A and 14B is used. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is variably displayed. Note that the special background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

  Not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 150IW, for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a setting value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is different from the normal pattern, and the setting value is 1 or 2) May be selected) to allow the special variation pattern to be selected only in the special period. With such a structure as well, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Non-reach lost variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 14-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 150IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-miss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined as non-reach-loss variation, the non-reach-loss variation A to C is further determined. Is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-6 is configured to include the non-reach loss A to C, and any of the non-reach loss A to C, the normal reach loss, and the super reach loss. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

  As shown in FIG. 14-7, in the non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach-loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high and the setting value is "2". If the setting value is "3", the rate determined as non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high. Is assigned a judgment value.

  In the feature unit 150IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, and therefore the variation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, and therefore the variation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature section 150IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average variation time becomes longer in the order of “<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling probability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  In the characteristic part 150IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different by changing the ratio of the non-reach loses A to C having different fluctuation times according to the set value. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss or super reach loss) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern or the high-speed variation display etc. may be made different so as to produce the effect. It is desirable that there be no difference in how they look.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the average variation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the fixed decorative pattern (final The period in which the stop pattern) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the fixed decorative design (final stop design) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

  Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the proportion of which of the non-reach loses A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. The fixed time may be set, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is higher.

  The characteristic unit 150IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening that has a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time of 1.5 seconds) is provided that is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time of 9 seconds). The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the characteristic unit 150IW, the fluctuation time for shortening, which is used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or larger than the predetermined number, may be changed according to the set value.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, changing the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 150IW will be described. 14-8 to 14-10 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 150IW. In the characteristic unit 150IW, the processes of steps IWS001 and S002 are the same as the processes of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

  When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 150IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 150IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after subtraction is 0 (step 150IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 150IWS004 and the processes of steps 150IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 150IWS006.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS003 to S005, the processing after step 150IWS006 is executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the setting value change and confirmation, the RAM initialization and restoration processing, etc. are executed. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization designation command, and a command for restoration, which will be described later, are transmitted before the production control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when turning on the power to the gaming machine (step 150IWS006).

  In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power-off process (see step 150IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is cleared once in step 150IWS006 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 150 IWS016 and S022), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is cleared when the power-off process is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. Good.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4 (step 150IWS007). Specifically, in step 150IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same process as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 150IWS008). In step 150IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 150IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 150IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values “1” to “3”. (Step 150 IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “3”, the process proceeds to step 150IWS011.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N in step 150IWS008) or when the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (Y in step 150IWS009). The CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

  When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “3” (N in step 150IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag indicating that is set is set (step 150IWS011). If the setting change flag is set (step 150IWS011; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

  In step 150IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS012). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS013). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 150IWS015).

  In this example, the RAM clear processing includes a RAM clear 1 processing (see step 150IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 processing (see step 150IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

  In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the serial ratio and Information for performance display such as winning ratio, base, etc., and setting value information are not cleared and retained. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

  In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the areas other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the performance ratio such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is displayed. Information is retained without being cleared. Further, in the RAM clear 2 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 processing is larger than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 processing.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 150IWS016), and proceeds to step 150IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is OFF (N in step 150IWS012), the setting key 150IW051 is OFF (N in step 150IWS013), and the output signal from the clear switch is OFF ( In N of step 150IWS014, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS017).

  Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 150IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 150IWS018). When the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 150IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 150IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 controls the display monitor 150IW029 to display a display indicating that a RAM error has occurred (for example, a display of "E"). Further, the CPU 103 controls to externally output the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 150IWS020). Then, the processing from step 150IWS018 onward is repeatedly executed.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS007 to S020, in the characteristic unit 150IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 150IWS007 and S008, Y in step 150IWS009), power failure or the like occurs during the setting change. In the case (Y of step 150IWS011), the RAM is cleared and the set value after step 150IWS025 is set on condition that the setting key 150IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened and the setting key 150IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 150IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 150IWS022).

  In this example, by executing the processing of step 150IWS022 and step 150IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Then, after that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple scenes where it is confirmed whether the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on. However, instead of directly checking the state of the clear switch, by checking whether the RAM clear flag is set or not, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on. (See steps 150 IWS025, S034, S048).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS023). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 150IW051 is ON (step 150IWS024). If the setting key 150IW051 is turned on, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value is executed to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS026). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting change command indicating execution of setting change processing for changing the set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS027). ). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 150IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if an abnormality of the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 causes the setting value determination buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 102 for storing the current setting value). The set value is set to "1" (step 150IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

  In addition, on the production control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5). Is displayed, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, the production control board 12 may be configured to display a "maintenance mode" or the like and shift to the maintenance mode by pressing an operation button for production such as the push button 31B. “Maintenance mode” means, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock, the history of various error occurrences (a record of when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the setting value was changed and after the change). This is the mode in which you can check the recorded settings. When the setting key 150IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also completed.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 150IWS030). Then, when the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 150IWS031 and executes power-off processing (step 150IWS031). In the power-off process of step 150IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is in the ON state). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 103 executes a process for stopping power supply for storing necessary data (for example, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area. To do.

  Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the identified set value on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 controls the external output of the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 150IWS033).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS043.

  If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 150IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the initial setting completion flag indicating that the value has been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the power supply of the gaming machine is turned on (step 150IWS036). The clear switch buffer is a buffer provided in the RAM 102 for setting the input state of the clear switch (whether it is in the on state or the off state). For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting completed flag is set (if the value has been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the game machine was powered on), the process proceeds to step 150IWS039.

  If the flag set for the first time is not set (that is, if the value has not been set in the clear switch buffer once after the game machine is powered on), the CPU 103 turns the clear switch buffer on. The value shown (for example, "1") is set (step 150IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets the initial setting completion flag (step 150IWS038).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 150IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is a buffer provided in the RAM 102 for setting the input state (on or off) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, in the last time clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and a value of "0" is set in the off state.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 150IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 turns off the value set in the clear switch buffer last time (for example, "0") and turns on the value set in the clear switch buffer (for example, "1"). It is confirmed whether or not (step 150IWS041).

  If the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is OFF and the value set in the clear switch buffer is ON, the CPU 103 updates the setting value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029. At the same time as displaying, it is stored in the set value determination buffer (update storage for the set value already stored) (step 150IWS042). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to “2” and the set value “2” is stored in the set value determination buffer. When "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to "3" and the set value "3" is stored in the set value determination buffer. If "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to "1" and the set value "1" is stored in the set value determination buffer.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is turned on (step 150IWS043). If the setting key 150IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030, the processes of steps 150IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 150IW051 is off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 150IWS044.

  When the RAM clear flag is not set by executing the processing of the above steps 150IWS025 to S043 (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the game machine is powered on) (steps 150IWS025 and S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 150IWS026), and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the game machine is powered on) (Y in steps 150IWS025 and S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 150IWS027). At the same time, a setting confirmation process (especially step 150IWS032) and a setting change process (especially 150IWS035 to S042) are performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 150IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 150IWS033. , The security information timer is set in step 150IWS044, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

  On the other hand, in the present example, the security signal is externally output even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs by executing the process of step 150IWS020, but in this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is done.

  Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 150IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS047).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 150IWS049. The processing of steps 150IWS049 and S050 in the characteristic unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

  If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process to clear the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (150IWS051). The processing of steps 150IWS052 to S055 in the characteristic unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 14-11 is an explanatory diagram of a process executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 150IW, as shown in FIG. 14-11, the clear switch is turned on when the setting key 150IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is turned on). If so, the setting confirmation process (especially step 150IWS032) and the setting change process (especially 150IWS035 to S042) are executed, the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (especially step 150IWS032) is executed and the restoration process (step 150IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 150IW051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, Only the restoration process (step 150IWS049) is executed.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) and 14-12 (B), when the power is turned off (power is cut) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 ends. If the big winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 150IW051 is turned on. The setting confirmation process is executed by the CPU 103 on condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029.

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the store clerk or the like in the game hall in the setting change process. Each time the display switch 150IW029 is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the clear switch is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ... In addition, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-12 (E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 150IW029 based on the setting key 150IW051 being turned off by the operation of the clerk or the like in the amusement hall, thereby turning on the amusement hall. The clerk or the like is notified that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 14-12 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state in which the game can be played, that is, a variation display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  In the setting change processing in the characteristic unit 150IW, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 150IW029, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value that is most unfavorable to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 150IW) or the most advantageous to the player. You may make it display a setting value ("3" in case of this characteristic part 150IW).

  In the example shown in FIG. 14-12, the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 150IW029 when confirming or changing the setting value. Without being limited to this mode, for example, the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 150IW029 may be used to display the set value. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 150IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 150IW029 displays 4-digit "-S-1", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 150IW029 shows "-S-2". May be displayed, or if the set value is "3", the display monitor 150IW029 may display 4-digit "-S-3". Further, for example, the setting values may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 150IW029. For example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 150IW029 displays four digits of "1111", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 150IW029 displays four digits of "2222". May be.

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the main feature unit 150IW will be described. 14-13 and 14-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 150IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 150IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 150 IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 150IWS104).

  By performing the processing of steps 150IWS102 to S104, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol in this feature unit 150IW. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in accordance with the order of starting winning in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

  Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number of the special symbol pointer = 1 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 150IWS105). Specifically, the CPU 103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 150IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, the CPU 103, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates "first", in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved storages = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 150IWS107). The CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 150IWS108). As described above, in the characteristic part 150IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change processing is executed at the time of power-on by executing the processing of step 150IWS047. The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 150 IWS 108.

  In this example, the same set value command is transmitted when the set value command is transmitted in step 150IWS047 and when the set value command is transmitted in step 150IWS108, but the set value command is different. It may be configured to send a command. For example, in step 150IWS047, a command for directly designating a setting value (for example, commands 9E01 (H) to 9E03 (H) according to the setting values “1” to “3”) is transmitted, while in step 150IWS108, the setting value is set. It may be configured such that identifiable fluctuation pattern commands are transmitted and the fluctuation pattern commands are prepared for the number of set values (for example, when the set value is “1”, commands 1C00 (H) to The command 2C00 (H) -is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "2", and the command 3C00 (H) -is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "3".

  Further, in the case of the above-described configuration, if different variation pattern commands are transmitted for each set value even when the same variation pattern is used, the total number of variation patterns × the number of set values (3 in this example) ) Change pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the setting value command may be transmitted only when a specific fluctuation pattern is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern may be provided with the fluctuation pattern commands for the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

  In this example, the same set value command is sent for the set value command (see step 150IWS047) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 150IWS108) sent at the start of fluctuation. It is not limited to various forms. For example, the set value command for power-on and the set value command for start of fluctuation may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be transmitted at power-on and at the start of fluctuation. Good.

  Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted when the set value is “3”.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the setting value, and depending on which setting value is on the production control CPU 120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. Alternatively, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a rate, or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate if the setting value is 3. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence / absence of pseudo stations, number of pseudo stations, presence / absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio The variation pattern may be selected with.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the set value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation, for example.

  Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 150IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the probability variation state background designating command in the case of the probability variation state, controls the transmission of the time reduction state background designating command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judging module compares a predetermined big hit judging value and a small hit judging value (see FIG. 14-4) with a random number value MR1 and, when they match, determines a big hit or a small hit. The program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

  If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 150IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 150IWS111). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 150IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 150IWS112), and proceeds to step 150IWS116.

  If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step 150IWS111), that is, if it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS116.

  When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 150 IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 14-5) to determine the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as a big hit type (step 150 IWS114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 150IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a falling symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to a big hit classification. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 150IWS117).

(Production mode change processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the characteristic unit 150IW will be described. 14-15 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 150IW. In the characteristic control unit 150IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control random number updating process of step S77 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 150IWS201), and thereafter. The process returns to step S73.

  In the present characteristic part 150IW, it is possible to control in three types of effect modes, ie, effect modes A to C, and, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the notice production and reach production are different. In the effect mode changing process of step 150IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the production control board 12, the production mode may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined date or time is reached based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, the lottery process based on a random number may be executed to change the effect mode based on the decision to change the effect mode.

  In step 150IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, the flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when changing to the effect mode A, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode B, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode C is changed, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The way of changing the effect mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as effect mode A → effect mode B → effect mode C → effect mode A →. The modes A to C may be randomly changed.

(Command analysis process)

  14-16 and 14-17 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 150IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 150IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 150IWS303). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

  If the received effect control command is the setting value command (step 150IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 150 IWS 305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power of the gaming machine is turned on (step 150IWS306).

  In the feature unit 150IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. It Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where the setting value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the setting value command even when the setting confirmation processing or the recovery processing is executed. The configuration may be configured so that the set value command is always transmitted when the power is turned on.

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the setting change processing is performed. However, the set value command is normally transmitted due to missing command or garbled data. If not received, the process of step 150 IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in the characteristic unit 150IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the process of step 150IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It can be executed so that the set value is stored in the set value storage area.

  In addition, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read on the production control CPU 120 side, the set value command is changed to the set value command. It may be configured to determine whether the included setting value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that cannot be set. If the setting value command is abnormal, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 120 side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and when a new set value command is received thereafter, the new set value command is used. If the set value shown does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred and an abnormality may be determined. Then, even when it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command is not normally received, and the effect is limited according to the processing method shown in the feature section 150IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial result setting)
In the characteristic part 150IW, when either the initialization designation command or the command for restoration is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis process on the side of the effect control board 12, the image display device 5 makes a predetermined initial appearance. (Specifically, a combination of decorative patterns, which is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) is controlled (hereinafter, also referred to as an initial appearance effect).

  If the received production control command is the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration (step 150IWS307), the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value that is set, by using the initial hit determination table, even initial hits (for example, "246" or "224", etc.), which is a combination of even decorative patterns, and odd decorative patterns are combined. It is determined to be one of an odd initial number (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial number that is a combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 150IWS309). . Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

  14-18 is an explanatory view showing an example of the initial result determination table. In step 150IWS309, using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 14-18 (A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed in accordance with the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area. Determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 14-18 (A), the odds of initial outcomes are determined to be higher in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the odd-numbered initial numbers are displayed, it means that the setting has been changed, and the set value is advantageous compared with the case where the even-numbered initial numbers are displayed. Will be suggested to be set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-18 (A), the special initial result may be decided only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game is started, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be enhanced.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150IWS310). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and determines the initial result by using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 14-18 (A) (step 150IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 150IW is the most disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. The initial result is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 14-18 (A), with respect to the set value “1”, the odds of being decided as the initial odd number are the lowest, and there is no case of being decided as the special initial number. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player is discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial result or a special initial result despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS312). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result by using the initial result decision table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

  FIG. 14-18 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial result determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 14-18 (B), in the initial result determination table for the effect mode C, the odd initial initial result is determined as compared with the case of the setting value “3” that is most advantageous for the player. The proportion is low, and it is not decided that it is a special initial result.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS312 to S313, in the characteristic unit 150IW, a disadvantageous setting value is set when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. Despite the fact that the odd initial numbers and the special initial numbers are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial result determined in steps 150IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 150IWS314).

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result to be an even initial result and the image display device 5 In step 1, control is performed to display an even-numbered initial result (step 150IWS315).

  By executing the process of step 150IWS315, the present characteristic part 150IW uniformly displays the even initial numbers when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode B is set. By this, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by displaying an odd initial number or a special initial number despite the disadvantageous set value, and prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

  Even when the setting value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial winning symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the determination rate of the odd-numbered initial-drawing symbols is set lower than the setting value “1” of the initial-numbering determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

  In this example, the case where the set value command is not normally received and the even initial number is uniformly displayed in the production mode B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of symbols "????" as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial result. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest the setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial result.

  Further, the processing when the set value command is not successfully received (or when the set value is not normally stored) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 150IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. In addition, for example, it is configured to store an exclusive set value (for example, set value “4”) indicating that the set value command could not be received normally in the set value storage area and determine the initial result. Good.

  If the received production control command is a setting value abnormality error command (step 150IWS316), the production control CPU 120 executes setting value abnormality error notification (step 150IWS317). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "A setting value error is occurring" on the image display device 5, or outputs a voice or an error sound indicating the setting value error from the speakers 8L and 8R. It outputs and controls the game effect lamp 9 and the LED to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when performing the set value abnormality error notification, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs a maximum volume sound or an error sound, and the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits the maximum brightness (for example, a full color LED). In this case, it is desirable to emit white light.

  If the received production control command is a variation pattern command (production control command that designates a variation pattern) (step 150IWS320), the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command stored in the RAM. The data is stored in the area (step 150 IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS322).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (effect control command for specifying whether to make a big hit or a small hit, big hit type, small hit type) (step 150IWS323), for effect control The CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 150IWS324).

  If the received production control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (a production control command that designates that the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed) (step 150IWS325), the production control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag ( Step 150 IWS 326).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (a big hit game start designation command) (step 150IWS327), the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 150IWS328).

  If the received production control command is a big hit end designation command (a production control command that specifies the end of a big hit game) (step 150IWS329), the production control CPU 120 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 150IWS330).

  If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 150IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS301.

  Although the characteristic part 150IW is configured not to display the odd initial number when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the odd initial number may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the odd number initial odds may be determined differently according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

  Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd-numbered initial number and the even-numbered number, an initial number that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied, A value 2 or a set value 3 is confirmed), an initial result that a specific set value is confirmed, or the like may be provided and displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, when the specific initial result is displayed by not determining the specific initial result, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied, and the set value 2 or It is decided that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting the specific initial result to be determined only when the setting value is 3, when the specific initial result is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is 3. .. Further, when determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the present characteristic part 150IW, the setting value is configured to be changeable, and as a setting suggesting effect that suggests the setting value, a pre-game suggesting effect executed before the game starts, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, during the game (for example, It is configured to be able to perform suggestion during a game that is executed during the variation display of a decorative pattern, setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and suggestion during a big hit during a big hit (for example, during a big hit game). Has been done. It should be noted that in the feature unit 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of kinds of effect modes having different suggestion reliability, for example, the type of the setting suggestion effect The reliability of suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game, or pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit. The suggestion reliability during the game may be higher in the order of suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect before game, or suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect before game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion production can be set. For example, the manager of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, pre-game suggestion effects or initial appearance effects in which setting change is suggested), or the execution ratio. The setting may be changed to lower (or increase). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operating means such as the push button 31B or the operating means such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start wait processing)
14-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS501).

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the customer waiting demonstration effect if it is in progress (step 150IWS502, step 150IWS503). The control for ending the display of the displayed puzzle display is performed (step 150IWS504). The puzzle display is started by executing the process of step 150IWS518 described later.

  Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step 150IWS505), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 150IWS506), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the time measurement result by the time measurement means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (N in step 150IWS507). It is confirmed (step 150 IWS508). In step 150IWS508, for example, when the timer (for example, set to 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “miss”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the variable display has not been executed even once, and before the game starts), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. In other words, if the variable display is not executed for a predetermined period of time (and is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

  If the result of timing by the timing means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 150IWS509). That is, in step 150IWS509, it is confirmed whether the game is not started yet.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS510). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestive effect is executed (step 150IWS511). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

  In the characteristic part 150IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp becomes the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is controlled, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect including the aspect is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

  FIG. 14-20 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table. In step 150IWS511, lottery processing based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 14-20 (A), Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 14-20 (A), the determination values are assigned in order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestive effect is executed becomes higher. Has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned such that the ratio determined in the second effect mode becomes higher in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and that the advantageous setting value is set by being executed in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150IWS512). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. And the effect mode is determined (step 150IWS513). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS512 to S513, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 14-20 (A), with respect to the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and there is no case where the third effect mode is determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  If not in the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS514). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

  FIG. 14-20 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 14-20 (B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestive effect as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the case is not determined as the third effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS514 to S515, in the characteristic unit 150IW, a disadvantageous setting value is set when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demo effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 150IWS511, S513, and S515 (step 150IWS516). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS518.

  On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 150IWS517. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

  By executing the processing of step 150IWS514, in the feature unit 150IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, by not executing the pre-game suggestion production, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed to disappoint the player despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect.

  It should be noted that the execution ratio is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 14-20 (A), and only in a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes, the executed ratio may be different depending on the set value. You may

  In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed by preventing the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is determined that the value is the setting value 2 or the setting value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

  In the characteristic part 150IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode according to the set value. (Including 3 effect modes), different execution ratios of the 1st effect mode, 2nd effect mode, and 3rd effect mode depending on the set value, only specific effect modes depending on the set value This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

  The characteristic unit 150IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable even when the setting is not changed. In this case, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when executing the effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

  For example, FIG. 14-20 (C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table used when a command for restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 14-20 (A) and the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 14-20 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change When not performed, the pre-game suggestive effect is executed at a lower rate and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestive effect can be made different between when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 150IWS517). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

  When the process of step 150 IWS 517 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect and big hit suggestion effect), execution content (effect mode during execution), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. Note that when the process of step 150IWS517 is executed, the customer waiting de-effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, The image display device 5 may display execution history information of setting suggestive effects. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions and execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial appearance effect effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. The information may be stored in advance, and an effect of inferring a set value from the information and notifying the set value may be executable. It should be noted that this effect is to notify the expected setting value (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined reference from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, not to notify the actual setting value. .

  In the characteristic part 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 150IWS509 to 150IWS516. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the process of step 150IWS517, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be increased. . Not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 150IW, for example, by using a real-time clock or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time period (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Good. In addition, the execution history information of the setting suggestive effect may not include information about the suggesting effect during game during the special period.

  In addition to the configuration of the characteristic unit 150IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect is accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. In addition, when a player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to shoot a two-dimensional code displayed on a gaming machine and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server will use the received information. You may make it manage the game history of a player, and perform the process which gives a predetermined privilege according to the game history. The player may access the Web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display the execution history information on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information by using the mobile terminal, so that the setting suggesting image suggesting the setting value may be displayed on the display device included in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined reference from the execution history information is calculated, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the puzzle display on the image display device 5 based on the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter (step 150IWS518).

  In this example, there may be a case where a puzzle effect in which jigsaw puzzle pieces are gradually aligned is displayed while the decorative design is being displayed. When the puzzle effect is executed, an effect is performed such that every time the puzzle effect is executed, one piece out of any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 is prepared. Then, after the puzzle production has been executed a plurality of times, it is suggested that the setting value is "1" when all the pieces of the puzzle 1 are finally completed, and the setting value is set when all the pieces of the puzzle 2 are completed. It is suggested to be "2", and it is suggested that the setting value is "3" when the puzzle 3 is completed with all pieces.

  Further, in this example, the puzzle is not always displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern every time, but only the variable display determined to execute the puzzle effect (that is, the variable display in which one of the puzzle pieces increases). Only) the puzzle is displayed. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed and the customer waiting demonstration display is being displayed, the puzzle display is displayed on the image display device 5 by executing the process of step 150IWS518, and the puzzle 1 The gathering state of each piece of 3 to 3 can be confirmed.

  The first piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 1. The second piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 2. The third piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 3. In this example, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter stored in the RAM 122 are not supplied with power to the gaming machine. When the game machine is powered on, it is assumed that the value of the first piece counter to the third piece counter is 0.

  In step 150IWS518, an image of puzzle 1 in which a number of pieces corresponding to the value of the first piece counter is collected is displayed, and an image of puzzle 2 in which a number of pieces corresponding to the value of the second piece counter is collected is displayed, The puzzle display is displayed by displaying an image of puzzle 3 in which a number of pieces corresponding to the value of the third piece counter are collected.

(Variable display start setting process)
14-21 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 150IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step 150IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (stop). (Symbol) is determined (step 150 IWS602). That is, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of step 150 IWS602 to display the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (pattern) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop design of the decorative design in the decorative design display result storage area. In step 150IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on only the variation pattern command. .

  In step 150IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates the probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stop symbol. Further, for example, when the received display result designating command indicates a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as a stop symbol. To do.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative designs of the small hit design according to the small hit type designated by the display result designation command. . In this example, in the case of small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol, and the small hit. When the type is C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a deviation, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined.

  When the pseudo pattern is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 150IWS602 that a chance eye symbol (such as "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo sequence. , Which is a combination of a big hit symbol that does not reach and a symbol that is offset by one symbol) are also determined.

  The production control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop design is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the variation number counter for counting the number of times that the variation display of the decorative pattern has been performed since the game machine was powered on (step 150IWS603). In this example, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the value of the variation counter stored in the RAM 122 is cleared when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the game is played. It is assumed that the value of the variation counter is 0 when the machine is powered on.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes in-game suggestive effect determination processing for determining the presence or absence of the in-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS604).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a puzzle effect setting process for setting the presence / absence of a puzzle effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS605).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the suggestion-in-game effect and the puzzle effect if the variation pattern and execution of the suggest-in-game effect or the puzzle effect are determined (step 150IWS606). . And CPU120 for production control starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 150IWS607).

  The process table is a table in which process data that the production control CPU 120 refers to when performing control of the production device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (effect parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation forming the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern are described. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decorative pattern in a variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. The process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

  If execution of the in-game suggestion effect is determined in the in-game suggestion effect determination process of step 150IWS604, a process table including the in-game suggestion effect is selected in step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 is selected in accordance with the selected process table. And the effect display during variable display (step S172) is executed, so that the suggestion during game is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  If execution of the puzzle effect is decided in the puzzle effect setting process of step 150IWS605, a process table including the puzzle effect is selected in step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 and variable display effect process according to the selected process table. By executing (step S172), the puzzle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120, according to the content of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (image display device 5 as effect part, effect part as effector). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 150IWS608).

  In the characteristic unit 150IW, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command in a one-to-one manner. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation time timer to a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command (step 150IWS609). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 150IWS610), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(During game suggestion production decision processing)
FIG. 14-22 is a flowchart showing an example of in-game suggestive effect determination processing (step 150IWS604). The game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the special period (Y in step 150IWS701), the first in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 150IWS702), and it is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 150IWS701), the second in-game suggestive effect determination table is selected (step 150IWS703). For example, when the setting change end command or the setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag may be reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 150IWS701 whether or not the special period is in progress.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Whether or not to execute the in-game suggestive effect is determined by using the selected in-game suggestive effect determination table (step 150IWS705).

  14-23 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first in-game suggestive effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 14-23 (B) is a second in-game suggestive effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

  In each of the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion during game is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

  As for the second effect mode (appearance of the mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of the mini character A). The determination value is assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that of the set value. That is, the second effect mode has higher reliability with respect to the setting value being more advantageous than the first effect mode.

  Further, in the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect having a high reliability is executed only in the special period. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game for a special period, and to enhance the interest.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appears) may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is "3".

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150IWS706). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode by using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 150 IWS707).

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS706 to S707, the characteristic unit 150IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B), for the set value "1", the rate of determining to execute the in-game suggestive effect is low and the rate of being determined as the second effect mode. Is the lowest, and there is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS708). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS709).

  FIG. 14-23 (C) is an explanatory view showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 14-23 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS708 to S709, the characteristic unit 150IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly ends the process. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

  By executing the processing of step 150IWS708, in the feature unit 150IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B, by not performing the in-game suggestion production, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by executing the suggestive effect during game, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the in-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the in-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of in-game suggestive effect.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

  In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed by preventing the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is determined that the value is the setting value 2 or the setting value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

  In the present characteristic part 150IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion during game at different rates according to the set value, but this is the suggestion during game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode and the second effect mode according to the set value). (Including 3 effect modes), different execution ratios of the 1st effect mode, 2nd effect mode, and 3rd effect mode depending on the set value, only specific effect modes depending on the set value This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

  It should be noted that the feature section 150IW is configured to be able to execute the in-game suggestion effect in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. Alternatively, a different mode suggestive effect may be executable. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, in the present characteristic unit 150IW, the presence / absence of execution of in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are configured to be different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and a set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the pseudo continuous effect, and the display result become a big hit. Depending on whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, the effect mode when executing may be different.

  For example, the in-game suggestion effect may be executable only when the change pattern includes at least the reach effect (that is, the change time is longer than the non-reach change pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter has a higher ratio of executing the in-game suggestive effect. Alternatively, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed is increased and the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed is increased. It may be higher.

  Further, for example, in a variation pattern including a pseudo-relational effect and a variation pattern that does not include a pseudo-relational effect (or the number of pseudo-repetition times is smaller than that in the former), the former has a higher percentage of execution of the in-game suggestive effect. It may be set higher, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be higher, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed becomes higher and The reliability may be increased.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and in the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may be configured to have a higher ratio in which the suggestive effect during game is executed. The reliability when the medium suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, and the reliability when the inside suggestion effect is executed may be increased. .

(Puzzle production setting process)
14-24 and 14-25 are flowcharts showing an example of the puzzle effect setting process (step 150IWS605). In the puzzle effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a puzzle completion flag indicating that any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 has been completed is set (step 150IWS801). If the puzzle completion flag is set, the puzzle effect setting process ends.

  By executing the processing of step 150 IWS801, in this example, a puzzle effect may be executed until one of the puzzles 1 to 3 is completed after the power of the game machine is turned on. When any one of the puzzles is completed, the puzzle effect is not executed thereafter (that is, only one puzzle is completed, and two or more puzzles are not completed).

  In addition, you may comprise so that two or more puzzles may be completed, without being restricted to the aspect shown in this example.

  If the puzzle completion flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the puzzle effect determination table for determining whether to execute the puzzle effect, and executes the puzzle effect. It is determined whether or not (step 150 IWS802). FIG. 14-26 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the puzzle effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 14-26, in this example, it is determined that the puzzle effect is executed with a probability of 1% when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed.

  Generally, in a game store, when a game is continuously played between the opening of the game store and the closing of the game store, it is possible to perform a variable display of the decorative design approximately 3000 times at the maximum (however, the game machine is displayed). There is a difference depending on the model). In this example, the maximum number of pieces of each of the puzzles 1 to 3 is 5, and when any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 has 5 pieces, the puzzle is completed. In this example, even if the puzzle does not have all the pieces, the judgment values are assigned so that it is easy to get the pieces up to 3 to 4 pieces, so that it is possible to complete one of the puzzles 1 to 3. It takes about 11 to 13 times to execute the puzzle effect, and since the determination rate for executing the puzzle effect is 1%, it generally takes about 1100 to 1300 times to perform the variable display of the decorative pattern. Therefore, in this example, after the amusement shop is opened, it is designed that one of the puzzles will be completed in about the afternoon. The puzzle may be completed in the morning without being limited to such an aspect.

  In addition, in this example, the case where one type of puzzle effect determination table shown in FIGS. For example, different puzzle effect determination tables may be used to change the puzzle effect execution ratio according to the time of day, the number of times of variable display execution, and the setting by the game shop staff.

  Further, in this example, the case where the maximum number of pieces of the puzzles 1 to 3 is 5 pieces is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and is, for example, 3 pieces, 4 pieces, or 6 pieces or more. It may be configured to exist. Further, the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 does not necessarily have to be the same number. For example, the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 1 is four, while the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 3 is five. The maximum number of pieces may differ for each puzzle.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the puzzle effect (step 150IWS803). If it is decided not to execute the puzzle effect, the puzzle effect setting process is ended as it is. When it is decided to execute the puzzle effect, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the variation counter is 1000 or less (step 150IWS804). If the value of the variation counter is 1000 or less (that is, if the variation display of the decorative pattern from the power-on of the game machine is executed 1000 times or less), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. The puzzle effect mode determination table A is selected as a table for determination (step 150IWS805).

  If the value of the variation counter is not less than 1000 (that is, if the variation display of the decorative pattern from the power-on of the gaming machine is more than 1000), the effect control CPU 120 stores it in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122. It is confirmed whether or not the set value being set is the set value “1” (step 150 IWS806). If the setting value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table B as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS807).

  If the setting value is not "1", the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 is the setting value "2" (step 150IWS808). If the set value is "2", the effect control CPU 120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table C as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS809).

  If the setting value is not “2” (that is, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 is the setting value “3”), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. As the table, the puzzle effect mode determination table D is selected (step 150IWS810).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the puzzle effect mode determination table selected in steps 150IWS805, S807, S809, and S810 to perform lottery processing based on random numbers to determine the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS811).

  FIG. 14-27 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table. Of these, FIG. 14-27 (A) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table A selected in step 150IWS805. 14-27 (B) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table B selected in step 150IWS807. 14-27 (C) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table C selected in step 150IWS809. Further, FIG. 14-27 (D) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table D selected in step 150IWS810.

  As shown in FIGS. 14-27, in each of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the determination values for puzzle effect 1, puzzle effect 2, and puzzle effect 3 as the effect mode (type) of the puzzle effect, respectively. Has been allocated. The puzzle effect 1 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which one of the puzzles 1 to 3 of the puzzle 1 is increased. Further, the puzzle effect 2 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which one of the puzzles 1 to 3 of the puzzles 1 to 3 is increased. Further, the puzzle effect 3 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 out of the puzzles 1 to 3 is increased by one.

  As shown in FIG. 14-27 (A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 3% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the game machine is turned on, until the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, the percentage of the puzzle effect 3 being executed and the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 being increased by 1 is slightly high. Therefore, in the present example, for example, even if the set value that has been set is the set value "1" which is low in the degree of advantage, the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 having the high degree of advantage is up to a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4). Are easy to get together.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (B), in the puzzle effect mode determination table B, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 1 is 1% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 2 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the game machine is turned on, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, and when the set value is set to "1", the puzzle effect 1 is executed and the puzzle The rate at which one piece increases by one is slightly higher.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (C), in the puzzle effect mode determination table C, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 2 is 1% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 1 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, and when the set value is set to "2", the puzzle effect 2 is executed and the puzzle The rate at which 2 pieces increase by 1 is slightly higher.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (D), in the puzzle effect mode determination table D, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 3 is 1% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the game machine is turned on, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, and when the setting value is set to "3", the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the puzzle The rate at which the number of 3 pieces increases by 1 is slightly higher.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 14-27, in any of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the execution ratio of any one of the puzzle effects 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3 as compared with the other puzzle effects. Since it is only high, it is easy to collect all the pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 to some extent, and it is a puzzle other than the puzzle in which the maximum number (5 pieces in this example) of puzzles 1 to 3 is finally prepared. However, it is configured so that at least 3 to 4 pieces can be easily aligned.

  Note that the method of configuring the puzzle effect mode determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to determine the effect mode of the puzzle effect using different puzzle effect mode determination tables according to the settings of the game shop staff, and to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the puzzle effect. May be. For example, depending on the setting, the pieces of the puzzles 1 to 3 may be evenly arranged to some extent, or a particular puzzle may be made to have pieces more easily than other puzzles or may be changed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 1 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS812). When the puzzle effect 1 is determined, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “1” (step 150IWS813). If the set value is “1”, the process directly proceeds to step 150 IWS815.

  If the set value is not "1", the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the value of the first piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS814). If the value of the first piece counter is 4, the process does not move to steps 150IWS815 to S818, but moves to step 150IWS819. That is, in this case, the value of the first piece counter is 4 means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 1 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 1 is executed, the fifth piece is gathered and the puzzle 1 is collected. Although it will be completed, since the set value that is set is not the set value "1" and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, steps 150IWS815- It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S818.

  When the set value is "1" (Y in step 150IWS813) or the value of the first piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS814), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 1 is to be executed. The puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set (step 150IWS815). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 1 is selected based on that the puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set, and steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process (step S172), the puzzle effect 1 is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The puzzle effect 1 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first piece counter (step 150IWS816), and confirms whether the value of the first piece counter after addition is 5 (step 150IWS817). If the value of the first piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS818).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS819). When the puzzle effect 2 is determined, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “2” (step 150IWS820). If the setting value is "2", the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS822.

  If the setting value is not "2", the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the second piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS821). If the value of the second piece counter is 4, the process proceeds to step 150IWS826 without proceeding to the process of steps 150IWS822 to S825. That is, in this case, the value of the second piece counter is 4 means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 2 have been gathered, and when the puzzle effect 2 is executed, the fifth piece is gathered and the puzzle 2 is collected. Although it will be completed, the set value that is set is not the set value "2", and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value. It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S825.

  When the set value is "2" (Y in step 150IWS820) or the value of the second piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS821), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 2 is executed. The puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set (step 150IWS82). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 2 is selected based on that the puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set, and steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process (step S172), the puzzle effect 2 is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The puzzle effect 2 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second piece counter (step 150IWS823), and confirms whether the value of the second piece counter after addition is 5 (step 150IWS824). If the value of the second piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS825).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 3 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS826). When the puzzle effect 3 is determined, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 is the setting value “3” (step 150IWS827). If the set value is “3”, the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS829.

  If the set value is not "3", the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the third piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS828). If the value of the third piece counter is 4, the process of steps 150IWS829 to S832 is not performed and the puzzle effect setting process is ended. That is, in this case, the value of the third piece counter is 4, which means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 3 have been gathered, and when the puzzle effect 3 is executed, the fifth piece is gathered to form the puzzle 3. Although it will be completed, since the set value that is set is not the set value “3” and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set set value, step 150 IWS829- It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S832.

  When the set value is "3" (Y in step 150IWS827) or the value of the third piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS828), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 3 is to be executed. The puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set (step 150IWS829). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 3 is selected based on that the puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set, and steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS 608 and the variable display effect process (step S172), the puzzle effect 3 is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The puzzle effect 3 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the third piece counter (step 150IWS830), and confirms whether the value of the third piece counter after addition is 5 (step 150IWS831). If the value of the third piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS832).

  In this example, the processing of steps 150 IWS813, S814, S820, S821, S827, and S828 does not match the set value suggested by the completed puzzle with the actually set value. In such a case, the puzzle effect is canceled to prevent such a situation from occurring, but the processing mode is not limited thereto. For example, step 150IWS811 may be executed again, and the production mode of the puzzle production may be determined again until the production mode of the puzzle production that does not cause such a mismatch is determined. Further, for example, it may be configured to redetermine the effect mode of the puzzle effect by using a table excluding the effect mode of the puzzle effect that causes such a mismatch.

  In addition, in this example, the control is performed so that the set value suggested in the completed puzzle and the set value actually set do not coincide with each other. Instead, the set value suggested in the completed puzzle may not necessarily match the set value actually set. For example, when the set value is “3”, the rate of completion of the puzzle 3 is highest, but the puzzle 1 and the puzzle 2 may be completed in some cases.

  Also for the puzzle effect, check whether the set value command reception flag is set (whether or not the set value command is normally received), and if the set value command is not normally received, the game is played. The execution of the puzzle effect may be limited similarly to the determination of the previous suggestion effect, the suggestion effect during game, and the suggestion effect during big hit.

(Direction determination process during big hit)
FIG. 14-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit mid-game effect determination process. The big hit mid-game production determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit mid-game effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS901). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Whether or not the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when it is executed are determined (step 150IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

  In step S150IWS902, if the period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the process shown in FIG. When the one big hit suggestive effect determination table is selected, and when it is not during the specific period, the second big hit suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 14-29 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence / absence of execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but it is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the last series of games. It may be the time when the display is started or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and a first specific period (a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed 50 times) and a second specific period (the 51st change after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a big hit medium suggestive effect determination table in which the presence or absence of the big hit medium suggestive effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different between the display and the 100th variation display).

  In each of the first and second big hitting suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B), the big hitting suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

  Further, in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period is high. The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, during the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game in a specific period, and to increase interest. Not limited to the configuration of the characteristic unit 150IW, the suggestive effect during big hit (or a particular effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and not in a non-specific period.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, it is determined that the set value is "3" by executing the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode.

  In the present feature part 150IW, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (A1), the decoration pattern to be a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (B1), a dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 150IW102 is displayed.

  Further, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (A1), after the decorative pattern which is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the figure is displayed. As shown in 14-31 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 150IW105 is displayed.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150IWS903). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect and determines the effect mode by using the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 150 IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS903 to S904, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not to execute the suggestion during big hit and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B), the setting value “1” has the lowest ratio of the second effect mode and the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the disadvantageous set value being set, the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player. It is possible to reduce the number of accidents and prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS905). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the effect during the big hit and the effect mode, using the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

  FIG. 14-29 (C) is an explanatory view showing an example of a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 14-29 (C), in the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the rate itself for determining the big hit medium suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the fourth effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 150IWS905 to S906, the characteristic unit 150IW sets an unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode C is set. Despite that, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

  On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 150IWS907. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  By executing the processing of step 150IWS905, in the feature unit 150IW, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B, by not performing the big hit medium suggestion production, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged due to the execution of a suggestion during a big hit, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit medium suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect during the big hit.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 14-29 (A), when the big hit occurs in the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be changed according to the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 14-29 (B), regardless of the set value, the proportion in which the suggestion during big hit is not executed is configured to be the same, but if the proportion not executed is different depending on the set value. You may allow it.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 150IW, when a big hit is made in a specific period, a big hit mid-range suggestion effect is configured to be executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, The setting suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue image suggesting the set value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

  In the feature part 150IW, the big hit medium suggestion effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value, but this is the big hit medium suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode). Execution ratios (including the production mode and the fourth production mode) are different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode, and the fourth production mode are different according to the set values, and the set values are set. It is a concept including that the execution ratio differs only in a specific effect mode (for example, a third effect mode) according to

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 150IWS907).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (A1), the movable member 150IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, control for moving the movable member 150IW101 to the front surface of the image display device 5 is performed as shown in FIG. 14-30 (B2).

  As shown in FIGS. 14-30 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 150IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 produces an effect during the big hit. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In the present feature part 150IW, since the big hit medium suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings in the fanfare period in the big hit game, the movable member 150IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is a big hit. The serif image displayed by the medium suggestion is not obscured. However, during the fanfare period, when the movable member 150IW101 operates due to the effect production, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 150IW101 and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion production may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 150IWS907, by using the character effect determination table shown in FIG. 14-29 (D), the character effect is not executed when the mid-hit suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize and reduce the interest. Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the big hit mid-range suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize even if the big hit mid-range suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing.

  In addition, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the big hit medium effect indication is performed. It is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 150IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the serif image by the big hit medium suggestion effect), or the big hit. The display position of the serif image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is determined, the execution ratio of the accessory effect may be reduced to limit the execution of the accessory effect. Further, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 14-29 (D), the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate even when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed.

  Next, when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 150IWS908), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 150IWS909).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light-transmitting light guide plate 150IW103 capable of transmitting light and a light-emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end surface of the light guide plate are provided. It is assumed that a light emitting member is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate 150IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 150IW103 and emits the light to the front surface of the game machine. Then, it is possible to perform a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 150IW103 to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided in the light guide plate 150IW103 to the front surface of the game machine, and the “big hit” is achieved. Appears. In addition, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the light guide plate effect.

  In step 150IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 14-29 (E), the light guide plate effects are executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode when it is executed. It Specifically, when the large-hit mid-hit suggestion of the first effect mode is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effects being executed is high, and the second-hit mid-hit suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode is suggested. When the effect is performed, the light guide plate effect is configured to be executed at a low rate. That is, when the big hit medium suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the big hit medium suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 150IW104 is displayed in the big hit medium suggestion effect of the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. If so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having a bad interest in the game due to a suggestion during a big hit, which is an undesirable effect for the player. When the big hit medium suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate. The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestive effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

  Next, an aspect of the puzzle effect will be described. 14-32 to 14-34 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a presentation mode of puzzle production. As shown in FIG. 14-32 (A), in the variable display of the decorative design for which the execution of the puzzle effect has not been decided, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the left middle right decorative pattern is displayed. The fluctuation display of is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 14-32 (B), the variation time ends and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and further, as shown in FIG. 14-32 (C), the next variation of the decorative symbol. It is assumed that the display has started. In the example shown in FIG. 14-32 (C), it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect is determined and the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-32 (C), for example, the effect screen (puzzle effect screen) 150IW106 for the puzzle effect is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the puzzle effect is started.

  14-32 (D) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 shown in FIG. 14-32 (C). As shown in FIG. 14-32 (D), a puzzle effect screen 150IW106 displays a puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), a puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and a puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3). In addition, in the example illustrated in FIG. 14-32 (D), one piece 150IW107-1 is already collected in the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1), and one piece is still collected in the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2). However, the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) shows a case where two pieces have already been gathered.

  Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 14-33 (E), one new piece 150IW108-1 flies in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is created that encourages which of the puzzles 1) to 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits into. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-33 (F), the new piece 150IW108-1 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2) increases by one. The performance is executed. Then, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is erased and the puzzle effect is ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-33 (G), it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect has not been decided in the next variable display of the decorative design, and the image display device is shown as shown in FIG. 14-33 (G). In 5, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed, but the variable display of the left middle right decorative design is displayed.

  Next, thereafter, the puzzle effect is not executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed, and the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-33 (H). It is assumed to be in a state. In this example, when the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 14-33 (H), for example, a puzzle display display screen (puzzle display screen) 150IW110 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, the display of the puzzle display is started, and the current state of collection of pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) is displayed.

  After that, the game is started again, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed a plurality of times, and the puzzle effect is also executed a plurality of times. Then, when the variable display of a certain decorative pattern is started thereafter, it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect has been determined and the puzzle effect 2 has been determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect, and the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is displayed. It is assumed that the puzzle production has started. 14-34 (I) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 displayed in the variable display of the decorative design. In the example shown in FIG. 14-34 (I), the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) has already gathered three pieces 150IW107-1, and the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2) has already gathered four pieces. The puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) shows a case where four pieces have already been gathered.

  Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 has been determined, as shown in FIG. 14-34 (J), one new piece 150IW108-5 flies in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is created that encourages which of the puzzles 1) to 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits into. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-34 (K), the new piece 150IW108-5 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) increases by one. The performance is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 14-34 (K), the maximum number of pieces in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is 5 and the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is completed. At, a character display such as "Puzzle 2 completed!" Is displayed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-34 (L), the character "2" also appears in the completed puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the set value that is set is the set value "2". Is suggested.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 14-34 (L), the number "2" is displayed to directly suggest that the setting value is "2". I can't stop. For example, instead of such a direct expression, a picture corresponding to the setting value "2" (a picture reminiscent of the setting value "2") is displayed by being completed when the puzzle is completed. May be

  14-32 to 14-34 show the case where the puzzle 2 is completed and the setting value "2" is suggested, but the setting value "1" and the setting value "3" are suggested. When performing, the puzzle effect is executed in the same effect mode.

  In the feature unit 150IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 5 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed prior to the big hit suggestive effect (or the pre-game suggestive effect or the in-game suggestive effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. In the case where a predetermined effect that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit medium suggestion effect (for example, a specific effect mode of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit medium suggestion effect In addition, the suggestion during big hit may be prioritized. Specifically, in the case where the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect, the image is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect. The image may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 150IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative pattern is variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body having the decorative pattern on the surface. (In other words, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern on its surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type game machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal operation at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting is changed (or Behavior may occur). Therefore, in the first variation after the setting is changed, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the variation may be executed (or the execution rate may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 150IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect by executing the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when the player gives an undesired suggestion. For example, when an even-numbered initial result is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, the ratio of executing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate may be increased. Further, not only the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, but also effects including a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to another person to reduce the visibility (or make it less noticeable) of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect.

  In addition to the setting suggestion effect of the characteristic unit 150IW, a simultaneous effect that is executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer or the real-time clock set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific mode. Therefore, the setting may be suggested.

  In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting according to the number of times the variable display is continuously executed without the holding memory becoming 0, or the number of starting winnings exceeding the upper limit holding memory number (for example, a predetermined image). Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be performed.

  In addition, during a predetermined operation effective period, setting suggestive effect suggesting the setting based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B (for example, display control of a predetermined image or output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control). (Emission control of the lamp is performed) may be performed.

  The characteristic part 150IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the characteristic part 150IW, the security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 150IW001a by way of example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side. Good. Specifically, as a modified example 1, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (A) and 14-35 (B), a security cover 150IW500B including a short piece 150IW500Ba and a long piece 150IW500Bb is provided, for example, with respect to the substrate case 150IW201. The right end of the long piece 150IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between a covering position for covering the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and a covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201 to set through the through hole 150IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 150IW500Bb. The key 150IW051 may be operable. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the sliding movement in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 150IW201 with the security cover 150IW500B (long piece 150IW500Bb) covering the setting key 150IW051 is performed. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is released. The restricted state can be released (can be changed to the permitted state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (A) and 14-35 (B), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the substrate case 150IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, by sliding the security cover 150IW500B with respect to the board case 150IW201, the projecting dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the board case 150IW201 is extended to the length L2. (L2> L1).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 14-36 (A), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 150IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 150IW201. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by the store clerk or the like operating the setting key 150IW051 by sliding the board case 150IW201 until it reaches the length L2 (making the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state). Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B), the security cover 150IW500B is mounted on the board case 150IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 150IW201 becomes the length L1. If it is not slidably moved (without changing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the restricted state), the security cover 150IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. Has become.

  Therefore, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, and therefore the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500B. Forgetting to do so, that is, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 150IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 150IW001a and the gaming machine frame 150IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left and right is restricted. However, the security cover 150IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction within a range in which the setting key 150IW051 is kept covered by the security cover 150IW500B.

(Modification 2)
Further, as a mode in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (A) and 14-37 (B) as a modified example 2, the left end portion of the security cover 150IW500C is a gaming machine. Between a covering position for covering the right side portion of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and a covering releasing position rotated from the covering position around the pivot 150IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 150IW003 and oriented in the vertical direction. It may be pivotally supported by. In such a case, when closing the gaming machine frame 150IW003, the front end of the short piece 150IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 150IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 150IW001a, and the long piece 150IW500Cb pushes the setting key 150IW051 to the rear side. The rotation from the state of being covered to the back side may be restricted.

  When the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered. Then, it can be operated. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the pachinko gaming machine is restricted in its rotation by the security cover 150IW500C (long piece 150IW500Cb) covering the setting key 150IW051. 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to the allowed state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (A), the security cover 150IW500C in the present modification 2 rotates around the pivot 150IW500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), thereby The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a store clerk or the like operating the setting key 150IW051. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (B), the security cover 150IW500C is rotated clockwise in plan view and the security cover 150IW500C is used to set a key. Unless the 150IW051 is covered (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the regulated state), the security cover 150IW500C abuts on the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. Has become.

  For this reason, in this modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, so that the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500C. Forgetting to do so, that is, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characteristic section 150IW, an example in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 150IW003 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a glass door frame. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening the 150IW003a. Incidentally, in the case where the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 150IW003a in this way, a modified example 3 is shown in FIGS. 14-39 (A) to 14-39 (C). As described above, the through hole 150IW003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 150IW003, and the setting key 150IW051 can be operated via the through hole 150IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 150IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 11 opposite to the mounting surface. .

  In this way, when the setting key 150IW051 can be operated via the through hole 150IW003b, a door body 150IW003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 150IW003b is provided, and when the door body 150IW003c is closed, the setting key 150IW051 The operation may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 14-39 (B) and 14-39 (C), when the door body 150IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 150IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 150IW003a. Since 150IW003c will be sandwiched between the glass door frame 150IW003a and the gaming machine frame 150IW003 so that it can be opened and closed, it is possible to strongly prevent the setting key 150IW051 from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed. Therefore, security can be improved.

As described above, the characteristic portion 150IW includes the following first invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902. . Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed and a process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. Further, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol is changed, but it may be more regular (at the time of total change, every predetermined number of changes, etc.) or irregular (when a random number is drawn). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, the effect is not always achieved. Can not be raised. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, puzzle effect) (for example, step 150IWS606 in effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a puzzle effect, and performs step 150IWS608 and effect during variable display effect step (step S172). Part to be executed)
The suggestive effect execution means,
When a display in which a plurality of specific constituent elements (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) are gathered is performed, the specific suggestion effect (for example, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) is generated as the suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the effect in which the set value “1” is suggested) by collecting all the pieces up to the above) to complete the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1),
When a display in which a plurality of special components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3)) are gathered is performed, the special suggestion effect (for example, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3)) is generated as the suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the effect in which the set value “3” is suggested) by collecting all the pieces up to the individual piece) to complete the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3),
The specific component and the special component are displayed in a different manner according to the set value that is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (B), when the set value is “1”). , The percentage of execution of the puzzle effect 1 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) are likely to be gathered a little. In addition, for example, when the set value is “3” as shown in FIG. , The percentage of execution of the puzzle effect 3 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are likely to be slightly gathered.)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player has a staging effect. Can be increased.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the first invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, puzzle effect) (for example, step 150IWS606 in effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a puzzle effect, and performs step 150IWS608 and effect during variable display effect step (step S172). Part to be executed)
The suggestive effect execution means,
When a display in which a plurality of specific constituent elements (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) are gathered is performed, the specific suggestion effect (for example, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) is generated as the suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the effect in which the set value “1” is suggested) by collecting all the pieces up to the above) to complete the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1),
When a display in which a plurality of special components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3)) are gathered is performed, the special suggestion effect (for example, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3)) is generated as the suggestion effect. It is possible to execute the effect in which the set value “3” is suggested) by collecting all the pieces up to the individual piece) to complete the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3),
The specific component and the special component are displayed in a different manner according to the set value that is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (B), when the set value is “1”). , The percentage of execution of the puzzle effect 1 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) tend to be slightly gathered.For example, as shown in FIG. Indicates that the execution rate of the puzzle effect 3 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) tend to be slightly gathered together.),
further,
Suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion production (pseudo continuous production, expectation notice production) that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, big hit game state).
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation of subtracting a numerical value, countup operation of adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the suggestive effect. And an executable predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player has a staging effect. Can be increased. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

  In this example, the case where an image such as a puzzle piece is displayed as the specific component or the special component is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the sound of various musical instruments may be output as a specific component or a special component, and the set value set by the sound output sounds may be suggested.

  In addition, in this example, as a specific example of a mode in which "the display in which the specific constituent element and the special constituent element are gathered in a different manner depending on the set value that is set" is performed, as shown in FIGS. Although a case has been described in which the puzzle pieces corresponding to the set values are configured to be easily collected, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, depending on the set value, it is different whether or not the puzzles are collected up to the maximum value (5 in this example) to complete the puzzle, the way in which the puzzle pieces are collected up to the middle is different, Various modes are conceivable, such as changing the ease of acquiring pieces.

  Further, in this example, the case where the puzzle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern and the puzzle pieces are collected is illustrated, but the invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured such that some puzzle effect is executed during the big hit game and the puzzle pieces are collected.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the specific suggestive effect, while the special suggestive effect cannot be executed, when the set value being set is the specific set value (for example, the set value “1”). If Y in step 150IWS813, the effect control CPU 120 can execute puzzle effects 1 by executing steps 150IWS815 to S818, but if N in step 150IWS813 and Y in step 150IWS814, step 150IWS815. ~ Cancel the puzzle effect without shifting to S818)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, the effect effect Can be increased.

  In this example, if the setting value is "1", it is ensured that only puzzle 1 is completed, and if the setting value is "2", there is no possibility that puzzles other than puzzle 2 are completed. In the case where the setting value is “3”, the case where the puzzles other than the puzzle 3 are not completed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the setting value "1" having a particularly low profitability is set, the puzzle 3 corresponding to the setting value "3" having a high profitability is restricted from being completed, and in other cases, it is actually restricted. The puzzles other than the puzzle corresponding to the set value may be completed in some cases.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the first invention,
Whether or not the suggestion effect executing means performs the display for collecting the specific constituent elements or the special constituent elements based on that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the lottery process for presence / absence of the puzzle effect in step 150IWS802 is won). Production (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 (E) and 14-34 (J), one new piece flies and becomes one of puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) to puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)). It is described that a production effect that encourages whether or not a new puzzle fits may be executed. According to such a configuration, any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is described. In the gaming machine that can be set to the set value, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which one new piece flies, and an effect is executed to fuel which one of the puzzles 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) to 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits in. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if you perform an effect that stirs whether or not you can acquire a piece, or if you perform an effect that displays multiple pieces and then decides which of those pieces can be acquired. Well, various embodiments are possible.

  In addition, in this example, as the “predetermined condition”, the case where the lottery process is performed for each variable display and the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that the lottery process is won is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the puzzle effect may be executed based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established based on a big hit, or the puzzle effect may be executed based on the appearance of a predetermined notice effect. Various modes are conceivable as the predetermined condition.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can perform a display for collecting the specific component and the special component regardless of which setting value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27). In any of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the execution ratio of any one of the puzzle effects 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3% higher than that of the other puzzle effects, so that any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 is executed. Pieces are easy to gather to some extent)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, the effect effect Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means performs a display (for example, puzzle display screen 150IW110 shown in FIG. 14-33 (H)) capable of confirming the states of the specific constituent elements and the special constituent elements being collected (for example, for effect control). (Part of CPU 120 that executes step 150 IWS518)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted. That is, in this example, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by showing the state of the puzzle pieces being collected. In particular, in this example, when the number of fluctuations is 1000 times or less, puzzle pieces corresponding to the highly advantageous setting value “3” are likely to be gathered, so that the setting is highly advantageous to the player. It can be expected that the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

  In this example, the puzzle display screen 150IW110 is displayed during the customer waiting demonstration display to confirm the acquisition status of each puzzle piece and the completed puzzle status. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the acquisition status of the pieces of each puzzle and the status of the completed puzzle may be incorporated into the interface screen and constantly displayed so that the puzzle status can be constantly checked.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 6 of the first invention,
Even if the set value that has been set is a set value with a low degree of advantage, the suggestive effect execution means performs a display in which a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4) of special components corresponding to the high degree of advantage are gathered. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27 (A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 2 as compared with the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. It is 3% higher, and after turning on the game machine, until the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the rate at which the number of pieces in the puzzle 3 increases by one is slightly high.)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
An information output unit (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output means, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) can be executed (for example, step in effect control CPU 120). 150 IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed).
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In the characteristic unit 150IW, for example, it is assumed that the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 is not backed up, and the value of each piece counter is reset when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, and the power is restored. When throwing in, each puzzle shall be started in a reset state. It should be noted that at least a part of the RAM 122 may be configured to be backed up with a power source so as to back up the value of each piece counter, and in this case, the value of each piece counter stored in the RAM 122 may be stored in response to a reset operation by a game shop clerk. The value may be reset.

Further, in the above case, for example, the game machine may be configured to start up when some pieces of some puzzles are gathered when the game shop is opened. Further, in this case, the set value may be suggested depending on which puzzle piece is started up in a gathered state. In addition, there may be a pattern in which the game machine is activated when one of the puzzles is already completed when the game shop is opened.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 7 of the first invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the first invention described above.

The characteristic portion 150IW includes the following second invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902. . Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 describes that the setting change process is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is operated to the ON side. .. It is also described that the RAM area other than the setting value storage means is cleared in the setting change processing. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the second invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operation means (for example, clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating means is operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process for changing the set value, a process execution means for executing the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (eg, step 150IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100). S034 and S048 are executed) and a gaming machine is described. According to this feature, any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is set. The processing can be suitably performed in the game machine configured to be settable. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, by storing the specific information (in this example, the RAM clear flag), confirming the RAM clear flag, and executing the process, it is possible to suitably perform the process. It can be performed.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the second invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operation means (for example, a clear switch) provided to execute initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. )When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating means is operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process for changing the set value, a process execution means for executing the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (eg, step 150IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100). (The part that executes S034 and S048),
Suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion production (pseudo continuous production, expectation notice production) that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, big hit game state).
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation of subtracting a numerical value, countup operation of adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the suggestive effect. And an executable predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), The gaming machine is characterized in that the jackpot expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed. According to this feature, for the player, In the gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages, it is possible to suitably perform the processing. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, by storing the specific information (in this example, the RAM clear flag), confirming the RAM clear flag, and executing the process, it is possible to suitably perform the process. It can be performed. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

In addition, you may make it suggest a setting value by the aspect of the predetermined production which performs a predetermined operation and changes the display mode of production display corresponding to execution of suggestive production. For example, as the set value that is set is more advantageous to the player, the proportion of the first predetermined effect (for example, countdown effect) executed may be higher, or the second predetermined effect (for example, countup effect). ) May be executed at a higher rate. If the set value that has been set is more advantageous to the player, the higher the rate at which the first predetermined effect is executed is, the first predetermined effect with a relatively lower jackpot expectation degree is executed, and an advantageous state is achieved. Even if it is not controlled, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the set value that has been set is advantageous to the player, and thus it is possible to avoid a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Further, if the set value that has been set is more advantageous to the player, the rate at which the second predetermined effect is executed becomes higher, so that the second predetermined effect having a relatively high jackpot expectation is executed. Nevertheless, even if the player is not controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the set value that is set is advantageous to the player, and thus it is possible to avoid a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.
In addition, when performing a predetermined operation corresponding to the execution of the suggestion effect and changing the display mode of the effect display, the set value suggestion effect may be performed by the effect display device (image display device 5). . For example, when a predetermined effect is performed, a character is displayed on the effect display device, the character is selected from among a plurality of types each time the predetermined effect is performed by lottery, and the selection ratio of each character is set according to the set value. By making the set value different, the more advantageous the set value that is set for the player, the easier it is for the effect of the specific type of character to be performed in the predetermined effect. By doing so, the set value suggestion effect will be performed when the predetermined effect is executed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be further improved.

  In this example, as a process to be executed “using specific information multiple times”, a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 150IWS026 and S027 depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS025. Control, whether to execute the process of changing the setting value of step 150IWS035 to S042 according to whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS034, or to clear the RAM in step 150IWS048. The case where the restoration process or the RAM clear 1 process of steps 150IWS049 and S051 is executed depending on whether the flag is set is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, whether or not the operation switch is enabled may be controlled immediately before the operation of changing the set value depending on whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value based on the operation of the operation means in the set value change processing (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS039 to S042).
It is described that such a configuration may be adopted, and according to such a configuration, the operating means can also be used, so that an increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, since the clear switch can be used as the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 102 and the operation means for changing the setting value, the cost increase can be suppressed. it can.

  In this example, by using the clear switch also, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when turning on the power to the gaming machine, so the clear switch should be turned on first when turning on the power to the gaming machine. When it is detected, the RAM clear flag is set, and thereafter, whether the RAM clear flag is set or not is checked to see if the clear switch operation for initializing the RAM 102 is performed. The operation of the clear switch for the changing operation is performed by confirming the state of the clear switch itself so that the processing can be appropriately performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
A normal initialization process (for example, a RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the game machine is started, while the power supply to the game machine is started. Sometimes, initialization processing executing means for executing initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of abnormality (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
On the basis of the state of the operating means being switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion for executing step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the set value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 150IWS041). If Y, execute step 150IWS042),
The determining means determines whether or not the operating means is operated by setting the state of the operating means for the first time when the power supply to the gaming machine is started to be on (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100). If N in step 150IWS036, execute step 150IWS037)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
It is provided with a timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a portion executing steps S21 to S27 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs.
The processing execution means executes the processing by using the specific information a plurality of times until the timer interrupt processing is executed after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is Steps 150 IWS025, S034, S048 are executed)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
An information output unit (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output means, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) can be executed (for example, step in effect control CPU 120). 150 IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed).
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.
The game machines of means 2 to 6 of the second invention that can be applied to the game machine of means 1 of the second invention described above can also be applied to the game machine of means A of the second invention described above.

Further, the characteristic portion 150IW includes the following third invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2017-60546. . Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-60546 describes that when the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to enable the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-60546, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operating means (for example, a clear switch),
Process execution means capable of executing the set value changing process for changing the set value based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, a game control microcomputer 100), which executes steps 150 IWS039 to S042 in 100),
Based on that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 150IWS041). Prepare,
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the set value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the step If Y in 150IWS041, execute step 150IWS042),
The determining means determines whether or not the operating means has been operated by setting the state of the operating means for the first time when the setting value changing process is started to the ON state (for example, the game controlling microcomputer 100 is , If N in step 150IWS036, execute step 150IWS037)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is preferably processed. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the setting value is unintentionally changed, even if the operating means (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the third invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2017-60546,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operating means (for example, a clear switch),
Process execution means capable of executing the set value changing process for changing the set value based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, a game control microcomputer 100), which executes steps 150 IWS039 to S042 in 100),
Based on that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 150IWS041). Prepare,
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the set value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the step If Y in 150IWS041, execute step 150IWS042),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means is operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the setting value change processing is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is , If step 150IWS036 is N, execute step 150IWS037),
further,
Suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion production (pseudo continuous production, expectation notice production) that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, big hit game state).
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation of subtracting a numerical value, countup operation of adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the suggestive effect. And an executable predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is preferably processed. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the setting value is unintentionally changed, even if the operating means (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including the setting value changing process, the process executing means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, executes steps 150IWS025, S034, S048 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
A normal initialization process (for example, a RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the game machine is started, while the power supply to the game machine is started. Sometimes, initialization processing executing means for executing initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of abnormality (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
First state storage means (for example, a previous clear switch buffer) that stores the state of the previous operation means,
A second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the operating means this time,
The determining means can determine that the operating means has been operated based on that the stored content of the first state storage means is in the off state and the stored content of the second state storage means is in the on state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 150IWS041),
The first state storage means stores the ON state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the setting value change processing is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 150IWS037).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
An information output unit (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output means, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) can be executed (for example, step in effect control CPU 120). 150 IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed).
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 5 of the third invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the third invention described above.

Further, the characteristic portion 150IW includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means (for example, a portion executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part of CPU 120 that executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
When the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the steps 150IWS513, S707, and S904).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the fourth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means (for example, a portion executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part of CPU 120 that executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
If the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the steps 150IWS513, S707, and S904).
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice announcement effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation of subtracting a numerical value, countup operation of adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the suggestive effect. And an executable predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 150IWS047 and S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing, so that the game It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined by using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table). A suggestion effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 150IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122). Steps 150 IWS511, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set values that are set),
If the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 150IWS513, S707, and S904 based on the setting value "1")
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent an increase in data capacity.

  In the feature unit 150IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggested effect" includes determining whether or not to execute the suggested effect, and also includes determining the effect mode of the suggested effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect, or the like, depending on the set value that is set during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 14-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 14-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game for a predetermined period of time and to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. In addition, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 14-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when the jackpot suggestion production is recognized in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the fourth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) varies depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 14-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 14-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the fourth invention,
An opening / closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is regulated. On the other hand, in the state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A 14B, FIG. 14-3, FIG. 14-35, and FIG. 14-38), the restriction state is released and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to operate.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 12 of the fourth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the fourth invention described above.

In addition, the characteristic portion 150IW also includes the following fifth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means (for example, a portion executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part of CPU 120 that executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect executing means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S150IWS514 N, S708). N, when N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed)
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means (for example, a portion executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part of CPU 120 that executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect executing means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines N in step 150IWS514 and S708). N, when N in S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed),
further,
A predetermined suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
Predetermined effect (countdown effect, count-up effect) that changes the display mode of effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, count-up operation for adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the predetermined suggestive effect. And a predetermined effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 150IWS047 and S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing, so that the game It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect, or the like, depending on the set value that is set during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 14-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 14-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game for a predetermined period of time and to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. In addition, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 14-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when the jackpot suggestion production is recognized in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) varies depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 14-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 14-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
An opening / closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is regulated. On the other hand, in the state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A 14B, FIG. 14-3, FIG. 14-35, and FIG. 14-38), the restriction state is released and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to operate.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 11 of the fifth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention described above.

The characteristic portion 150IW also includes the sixth invention described below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means (for example, a portion executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part of CPU 120 that executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect (for example, By performing steps 150IWS515, S709, S906, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the sixth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
A game control means (for example, a portion executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (A part of CPU 120 that executes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, By performing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode),
further,
A predetermined suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
Predetermined effect (countdown effect, count-up effect) that changes the display mode of effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, count-up operation for adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the predetermined suggestive effect. And a predetermined effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 150IWS047 and S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing, so that the game It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined by using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table). A suggestion effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 150IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122). Steps 150 IWS511, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set values that are set),
If the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table in step 150IWS515. , S709, S906 are executed)
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect, or the like, depending on the set value that is set during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 14-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 14-23 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game for a predetermined period of time and to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. In addition, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 14-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when the jackpot suggestion production is recognized in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) varies depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 14-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 14-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the sixth invention,
An opening / closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening / closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is regulated. On the other hand, in the state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A 14B, FIG. 14-3, FIG. 14-35, and FIG. 14-38), the restriction state is released and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to operate.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 12 of the sixth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the sixth invention described above.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 150IW, it is configured to be able to change to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the setting value information is not normally input when the effect mode A is controlled, The player is configured to be able to perform the suggestive effect as if it is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player (the above-described fourth invention), and is set to the set value if the effect mode B is controlled. When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggested effect (the above-mentioned configuration of the fifth invention), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is configured to be executable as the suggestive effect (the above-mentioned sixth invention configuration). I can't stop. For example, the control method of any of the above-mentioned fourth invention to sixth invention may be switched depending on the game state. In this case, for example, when the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, the suggestive effect can be executed assuming that the preset value is set to have a low advantage for the player. In the configuration (configuration of the above-mentioned fourth invention), if the game state is a time saving state, if the set value information is not normally input, the execution of the suggestive effect is limited (from the above-mentioned fifth invention. If the game state is a probability change state and the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect ( The configuration of the above sixth invention) may be performed.

  In addition, it is not necessary to configure the suggestive effect by all the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention described above, and it is possible to execute the suggestive effect by using only one control method. Good.

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 150IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to missing or garbled data, the control method of the fourth invention to the sixth invention controls execution of the suggestive effect (implied. Although the effect is limited), the case is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if the set value command is received, but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be limited. In this case, for example, each time the set value command is received, the set value indicated by the set value command received on the effect control means side is stored, and when a new set value command is received thereafter, When the set value indicated by the set value command received in step 1 and the previously stored set value do not match, it is determined that the inconsistency has occurred, and execution of the suggestive effect is performed by the control method of the above fourth invention to sixth invention. You may make it control (limit suggestive production).

  Further, the way to make the game different for each of the set values "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, if the set value is an odd number such as “1” or “3”, the consecutive villas (when big hits continuously occur during the probability change state) are likely to occur and the consecutive villas occur. It is configured so that there is a large difference from when it is difficult, and in the case of even-numbered setting values such as the setting value "2", it is configured so that the likelihood of a condominium is relatively constant and does not change. The suggestive effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be executable. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the above-mentioned fourth invention to sixth invention. It may be configured to perform (limit suggestive effects).

  Further, the control method for executing the suggestion effect when the set value command shown in the fourth invention to the sixth invention is not normally received can also be applied to the puzzle effect as the suggestion effect.

The seventh aspect of the present invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 150IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect before game) at a ratio different depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is described that the gaming machine is characterized by being capable of executing (or initial performance), and according to this characteristic, the gaming machine is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the gaming machine is played from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the seventh invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect before game) at a ratio different depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. And initial appearance production)
further,
A predetermined suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
Predetermined effect (countdown effect, count-up effect) that changes the display mode of effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, count-up operation for adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the predetermined suggestive effect. And a predetermined effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game and to motivate him to play the game from an early time period. Can be increased. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of production identification information (for example, a decorative pattern),
The suggestion effect execution means, in the period from the setting value is changed until the first variable display is executed, the suggestion effect display information different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value being set (for example, It is described that the odd number initial display result) may be executed, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the game machine is restored after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 14). As shown in -20 (A) and (B), pre-game suggestive effect determination tables with different determination values are used)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute a specific suggestive effect (for example, suggestive effect during game play, suggestive effect during big hit, etc.) that suggests the set value that has been set, after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may be set to have a higher degree of reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 103 wins a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 5 of the seventh invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the seventh invention described above.

Further, the characteristic portion 150IW also includes the eighth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different ratios depending on the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 14-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 14-23 (A), (B)).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance amusement of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestion effect execution means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 14-6 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B)),
further,
A predetermined suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
Predetermined effect (countdown effect, count-up effect) that changes the display mode of effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, count-up operation for adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the predetermined suggestive effect. And a predetermined effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance amusement of the game. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to different ratios when the set value is changed and when it is not changed (for example, FIG. 14-6 (A), B))),
It is described that the variable display execution means may be capable of executing variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when it is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to a different ratio when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 14-6 (A) and (B)),
The variable display execution means can execute the variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect. The suggestion effect can be executed based on the fact that the notice effect has been executed or the like (for example, when the big hit occurs within the specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed. (See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 103 wins a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 5 of the eighth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention described above.

The ninth aspect of the invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 150IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that it is not possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is not possible to sufficiently raise the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the ninth invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B)).
A gaming machine is described, which further includes an informing unit (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed. According to this feature, In addition, it is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the ninth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 14-23 (A) and (B)).
In addition, a notification unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information about the executed suggested effect is further provided.
further,
A predetermined suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
Predetermined effect (countdown effect, count-up effect) that changes the display mode of effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, count-up operation for adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the predetermined suggestive effect. And a predetermined effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effect that has been executed in the past (the suggestive effect that suggests the set value that has been set), and to enhance the enjoyment of the game. be able to. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestive effect has been executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the information regarding the suggested effect that has been executed while waiting for the customer for which variable display has not been executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (e.g., execution history information) relating to the executed suggestive effect;
Image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display unit (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a manner that can be imaged by the image pickup device may be provided. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 103 wins a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 6 of the ninth invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the ninth invention described above.

The characteristic portion 150IW also includes the tenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B)),
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. (See (D))
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

In addition, as a game machine of means A of the tenth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
And a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests the set value being set,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B)),
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See D)),
further,
A predetermined suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
Predetermined effect (countdown effect, count-up effect) that changes the display mode of effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, count-up operation for adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the predetermined suggestive effect. And a predetermined effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 10th invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, executing one of them in the fanfare period and ending the other). Change to run in period)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed. See FIG. 14-29 (D). )
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestive effect does not become difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 150IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (for example, a big hit medium suggestion). Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
The suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect that displays a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display unit (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display related to the suggestive performance with priority over the display related to the predetermined performance, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest. You can

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 103 wins a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 6 of the tenth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the tenth invention described above.

The 11th invention shown below is also included in the characteristic part 150IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the entertainment may be deteriorated by executing the setting suggesting production which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. A game machine characterized by further including a difficult character effect, a light guide effect, an error display, etc. is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the eleventh invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. It is further equipped with hard-to-use feature effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.,
further,
A predetermined suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
Predetermined effect (countdown effect, count-up effect) that changes the display mode of effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, count-up operation for adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the predetermined suggestive effect. And a predetermined effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 11th invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 150IW101). According to such a configuration, , The production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the 11th invention,
A light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 150IW103) having a light-transmitting property capable of transmitting light,
A light-emitting body provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection unit that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the light emitting plate to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of presentation.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the 11th invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification for displaying an error. According to such a configuration, the error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting value is set to the first set value (for example, suggestion during big hit in the first effect mode. See FIGS. 14-29 (A) and (B)). , A second setting suggestion that suggests that the second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value is set (for example, suggestion during big hit in the third effect mode. FIG. 14-29 ( (See A) and (B)),
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (for example, see FIG. 14-29 (E)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the 11th invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution rate of setting suggestion is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after power-on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (management Can be operated only by the person) so that the settings related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged,
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may perform the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 103 wins a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 8 of the eleventh invention applicable to the gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the eleventh invention described above.

Further, the characteristic portion 150IW also includes a twelfth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that the gambling property may become too high in a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 14-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the twelfth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) varies depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 14-5),
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice announcement effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation of subtracting a numerical value, countup operation of adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the suggestive effect. And an executable predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), A gaming machine characterized by a higher jackpot expectation when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed). It is possible to prevent the price from becoming too high. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 14-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 14-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 14-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 14-5 (A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The effect execution means is configured to be able to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, interval effect, ending effect, etc.) regardless of the set value that has been set during the predetermined control period in the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance according to the set value that is set. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of controlling in a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 14-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 103 wins a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The game machines of means 2 to 10 of the twelfth invention applicable to the game machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention described above can also be applied to the game machine of means A of the twelfth invention described above.

The feature section 150IW also includes the thirteenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that the gambling property may become too high in a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the 13th invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 14-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Further, as a game machine of means A of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 14-7),
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice announcement effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (countdown operation of subtracting a numerical value, countup operation of adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the suggestive effect. And an executable predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" which is set as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” defined as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as the initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high. Further, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined display area.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 13th invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 14-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the 13th invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set, and such a configuration will result in excessive gambling. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the 13th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (for example, see FIG. 14-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the 13th invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the 13th invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIG. 14-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the 13th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a big winning opening) (for example, the CPU 103 wins a prize). Part that executes sphere processing),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of means 2 to 7 of the thirteenth invention that can be applied to the gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention described above can also be applied to the gaming machine of means A of the thirteenth invention described above.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 150IW, the case is shown in which the setting values can be set in three steps of the setting values "1" to "3", but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the setting values of, for example, four steps or more are set. It may be configured such that it can be set to a value, or can be set to a two-step set value. In this case, for example, it is configured such that the setting value can be set in 6 steps, and the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the expectation degree (henceforth) when the setting value is "6" The reliability may be the highest.

  Further, the configuration shown by the characteristic unit 150IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other characteristic units such as the characteristic unit 31AK to configure a gaming machine. For example, in the case of executing the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect indicated by the characteristic part 150IW, the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the effect, the title corresponding to the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect may be notified in a manner similar to that of the characteristic part 31AK. .

1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Gaming board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A ... 1st special symbol display device (special symbol display device)
4B 2nd special symbol display device (special symbol display device)
5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice Control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Starting port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hit ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled,
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation in response to the execution of the suggestive effect;
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
A first predetermined effect for performing a predetermined operation after displaying the effect display according to the first special mode,
It is possible to execute a second predetermined effect in which a predetermined operation is performed after displaying the effect display according to the second special mode,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed,
further,
Specific suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a specific suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled,
A title notifying unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the specific suggestion effect,
The game machine characterized in that the title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the specific suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the specific suggestion effect.